WebVision™
USER GUIDE
Approvals
UL 916, C-UL listed to Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
C22.2 No. 205-M1983 “Signal Equipment”, CE, FCC part 15
Class A, C-tick (Australia)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
WebVision™ is a web-based building manager that allows
contractors and facility managers to view and command
HVAC controllers installed at their sites. It communicates over
®
the LonWorks network to perform building management
control of various devices and controllers through a web
browser. The WebVision Bundle (WWS-VL1A1000) includes
the WebVision controller pre-installed with a LON
communications card, and power supply.
CAUTION
WebVision accessing the same Lon network
simultaneously. If more than one WebVision
accesses the same Lon network simultaneously,
there may be problems in downloading and
uploading parameters.
Make sure that there is not more than one
®
WebVision is capable of:
•
•
•
Discovering unitary controllers connected to WebVision
Configuring controllers using configuration wizards
Monitoring, raising, and e-mailing alarms on controller
points and system events
®
NOTE: WebVision is compatible with Microsoft Internet
®
Explorer (IE) 6.0 SP2 or higher. Suggested screen
•
•
•
•
Configuring and collecting trends on points
Driving scheduled occupancy states
Managing energy through Demand Limit Control (DLC)
Providing single point of entry into the system to perform all
the above mentioned tasks.
resolution is 1280x1024 pixels.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that there is only one WebVision
accessing the LONWORKS network at a given point in
time. If more than one WebVision accesses the
same LONWORKS network simultaneously, ensure
that its logical address is unique in the network to
avoid address conflicts. For a LONWORKS network,
logical address refers to Subnet/NodeID.
•
•
Managing access to information through user privileges
Providing IT-friendly network interface for easy access and
management
WebVision acts as an offline configuration tool that helps the
contractor to configure site project that consists of multiple
unitary controllers. The contractor can commission all the
controllers by connecting through a LAN, WAN, or Dial-up.
WebVision also acts like a network time master to synchronize
time and date in devices connected to it with its own time and
date or with the Internet time servers. Its Device Discovery
feature enables you to discover online devices. You can
manage users and control their access to different resources
in the system. The System Administrator can configure
network settings, site information settings, system and control,
network data and time settings, and new module installation.
Contents
95-7769-01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Fig. 4. Graphics Tab.
There are 3 locations in the WebVision where you can view
and setup graphics. These are:
Fig. 3. Password Reminder screen.
•
•
Network Tree > WebVision Node (Max 1 Graphic)
Network Tree > Device Node. One graphic for each device.
This is the default device graphic. You can add a maximum
of three links on the graphic pointing to an external URL or
to another graphic.
TIP: The information you provide is validated against the
information present in the WebVision database. If the
information is correct, WebVision will send the user ID
and password to your E-Mail account.
•
Location Tree. You can create user defined location
hierarchy (as tree). For each location (tree node), there can
be one user defined graphic. You can customize the
graphic and set a background image, monitor and
command points, add links to external web sites, and add
links to a different graphic.
TIP: If you do not remember the password recovery
information and the answer provided by you is incorrect,
you can request the WebVision Administrator to reset
your password. In any other case, please contact the
Honeywell Support for assistance.
You can insert the following in a graphic:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Background images
Points
Devices
Working with Tables
Click the column header of a column that you want to sort in
ascending/descending order. Columns that you can sort are
distinguished by an underlined column header. Tables are, by
default, displayed in ascending order. However, for alarms,
default display is in the reverse chronological order (the most
current alarm is displayed on top).
Text
External Links
Links to other graphics
NOTE: Apart from the Contractor (who has all the privileges
in WebVision) all the users who add/replicate new
graphics have access to all the graphics created by
them.
•
•
•
•
•
Click
Click
Click
Click
to move to the next page.
to move to the previous page.
to move to the last page.
to move to the first page.
To view a graphic:
1. Click the Graphics tab. The View Graphics page
appears.
2. Select the graphic you want to view from the list. The
selected graphic appears.
Type the number of rows you want to view on each page in
the text box next to
.
To setup a graphic:
•
Type the page number that you want to navigate to in the
Page field. This enables you to quickly move to the page of
your interest without having to wade through all intervening
pages.
1. Click the Graphics tab. The View Graphic page
appears.
2. Click Setup Graphics. The Setup Graphics page
appears.
Use the following options to configure graphics:
Graphics
TIP: Move the pointer over any button. A tool tip appears
A graphic is a pictorial illustration of a building's layout
coupled with the placement of various devices within a
building. With the help of a graphic you can view the various
devices installed in your building.
describing the action performed by the button.
3
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
To insert a background image:
To insert text:
1. Click the Insert Text button. A Text Message box
NOTE: The supported background image formats include:
jpg, jpeg, and gif.
appears.
The size of the image file must not exceed 1MB.
1. Click the Insert Background Image button. The Insert
Background Image dialog box appears.
Fig. 7. Text Message Box.
2. Type the required text in the Edit Text field.
3. Click Save to reflect the changes in the image.
Fig. 5. Insert Background Image dialog box.
NOTE: To abort the action, click Cancel.
2. Browse and select an image that you want to use as
background image.
3. Click Upload to insert the image.
To insert an external link:
1. Click the Insert External Link button. The Add Link
NOTE: To abort the action, click Cancel.
dialog box appears.
To insert a point:
1. Click the Insert Point button. The Insert Point dialog
box appears.
Fig. 8. Add Link dialog box.
2. Select a link from the Link To drop-down list. You can
select from Device Graphics, Locations Graphics, or an
External URL.
3. If you select the Device Graphics option, the Insert
Device dialog box appears. Select a Channel and
Device and click OK.
4. If you select the Locations Graphics option, the Add
Link dialog box appears. Check the locations that you
want to add as link and click OK.
5. If you select the External URL option, the Insert
External Link dialog box appears. Type the Display
name for the url and type the url in the URL field.
6. Click OK to view the URL in the image.
Fig. 6. Insert Point dialog box.
2. Select the Channel, Device, and Point that you want to
add to the graphic from the corresponding drop-down
lists.
3. Click OK. The Point properties are displayed in the
background image.
NOTE: To abort the action, click Cancel.
NOTE: A maximum of fifty links can be inserted in a graphic
in WebVision.
NOTE: To abort the action, click Cancel.
95-7769—01
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Use one of the following filter options to search for the
required schedule:
To delete selected objects:
1. Select the object that you want to delete from the
•
•
Schedule Name
Current Occupancy State
graphic.
2. Click Delete Selected objects. The selected object is
deleted.
TIP: To quickly search the schedules, type the first letter of
schedule name or occupancy state, (as the case may
be) in the Keyword text box and type *. This lists all the
names starting with the first letter that you have written
in the Keyword text box.
To copy graphics:
1. Click the
button. The Copy Graphics From dialog
box appears.
2. Click Delete Selected objects. The selected object is
•
•
Schedule Name – Indicates the name of the schedule.
Schedule Type – Indicates if the schedule is configured in
the local system or followed from a remote system.
Current Occupancy State – Indicates the occupancy state
as defined by the schedule at the moment.
deleted.
Schedules
•
Schedules define the days and times when an occupancy
event must occur. Schedules are weekly calendars for
occupancy mode changes. Schedules also contain special
event information such as holidays or unplanned events.
NOTE: A maximum of 100 devices can be assigned to a
schedule.
•
•
•
Next Occupancy State – Indicates the occupancy state for
the next defined schedule.
Time Remaining (minutes) – Indicates the time remaining
in switching to next occupancy state.
NOTE: You can have a maximum of 50 schedules in
WebVision.
You can create, modify or delete a schedule only if you have
these privileges assigned to you.
Replicate – Click Replicate to replicate the settings.
There are three occupancy modes:
Add/Edit Schedules
•
•
•
•
Occupied – A period of time when the controlled
environment is considered to be occupied. It requires a
closer control for comfort, health, and safety.
Unoccupied – A period of time when the controlled
environment is considered to be unoccupied. It is used to
reduce energy consumption.
Standby – A period during the normal occupied period
when the space may not be occupied. It is used for energy
saving programs.
You can add a maximum of 50 schedules.
NOTE: All fields marked with an asterisk (*) are mandatory.
To create a new schedule:
1. Click the Schedule tab. A list of schedules appears.
2. Click
. The Properties page appears.
No Event – WebVision displays the default state as
Occupied when no event is configured.
NOTE: Apart from the Contractor (who has all the privileges
in WebVision) all the users who add new schedules
have access to all the schedules created by them.
To view schedules:
1. Click the Schedule tab. A list of schedules appear with
the following details in a tabular format:
Fig. 10. Schedule Properties page.
3. Select the Create New Schedule option.
4. Type a schedule name in the Schedule Name field and
provide a description in the Description field.
5. Select the cells by dragging over the cells. Cells can be
selected horizontally and vertically. After selecting the
cells, click on the schedule occupancy state button to
indicate the state on the selected cell.
6. Click Apply to apply the schedule.
7. Click Finish to save the settings.
Fig. 9. Schedule Tab.
NOTE: Click Edit Time and type the Start Time and End
Time. You can change the start and end time of the
selected area.
TIP: Use Filters to quickly search the required Schedules.
5
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
All the special events along with a summary appear in a
tabular format.
To edit a schedule:
1. Click the Schedule tab. A list of schedules appears.
2. Click the schedule that you want to edit by clicking the
corresponding link in the Schedule Name column.
3. Follow the steps described in the above sections and
make the required changes.
2. Click Add Special Event, to add new special events to
the list. The Add Special Event dialog box appears.
3. Enter/select the following information:
•
Event Name – Name of the special event.
Example: Thanksgiving Day.
•
Event Type – You can define the type of day using
the three options given: Date, Date Range, and
Week and Day. Depending on the selected criteria,
you get the following output:
Assign Devices
You can select a number of devices and assign them to a
current configuring schedule. You can change the settings as
and when required.
Date – If you select Date, specify the day, date,
month, and year.
To assign devices:
1. Click the Schedule tab. The Schedule page appears.
2. Go to Add Schedule. The Add Schedule page
appears.
3. Type a unique name for the schedule.
4. Click Assign Devices. The Assign Devices page
appears.
5. Check the devices from the Device Name list that you
want to assign to the current schedule.
All the devices that are already assigned to schedules
are listed in the Currently Assigned Schedule column.
If a device is already assigned to a schedule,
WebVision un-assigns the device from the earlier
schedule and assigns it to the current schedule.
6. Click Finish to save the settings.
NOTE: To abort the action, click Cancel.
Define Special Event
Holiday schedules and schedules for special events differ
from the normal days. You can define schedules for special
events using WebVision.
Fig. 12. Add Special Event dialog box.
Date Range – If you select Date Range, specify the date
range, month, and year (Fig. 13).
NOTE: You can define any number of special events in a
schedule.
To define a schedule for special events:
1. Click Special Event on the Properties page. The
Special Event page appears.
Fig. 13. Add Special Event dialog box - Date Range.
Fig. 11. Schedule Properties page - Special Event.
95-7769—01
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Week and Day – If you select Week and Day, specify the
Table 2. Default Canadian Holidays.
Name
New Year’s Days
Canada Day
Day
January 1st
July 1st
Labour Day
The first Monday in September
The second Monday in October
November 11th
Thanksgiving Day
Remembrance Day
Christmas Day
Boxing Day
December 25th
December 26th
To add the pre-configured holidays:
1. Select the US Calendar or Canadian Holidays using the
drop-down list on the Special Event page.
2. Click Add. The selected (US or Canadian) pre-
configured list of holidays is added and is displayed in
tabular format.
IMPORTANT
Fig. 14. Add Special Event dialog box - Week and Day.
Special events are not executed if you commit an
error in specifying them. WebVision cannot validate
the dates you enter for a special event. No error is
shown if you configure wrong dates for special event,
provided the dates are in the specified format.
4. Enter/select the following information under Select State
•
•
•
State – Occupied, Unoccupied, and Standby.
Start Time – The time to start the special event.
End Time – The time to end the special event.
NOTE: By default the occupancy state is 24 hours
Unoccupied.
Delete Schedules
To delete a schedule:
5. Click OK to save the settings.
1. Click the Schedule tab.
NOTE: Click Cancel to close the window without saving the
2. Select the check box corresponding to the schedule you
want to delete from the Schedules Name list.
3. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears.
4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
changes.
Default holiday list
Table 1 and Table 2 list the default holidays for the US and
Canada.
NOTE: Click Cancel to cancel deletion.
TIP: To delete all schedules at once, check the All check box
in the header and click Delete.
Table 1. Default US Holidays.
Name
Day
New Year’s Days
January 1st
Replicate Schedule
Martin Luther King Jr. Day The third Monday in January
You can replicate one schedule at a time. A maximum of 10
copies of the selected schedule can be replicated. Click
Replicate to replicate that schedule.
Presidents Day
Memorial Day
Independence Day
Labor Day
The third Monday in February
The last Monday in May
July 4th
To replicate a schedule:
1. Click the Schedule tab.
2. Click Replicate. The Replicate Schedule box is
displayed.
3. Enter the number of copies that you want to create.
4. Add a prefix or suffix to the new replicated schedule's
name in the Label text box.
The first Monday in September
The second Monday in October
November 11th
Columbus day
Veterans Day
Thanksgiving Day
Christmas Day
The fourth Thursday in November
December 25th
5. Click OK to confirm the replication.
NOTE: Click Cancel to cancel replication.
7
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
NOTE: Select the check box in the header row to select all
the listed alarms.
Alarms
•
•
Alarm Name – List of all alarm names.
Device Name – Lists all devices on which alarms are set.
To view the details of any device, click the respective
device.
Viewing alarms
A device configured with alarm settings is set when the value
of a point satisfies the alarm condition of that device.
•
•
•
Description – Indicates the condition that raised the
alarm.
Occurrence Time – Indicates the date and time when the
Use the Alarms tab to view and acknowledge alarms that are
raised on various devices. You can filter alarms based on
occurrence, acknowledgment status, ack time, RTN time,
priority, and so on. You can setup alarms, define their limits,
and prioritize them. You can also acknowledge alarms and
delete acknowledged alarms.
alarm was raised.
Priority – Indicates the priority level of an alarm. There are
ten priority levels defined in WebVision - 1 through 10. 1 is
low and 10 is the highest priority level.
•
•
Alarm State – Indicates alarm acknowledgement status.
Acknowledged by – Indicates the user who acknowledged
the alarm.
Acknowledge Time – Indicates the date and time when
the alarm was acknowledged.
Return to Normal Time – Indicates the date and time
when the alarm returned to the normal condition.
Alarm priorities can be set for each type of alarm condition.
The alarm priority can range from 1 to 10 and is used to
determine E-Mail alarm message recipients. High priority
alarms have a higher reporting priority. For example, system
alarms (for example, low battery) are always high priority.
•
•
E-Mail alarm messages can be sent to a maximum of 50 E-
Mail addresses. Any E-Mail alarm message can be sent to
any combination of 50 E-Mail addresses based on the priority
assigned.
TIP: Check the Enable Auto Refresh check box to enable
the auto refresh feature. The page is refreshed every 30
seconds.
When you add a device, all the default alarms present in that
device are added to WebVision. All the default alarms are
enabled.
To acknowledge an alarm:
1. Click the Alarms tab. The View Alarms page appears.
An alarm is raised when the value of a point on a device on
which an alarm condition is configured satisfies the alarm
condition. The View Alarms page displays a list of alarms
raised on devices along with information such as description
of the alarm, occurrence time of the alarm, the time when the
alarm was acknowledged, return to normal time, the priority of
the alarm, and so on.
To filter and view alarms:
1. Click the Alarms tab. The View Alarms page appears.
The following information appears in a tabular format:
Fig. 16. View Alarms page.
2. Select the check box corresponding to the alarm you
want to acknowledge.
3. Click Ack Alarm.
4. The alarm is acknowledged. The time and date when
the alarm is acknowledged appears in the Ack Time
column. The user name is displayed in the Ack By
column.
TIP: Select the check box in the header row to select all the
alarms for acknowledgment simultaneously.
Fig. 15. Alarms Tab.
95-7769—01
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
down list. The selected values are reflected in
the Alarm Setup screen. Type a Display Name
for the point.
Exporting Alarms
You can export alarms on WebVision.
To export alarms:
NOTE: The alarm condition depends on the type of selected
point. If it is a numeric point, you must provide Alarm
High Limit and Alarm Low Limit. If it is a discrete
value (Enumerated or Boolean) point, then select an
alarm value in the possible point value list in the
combo box.
1. Click the Alarms tab. The View Alarms page appears.
2. Click Export All Alarms to download all the alarms at
once.
3. A .csv file is displayed.
4. Click Open to open the file and click Save to save the
file on your computer.
Example: For Occupancy State, you can select alarm value as
Unoccupied in which case WebVision raises an alarm
whenever the point has Unoccupied as its value.
To E-Mail alarms:
1. Select the alarms you would want to e-mail by clicking
the corresponding check boxes.
2. Click E-Mail. An Enter Email Addresses box is
displayed. Enter a list of e-mail addresses to which the
selected alarms must be E-Mailed. The list must be
separated by a semicolon (;).
3. Click Ok. The selected alarms are E-Mailed to those
recipients.
•
Select Alarm value – This option is available for
enum and boolean values. Select the required
alarm value from the drop down list.
Limits:
•
•
High Limit – Select or type the higher limit of a
device beyond which an alarm is raised.
Low Limit – Select or type the lower limit of the
device below which an alarm is raised.
•
NOTE: For numeric values, Limits are listed and for enum
and boolean values the Select Alarm Value is listed.
Alarm Configuration and Use
•
•
Description – Description of the alarm.
Set Priority As – Indicates the priority of the
alarm. Set 1 for low priority and 10 for High
priority. It can be Low, Medium, or High. Priority
is configured depending on the device's
configurations and settings
To add new alarms:
1. Click the Alarms tab. The View Alarms page appears.
2. Click the Alarm Setup tab on View Alarms page. The
Alarm Setup page appears.
•
Enable – Click Yes to enable the alarm along
with its configuration. Checking this option,
displays the alarm in the View Alarms page.
Click No to disable the alarm.
5. Click Save to save the settings.
To edit an alarm configuration:
1. Select an alarm from the alarm's list to edit it. The
selected alarm's details appear.
3. Click Save to save the settings.
NOTE: You can enable or disable an alarm from the Alarm
Setup screen. For example, click
from the
table on the Alarm Setup page to disable an alarm.
To delete an alarm:
1. Click the Alarms tab. The View Alarms page appears.
2. Select the check box corresponding to the alarm you
want to delete.
3. Click Delete Alarm. A confirmation message appears.
4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
Fig. 17. Alarm Setup page.
3. Click Add Alarm. The Add Alarm page appears.
4. Enter the Alarm Name and select the desired Points:
•
Alarm Name – The name of the alarm.
•
Select Points:
•
•
•
•
Channel – The selected channel.
Device – The selected device.
Point – The selected point.
Select Point – Click Select Point. The Select
Point dialog box is displayed. Select a Channel,
Device, and Point from the corresponding drop
NOTES:
1.
2.
Click Cancel to cancel the deletion.
Only Acknowledged Alarms can be deleted.
TIP: To delete all alarms at once, select the Alarm Name
check box and click Delete Alarm.
9
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
To replicate an alarm:
Add, Edit, or Delete Alarm E-Mail Recipient
To add an alarm E-Mail recipient's details:
1. Click the Alarms tab. The View Alarms page appears.
2. Click the Alarm E-Mail Notification Setup tab on the
View Alarms page. The Alarm E-Mail Notification
Setup page appears.
3. Click Add Alarm E-Mail Recipient. The Add Alarm
E-Mail Recipient page appears.
4. Select the recipient type using the Select Recipient
Type drop-down list.
1. Click the Alarms tab. The View Alarms page appears.
2. Click the Alarm Setup tab on the View Alarms page.
The Alarm Setup page appears.
3. Click
corresponding to the alarm that you want to
replicate. The Replicate Alarm dialog box appears.
4. Type the alarm name in the Alarm Name text box.
5. Select an alarm and device that you want to replicate
from the Replicate Alarm and Device drop-down list.
6. Choose a prefix or suffix to name the replicated copy of
the alarm. Select the Prefix with or Suffix with option as
required.
•
For an External recipient, enter:
•
Recipient Name – Name of the recipient.
7. Type a label name for the alarm in the Label text box.
8. Click Replicate to confirm the replication.
•
Recipient E-Mail ID – E-Mail ID of the recipient.
•
For an Internal recipient, enter:
•
Select User – Select the type of the user using
the drop-down list.
NOTE: Click Cancel to cancel the replication.
5. Select the alarm priorities that must be informed to the
recipient. Check the Select All check box to select all
the alarm priorities.
To setup alarm E-Mail notification:
1. Click the Alarms tab. The View Alarms page appears.
2. Click the Alarm E-Mail Notification Setup tab on the
View Alarms page.
6. Click Save to add a new recipient.
NOTE: Click Cancel to abort the action.
To edit an alarm E-Mail recipient's details:
1. Click the Alarms tab. The View Alarms page appears.
2. Click the alarm name that you want to edit. The Alarm
Setup page of the selected alarm appears.
4. Click Save to save the changes.
NOTE: Click Cancel to abort the action.
NOTE: The alarm priority information for internal user is
available in the user account configuration page.
To delete an alarm E-Mail notification recipient:
1. Click the Alarms tab. The View Alarms page appears.
2. Click Alarm E-Mail Notification Setup. The Alarm E-
Mail Notification Setup page appears.
3. Select a user from the Name list that you want to delete.
4. Click Delete to delete the selected recipient.
Fig. 18. Alarm E-Mail Notification Setup Tab.
TIP: To delete all recipients at once, check the All check box
in the header and click Delete.
3. The Alarm E-Mail Notification Setup page appears
with the following information in the tabular format:
TIP: Select the check box in the header row to select all the
Trends
listed alarms e-mail recipients.
Trends depict the values of points over time in a graphical
format. Use the Trends tab to view trends for the selected
points over a period ranging from a day to a year.
•
•
Name – Lists names of the users who will receive
the alarm E-Mail notification.
E-Mail ID – Lists the E-Mail IDs of the
You can store a maximum of 1000 samples per trend. By
default you can store 500 samples per trend. Once you cross
the limit, the oldest sample is overwritten and rolled over
based on trend configuration. Five trends can be plotted
simultaneously. For example, outside air temperature and
space temperature plotted for a period of one month.
corresponding users.
•
•
Recipient Type – Lists the type of user.
Associated Alarm Priorities – Lists the alarm
priorities associated to the corresponding user if the
user is external. Alarm priorities range from 1 to 10.
1 being the lowest priority level and 10 being the
highest priority level. Check Select All to select all
the alarm priorities.
A trend point can be a data point from any supported
LONWORKS network device. A data point can be used in
multiple trend configuration. There are few default sample
95-7769—01
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
trends stored in WebVision. You cannot delete these sample
trends. However, you can create new trends. The trends
created by you are called User Defined trends.
—
Enable/Disable – Indicates if a trend is enabled or
disabled. Click the Enable or Disable buttons to
enable/disable the trend.
When you add a device, all the default trends present in that
device are added to WebVision. All the default trends are
disabled.
TIP: Use Filters to quickly search the required trend.
Use one of the following filter options to search for the
required trend:
You can create and view a maximum of 100 trends.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Channel Name
Trend Type
Trend Name
Device Name
Point Name
Point Group
To view trends:
Click the Trends tab. The View Trends page appears with the
following information:
TIP: To quickly search the trends, type the first letter of the
required filter criteria in the Keyword text box and type
an asterisk (*). This lists all the names starting with the
first letter that you have written in the Keyword text box.
Plotting trends
NOTES:
1.
A security warning message appears when you
access the Trends page and prompts you to
download the applet. Click Yes to continue.
A Java plug-in version 1.6 and above must be
installed to view the trend chart.
2.
To plot a trend:
1. Click the Trends tab. The View Trends page appears.
2. Select a trend from the Configured Trends list to plot.
3. Click Plot Trend. The Plot Trend dialog box appears.
4. Enter the following parameters:
•
Select Start Time – Click
to select the start
date and enter the start time in hours and minutes.
Fig. 19. Trends page.
•
Select End Time – Click to select the end date
and enter the end time in hours and minutes.
—
—
—
Trend Name – The unique name for the Trend.
Device – Indicates the location on the device.
Points – Indicates the points whose readings are
required to generate a trend.
Trend Type – Indicates type of trend. For instance it
can be a user defined trend.
NOTE: Start time must be less than the end time.
5. Click OK to view the graphical representation of the
trend or click Cancel to cancel the trend.
—
—
—
Channel – Indicates the channel on which the devices
are present.
Sampling Interval – Indicates the time interval
between two successive read operations on the point.
One hour is the default setting.
Viewing plotted trends
The view of the trends plotted have the following information:
•
Plotted Trends – Lists the name of the trends that are
plotted.
•
•
•
Start Time – Select the start time, if required.
End Time – Select the end time, if required.
Re-Plot Trends – After selecting the Start and End time
select this option to re-plot the trend with the new time
range.
Download Trendlog – Click this button to download trend
log in .csv format for the plotted trends.
Ok – Click Ok to go back to the View Trends screen.
The sampling interval time can range from a few
minutes to a day. The range covered is:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
15 seconds
30 seconds
60 seconds (1 minute)
900 seconds (15 minutes)
1800 seconds (30 minutes)
2700 seconds (45 minutes)
3600 seconds (60 minutes)
•
•
11
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
The sampling interval time can range from a few
seconds to a few minutes. The range covered is:
Trend Setup and Use
•
15 seconds
30 seconds
60 seconds (1 minute)
900 seconds (15 minutes)
1800 seconds (30 minutes)
2700 seconds (45 minutes)
3600 seconds (60 minutes)
TIP: You can enable or disable trends from the Trends Setup
•
•
•
•
•
•
screen.
To setup a trend:
1. Click the Trends tab. The View Trends page appears.
2. Click the Trend Setup tab. The Trend Setup page
appears.
•
•
Change of Value – Indicates that the next sample
is collected when the point value changes. This
results in less number of samples getting collected
for plotting the same trend as compared to Periodic
Sampling. Change Tolerance is required only for
numeric points. Select a numeric point from the
Select Point option and type a tolerance value after
which the data logging begins.
Trend Limit – Roll Over is the default selection.
This option trends the point forever.
•
Roll Over – Indicates that the readings of
sampling are generated continuously. When the
sample limit is reached, the oldest sample is
replaced with the next sample and trending
continues in that fashion.
•
•
Stop when full – Indicates that the trend
sampling is stopped after it reaches the set limit.
Max number of Samples – The maximum
number of samples. Select the number of
samples to be generated from the list.
NOTE: WebVision uses the polling mechanism to read point
values at regular interval. It may take up to 30
seconds to detect a point value. If the point value
changes at a higher frequency than 30 seconds,
WebVision may not be able to detect the changes.
Fig. 20. Trend Setup tab.
5. Click Save to save the settings.
To add a new trend:
1. Click the Trends tab. The View Trends page appears.
2. Click the Trend Setup tab. The Trend Setup page
appears.
NOTE: Click Cancel to clear the fields.
To edit trends:
1. Click the Trends Setup tab. The View Trends page
appears.
2. Select a Trend from the Trends list. The details of the
selected Trend appear.
3. Click
. The Add New Trend page appears.
4. Enter/select the following details:
NOTE: All the fields in this section are mandatory.
4. Click Save to save the settings.
•
•
Trend Name – The unique name for the trend.
Select Point – Click Select Point. Select a Channel,
Device, and Point. Click OK. The selected values
appear in the respective fields.
NOTE: Click Cancel to cancel the settings.
NOTE: Start time must be less than the end time.
To delete a trend:
•
•
Start Time – The start time of the sampling period.
Click to select the date, month, and year
End Time – Check Enable End Time to enable the
end time field. The end time of the sampling period.
Click to select the date, month, and year.
Trend Type – Indicates the type of trend.
1. Click the Trends tab. The View Trends page appears.
2. Go to Trends Setup. Select the trend that you want to
delete from the Trends listed on the left corner of the
screen.
3. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears.
4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
•
•
Periodic Sampling – Indicates the time interval
between two successive read operations on the
point. Select Periodic Sampling option and in the
Sampling Interval list, select the desired time
interval.
NOTE: Click Cancel to cancel the deletion.
TIP: To delete all the trends simultaneously, select the check
box in the column header and click Delete Trend.
95-7769—01
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 3. Role Matrix. (Continued)
Users
You can create a maximum of 30 user profiles. You must be
familiar with User ID and Password security standards to
enforce user compliance when creating a user profile. As
WebVision is a secure server, you need to log in with a pre-
assigned user ID and password. The user ID and password
combination determine your access level, which in turn
determine the kind of operator and configuration functions
performed.
Privilege
ID
Depends
On
Facility
Contractor Manager Tenant
Privileges
Graphics (continued)
b
5
Edit Graphics
4
4
P
X
X
6
7
8
Add Graphics
P
P
P
X
X
P
P
Schedules
P
P
View Summary
Screen
The Network Administrator must be familiar with user ID and
password security standards and enforce user compliance.
The WebVision System Administrator can be accessed using
these initial default user ID and password: User ID -
SysAdmin and Password - !Sys!Admin.
9
View Schedule
Configuration
9
9
P
P
P
P
P
P
X
P
X
X
P
X
P
X
X
10
11
12
13
Add Schedule
Configuration
It is a good practice to add one or more additional users with
Administrator access level to ensure top level access to
WebVision. Those with higher access levels have the
privileges of all the lower levels in addition to the privileges
unique to that level. These access levels are managed by the
System Administrator. There can be an individual or many
System Administrators who are assigned the task of
managing individuals at different access levels.
Edit Schedule
Configuration
10
9
Delete Schedule
Configuration
Assign Devices to 9,11/12
Schedule
14
15
Alarms
P
P
P
P
P
P
NOTE: For security compliance, it is mandatory to change
your password after the initial login process. Once
changed, the default password will no longer work.
Exercise care to create a new password that meets
the security standards and can be easily
View Alarms
Summary
16
Acknowledge
Alarms
16
16
P
P
X
17
18
Delete Alarms
P
P
X
P
X
X
remembered by the System Administrator.
View Alarms
Configurations
Summary
Use the Users tab to add users, assign devices to them and
define their privileges based on their roles. There are four
types of user roles (see Table 3):
19
20
21
22
23
View Alarm
Configurations
19
19
20
19
16
P
P
P
P
P
P
X
P
X
P
X
X
X
X
X
•
Contractor - Contractor is a user with all the privileges
assigned and can perform all tasks. SysAdmin is a user
account with contractor privileges that cannot be deleted.
The privileges cannot be altered. This is to ensure that
there is at least one contractor available in the system.
Add Alarm
Configurations
Edit Alarm
Configurations
•
Facility Manager - This role represents a Building
Engineer who maintains HVAC equipment and monitors
the system with the help of WebVision.
Delete Alarm
Configurations
•
•
Tenant - The user assigned to this role has limited access
to WebVision. The user with the Tenant role has access to
only those devices which are assigned to the user.
Balancer - Balancer is a user who performs VAV Balancing
Job. The user assigned to this role has access to VAV
devices for WebVision.
Download Alarm
Records as CSV
Files
24
25
Suppress Alarms
19
P
P
P
P
X
X
Setup Alarm E-
mail Notifications
Role Matrix
c
26
27
28
29
30
31
View Priority 1
Alarms
16
16
16
16
16
16
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
See Table 3.
Table 3. Role Matrix.
View Priority 2
Alarms
C
C
C
C
C
Privilege
Depends
Facility
View Priority 3
Alarms
ID
Privileges
On
Contractor Manager Tenant
a
1
P
P
P
P
Graphics
P
View Priority 4
Alarms
2
Change Controller
Setpoints
4
P
View Priority 5
Alarms
(temporary)
3
4
Override Schedule
Occupancy
4
P
P
P
P
P
P
View Priority 6
Alarms
View Graphics
13
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 3. Role Matrix. (Continued)
Table 3. Role Matrix. (Continued)
Privilege
ID
Depends
On
Facility
Contractor Manager Tenant
Privilege
ID
Depends
On
Facility
Contractor Manager Tenant
Privileges
Privileges
System
Alarms (continued)
60
61
P
P
P
P
32
33
34
35
View Priority 7
Alarms
16
16
16
16
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
General
Configuration
X
X
View Priority 8
Alarms
62
IP Network
Configuration
P
X
View Priority 9
Alarms
63
64
Mail Configuration
P
P
P
P
X
X
Change System
Date and Time
View Priority 10
Alarms
65
66
67
Upgrade Firmware
Reboot System
P
P
P
X
P
P
X
X
X
36
37
38
Trends
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
X
View Trend Graph
Download System
Load
Download Trend
Data CSV Files
38
68
69
70
Download Audit
Log
P
P
P
P
C
C
X
C
C
39
View Trend
Configurations
Summary
P
P
X
Network
Navigation
40
41
42
43
View Trend
Configurations
40
40
41
40
P
P
P
P
P
X
P
X
X
X
X
X
Physical
Navigation
Add Trend
Configurations
71
72
WebSuite Network
P
P
P
P
View Appliance
Summary
X
X
Edit Trend
Configuration
73
Discover
Appliances on
Network
73
P
X
Delete Trend
Configuration
44
45
Users
P
P
P
P
74
75
Add New
Appliance
73
73
P
P
X
X
X
X
View User
Summary
X
X
X
X
X
Enable Network
Firmware at
Network Level
46
47
48
49
ViewUserAccount
Information
46
46
47
46
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
Add New User
Accounts
76
77
Change Master
Ownership
73
73
P
P
X
X
X
X
Edit User
Accounts
Change Network
User Password
Delete User
Accounts
78
79
80
DLC
P
P
P
P
X
X
Configure DLC
X
X
50
51
Devices
P
P
P
P
View Load
Summary
View Device
Summary
52
52
X
X
81
82
83
84
Add Load
Delete Load
Edit Load
81
81
81
P
P
P
P
X
X
X
P
X
X
X
X
52
Discover Devices
on the Network
P
X
53
54
Add New Device
52
52
P
P
X
X
X
X
Monitor DLC
Status
Copy an Existing
Device
a
b
c
The letter P means the role has that privilege.
55
Download/Upload
Device
Configuration
52
P
P
X
The letter X means the role does not have that privilege.
The letter C means that the user can be given that privilege
when configuring his/her account.
56
57
Delete Device
52
52
P
P
X
P
X
X
Invoke Device
Configuration
Wizard
58
59
Match Device
52
52
P
P
X
P
X
X
Change Setpoints
95-7769—01
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
View list of Users
The list of users provides information on WebVision users
such as their names, roles, and e-mail IDs.
To add a user:
1. On the Users page, click the Add User button. The
Properties page appears.
To view the list of users:
1. Click the Users tab. The Users page appears.
Fig. 22. Add User - Properties page.
2. Enter the account information of the user:
Fig. 21. Users page.
•
User ID – The unique user ID. It must have a
minimum of 6 characters.
TIP: Use Filters to quickly search the required user.
TIP: You can use a maximum of 30 characters and a
minimum of 6 characters to set your user ID. The
permitted characters include a-z, A-Z, _, 0-9. The
following characters are not allowed: !, @, #, $, %, ^, *, -
, and |.
Use one of the following filter options to search for the
required user:
•
•
•
User ID
Role
Email ID
•
•
User Name – The user name.
Password – Type your password.
TIP: To quickly search the users, type the first letter of the
required filter criteria in the Keyword text box and type
an asterisk (*). This lists all the names starting with the
first letter that you have written in the Keyword text box.
TIP: You can use a maximum of 30 characters and a
minimum of 6 characters to set your password. The
permitted characters include a-z, A-Z, _, 0-9. The
following characters are not allowed: !, @, #, $, %, ^, *, -
, and |.
2. The following information appears in a tabular format:
•
•
•
User Name – Displays the name of the user name.
Role – Displays the role assigned to the user.
Email ID – Displays the user's e-mail ID for
communication.
•
•
Confirm Password – Retype your password.
Password Recovery Question – Select the
Password Reminder Question.
Password Recovery Answer – Type an answer for
the above question.
Role – The role or designation of the user. Select
the role from the list.
•
•
Phone Number – Displays the user's phone
number.
Enable/Disable – Displays the user's status. Click
Enable to enable the user or Disable to disable the
user.
•
•
NOTE: Select the check box in the header row to select all
the users listed.
•
•
Show this user – The view authorized to the user.
Network Sidebar – The user is authorized to view
only the network side bar view.
•
•
Locations Sidebar – The user is authorized to view
only the locations view.
Preferred Language – The user defined language.
Select the language from the list.
Add/Edit Users
While adding a user:
•
Configure information related to User Name, Password,
Contact Information, and User Role Information through
the Properties tab.
3. Enter the Personal Information of the user:
•
•
•
Email ID – Type the user's e-mail ID.
Office Phone – The user's office contact number.
Residence Phone – The user's residence contact
number.
•
•
Assign Devices to the user being created using the Access
on this WebVision tab.
Add new User only in the WebVision that is configured as
Network Server in networked WebVision.
•
Mobile Phone – The user's mobile contact number.
4. Set the Show Alarm Status. Select the alarm priorities
for which you want status update. The numbers are
listed from 1 through 10. The user can see only those
alarms whose corresponding priority is checked in this
step. Check Select All to view all the alarms
simultaneously.
15
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
5. Click the Access on this WebVision tab. The Access
on this WebVision page appears. You can select
various options from Device Access, Schedule Access,
and Locations View Access. Check Select All to select
all the options simultaneously.
To view the list of devices:
1. Click the Devices tab. The Device List page appears.
The following information appears in a tabular format:
Use this option to assign customized access to users.
Fig. 24. Devices Tab - Device List page.
Fig. 23. Access on this WebVision page.
TIP: Use Filters to view the required list.
6. Click Save to save the user properties.
Use one of the following filter options to search for the
required device: Channel, Device Name, Device Type,
Status, Mode.
To edit a user:
Select a user from the User list, and make the required
changes as explained in the above section.
•
•
•
Device Name – Name of the device.
Device Type – Type of the device.
Status – Status of the device, it can be online or
offline.
To delete users:
•
Neuron ID – Each LONWORKS Controller node has
a 48 bit unique identifier, called the Neuron ID. This
is used to address the nodes on the LONWORKS
network.
Mode – Mode of the device, it can be auto or
manual.
Subnet/Node ID – A mask that is used to determine
the subnet of a network. Subnetting enables the
network administrator to further divide the host part
of the address into two or more subnets.
Channel – The channel on which the device is
present.
NOTE: Any user who has user management privileges can
add or remove a user.
1. On the Users page, click the name of the user you want
to delete from Users Name column.
2. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears.
3. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
•
•
IMPORTANT
SysAdmin is a user account with contractor
privileges that cannot be deleted. A SysAdmin's
privileges cannot be altered. This is to ensure that
there is at least one contractor available in the
system.
•
•
•
Synced On – Date and time on which the device is
last downloaded or uploaded.
Replicate – Click Replicate to replicate the device
settings.
To enable/disable a user:
•
•
Click Enable to enable a user.
Click Disable to disable a user.
To add a device:
1. Click the Devices tab. The Device List page appears.
2. Click
. The Add Device dialog box appears.
Devices
Enter the following details:
Device List
You can view all the devices present in WebVision. All the
information related to name, type, status, and so on is
available.
Fig. 25. Add Device dialog box.
95-7769—01
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
•
•
Device Name – Name of the device.
Channel – The channel on which the device is
present.
•
•
•
Device Type – Type of the device.
Model – Type the model number of the device.
Application Type – Type of application that is
required for the selected device.
•
•
•
Application Version – Type the version of
application used.
Application File – Application that must run on the
device. Click Browse to upload an application file.
Neuron ID – The 48 bit unique identifier each
LONWORKS Controller node has. This is used to
address the nodes on a LONWORKS network.
Description – Description of the device.
•
Fig. 26. Devices Tab - Device List - Discover button.
NOTES:
1.
3. Select a channel on which you want to discover
devices.
4. Click Discover to start discovery. Once the discovery is
completed, WebVision lists the discovered new devices
on the left side list.
5. If you want to match a discovered device against an
existing device in WebVision, select the discovered
device on the left side list and select the existing device
on the right side list and click Match.
All the fields marked with an asterisk (*) are
mandatory. However, it is advised to provide all
the information in the fields, so that WebVision
can provide more manageable features.
The above listed parameters form a
comprehensive list. The appearance of these
parameters vary depending upon the selected
device.
2.
3. Click Add to add the device.
NOTE: Check the Select All check box to select all the
NOTE: Click Cancel to abort the action.
devices simultaneously.
NOTE: To support 3rd party devices other than the
controllers listed in the dialog box, you must have a
corresponding Niagara LNML file that contains
information about the device and its points. This file
has to be uploaded while adding a device to
WebVision. WebVision allows you to create alarms
and trends on the 3rd party devices. WebVision
cannot drive the device's scheduled occupancy
state, do energy management using DLC, or do VAV
balancing for 3rd party devices.
6. Click Add to add discovered devices as new devices to
WebVision. The selected device gets added to the
Available Devices list.
7. Click OK to save the settings.
8. Click Log to view the discovery status.
NOTE: Click Cancel to abort the action.
NOTE: After discovering the devices you must upload the
device bindings to save the existing bindings onto
WebVision. This prevents you from losing the
existing binding, while downloading the new binding.
To discover devices:
You can discover the devices available on the network and
then add them to WebVision.
NOTE: Once a device is selected in the Discovered Device
table, only the matching device type in the Available
devices table is enabled for selection.
Deleting Devices
Deleting a device removes it from the device list as well as
from all other configurations such as trends, alarms, special
displays, DLC and schedules. Any alarms generated before
the device was deleted is still displayed on the Alarms page.
1. Click the Devices tab. The Device List page appears.
2. Click Discover. The Discover Device in the network
dialog box appears. The discovered devices are
displayed.
NOTE: You will not be able to see the deleted device in any
of the pages until it is discovered and added using
device add or discovery operation.
When you delete a device (that provides current power input),
the DLC service is disabled. All the alarms generated by a
device are available on the Alarms Summary screen.
However, the link present on the device fails, when the device
is deleted. Both trend configuration and trend data gets
deleted from the database.
To delete a device:
1. Click the Devices tab. The Device List page appears.
2. Select the devices that you want to delete by checking
the corresponding check box.
3. Click Delete to delete the devices.
17
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
4. Choose a prefix or suffix to name the replicated copy of
the device. Select the Prefix with or Suffix with option as
required.
5. Type a label name for the device in the Label text box.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
TIP: To delete all devices at once, check the All check box in
the header and click Delete.
Set Mode to Auto
Sometimes when debugging a device, you set the mode to
manual. The Set Mode to Auto feature is a simple option to
set the devices back to auto mode.
NOTE: Click Cancel to abort the action.
Device Binding
Binding refers to a configured association either within a
device, or between separate devices on a LONWORKS
network.
To set the devices to auto mode:
1. Click the Devices tab. The Device List page appears.
2. Select the devices that you want to set to auto mode.
3. Click Set Mode to Auto to set the devices to auto
mode. A success message appears indicating that the
devices have been set to auto mode.
To view a list of bound devices:
1. Click Devices on the WebVision page. The Device
List page is displayed.
2. Click Device Binding. The Device Binding page is
displayed.
NOTE: Check the Select All check box to select all the
devices simultaneously.
NOTE: Select the required channel from the Select Channel
drop-down list.
Download Device Configuration
Once you have made all of the necessary configuration
settings to a device in WebVision, you will need to download
the configuration to the device.
3. The following information displays in tabular format:
•
•
•
•
•
Source Device – Lists the source device involved in
the binding.
Source Point – Lists the network object/point of the
source device that is involved in the binding.
Target Device – Lists the target device involved in
the binding.
Target Point – Lists the network object/point of the
target device that is involved in the binding.
Link Status – Shows the binding status. The status
can be bound or unbound.
To download a device:
1. Click the Devices tab. The Device List page appears.
2. Select the devices that you want to download by
checking the corresponding check boxes.
3. Click Download to download the selected devices. The
Downloading Device Information bar indicates the
progress of download.
4. Click Log to view the download status.
To add devices for binding:
1. Click Devices on the WebVision page. The Device
List page is displayed.
NOTE: Click Cancel to abort the action.
2. Click Device Binding. The Device Binding page is
displayed.
3. Click Add. The Add Device Binding box is displayed.
Upload Device Configuration
You can upload device configuration from a device on to
WebVision.
4. Select the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Channel
To upload configurations from a device:
1. Click the Devices tab. The Device List page appears.
2. Select the devices whose configurations you want to
upload.
Source Device
Source Point
Target Device
Target Point
3. Click Upload to upload the settings.
4. Click Log to view the upload status.
5. Click OK. The binding is created in WebVision and has
to be downloaded to the controllers.
NOTE: Click Cancel to abort the action.
To delete bindings:
1. Click Devices on the WebVision page. The Device
List page is displayed.
2. Click Device Binding. The Device Binding page is
displayed.
Replicate Devices
You can replicate existing devices in WebVision.
3. Select a pair of bounded devices that you want to delete
and click Delete. The bindings in WebVision are
deleted. You have to invoke download to delete the
bindings in the devices.
To replicate a device:
1. Click the Devices tab. The Device List page appears.
2. Click
corresponding to the device that you want
to replicate. The Replicate Device dialog box displays
and the selected device displays in the Replicate
Device list.
To download device bindings:
1. Click Devices on the WebVision page. The Device
List page is displayed.
3. Select the number of copies that you want to create
using the Number of copies to be created selection field.
2. Click Device Binding. The Device Binding page is
displayed.
95-7769—01
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
3. Click Download. The binding settings are downloaded
To edit a point group:
1. Select a name of the point group that you want to edit in
the Point Groups drop-down list.
on the selected channel.
To upload device bindings:
2. Click Edit Point Group. The selected details of the
Point Group are displayed. Follow the procedure as
the required changes.
1. Click Devices on the WebVision page. The Device
List page is displayed.
2. Click Device Binding. The Device Binding page is
displayed.
3. Click Upload. The binding settings are uploaded on the
selected channel.
To delete a point group:
1. Click the Devices tab. The Device List page appears.
2. Click the Points tab. The Point List page appears.
3. Click Add Point Group. The Add Point page is
displayed.
Point List
4. Select a name of the point group that you want to delete
in the Point Groups drop-down list.
5. Click Delete Point Group. A confirmation message
appears.
Point Group
Point groups are used for monitoring and diagnostics of
controllers. You can create a maximum of fifty point groups in
WebVision and add a maximum of fifty points to each point
group.
6. Click Yes to delete the selected points.
NOTE: Click No to abort the action.
To view point groups:
1. Click the Devices tab. The Device List page appears.
2. Click the Point List tab. The Point List page appears
with points present in the first point group.
Device Configuration
This section describes how to view and setup a device
graphic and describes the configuration options.
3. The list of points is displayed with the following
information in tabular format:
To view device graphic:
1. On the left corner of the screen, WebVision is listed.
Expand WebVision to view all the devices associated
with it.
2. Select a device from the list of devices in WebVision.
Click the corresponding link to view the properties of
that device.
•
•
•
•
Point Name – Indicates the name of the point.
Device Name – Indicates the name of the device.
Channel – Indicates the channel being used.
Value – Indicates the value of the point. If the point
is read only point, it appears as a label. If the point is
writable point, it appears in a text box/select box
with a Write button against it.
•
Write – Click Write to write a point value on a
controller.
3. Click the Graphics tab. The View Graphics page
appears.
4. You can view the graphic linked to that device. All other
parameters, for example, Air Flow, Setpoint, Space (as
configured for the device) also appear on the screen.
To add a point group:
1. Click the Devices tab. The Device List page appears.
2. Click the Points tab. The Point List page appears.
3. Click Add Point Group. The Add Point page is
displayed.
To setup a graphic:
1. Select a device from the list of devices in WebVision.
Click the corresponding link to view the properties of
that device.
4. Type the name of the point group in the Point Group
Name field.
2. Click the Graphics tab. The View Graphics page
appears. Click Setup Graphic. The Setup Graphics
page appears.
3. You can add up to 3 links to the default graphic. The
links can point to another graphic or to an external Web
Site.
5. All the points in that group are listed in a tabular format.
Click Add Point to add a point. A point selection dialog
comes up. Select a point and click OK to add the point
to the group.
6. Repeat step 5 to add all the required points to the
group.
7. Select the required points that you want to delete from
the Point List page.
8. Click Delete Point. A confirmation message appears.
9. Click Save to save settings.
Configuration
The following options can be used for all the above mentioned
devices:
•
•
•
Import Application – Use this option to restore the backed
up configuration.
Export Application – Use this option to download
NOTE: Click Cancel to abort the action.
TIP: You can create a maximum of fifty point groups in
WebVision and add a maximum of fifty points to each
point group.
configuration settings.
Reset – Use this option to reset the configuration settings
to the last saved configuration settings.
Back – Use this option for navigation.
Next – Use this option for navigation.
•
•
19
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
•
Save – Any change done in the UI is automatically saved
locally in the Web UI. To save the modified configuration in
the WebVision click Save. To write the saved data onto
device, use the Device Download option.
Balancing
This process helps the VAV devices to calibrate their flow
sensors for better air flow control.
NOTE: To perform balancing ensure that the VAV device is
online.
Set Points
NOTE: The Setpoints tab appears only for the supported
To view the Balancing page:
1. Click the Balancing tab. The Balancing page appears.
2. The following information is displayed in tabular format:
devices.
•
•
Device Name: Name of the device
Channel Name: Name of the channel on which the
device exists.
Balanced On: Balancing status. It can be Balanced
or Not Balanced.
To set the setpoint for a device:
On the left corner of the screen, WebVision is listed. Expand
WebVision to view all the devices associated with it.
•
1. Select a device from the list of devices in WebVision.
Click the corresponding link to view the properties of
that device.
NOTE: Use Filters to quickly search the required device.
2. Click the SetPoints tab. The SetPoints page appears.
3. Select the following parameters:
Use one of the following filter options to search for the
required device:
•
Permanent Set points:
•
•
•
Device Name
Device Type
Is Balanced
•
•
•
•
Occupied: Specify the Cooling SetPoints and
the Heating SetPoints.
Standby: Specify the Cooling SetPoints and the
Heating SetPoints.
Unoccupied: Specify the Cooling SetPoints and
the Heating SetPoints.
Select the override duration, if any, using the
Override Duration for Setpoint and
Occupancy State drop-down list.
NOTE: To quickly search the devices, type the first letter of
the required filter criteria in the Keyword text box
and type an asterisk (*). This lists all the names
starting with the first letter that you have written in the
Keyword text box.
•
Fan and System Switch:
To view Balancing details:
•
System Switch: Specify the system switch
mode: Heat, Auto, Cool, or Off.
Fan Switch: Specify the fan switch mode: On or
Auto.
1. Click the Balancing tab to display the Balancing page.
2. Select a device from the list and click Balance to
display the balancing details of the selected device.
3. View/Edit the following details:
•
4. Click Save to save the settings.
•
Device Name: Name of the VAV device which is
selected for balancing.
Sensor Calibration
•
Damper Position: Displays the position of the
damper. This field is non-editable. The damper
position varies to attain stable air flow.
NOTE: The Sensor Calibration tab appears only for the
supported devices that have analog inputs.
•
•
Sensed Airflow: Displays the actual air flow that is
measured by a pressure sensor connected to the
VAV device. This field is non-editable.
Max Airflow Setpoint: This allows you to set the
maximum airflow setpoint. The field is enabled by
default. Enter the maximum airflow setpoint value,
use Change max setpoint to write the maximum
airflow setpoint to the device.
Start Max Balance: Click on this button to balance
the device for the maximum air flow setpoint.
Min Airflow Setpoint: This allows you to set the
minimum air flow setpoint value which must be less
than the maximum value. The field is enabled by
default. It allows you to set the minimum airflow
setpoint value, use Change min setpoint to write
the minimum airflow setpoint to the device.
Start Min Balance: Click on this button to balance
the device for the minimum air flow setpoint.
Zero Airflow Setpoint: By default 0 is the setpoint
value and you cannot edit this field.
This is a process of configuring the controller to correct error
in the value provided by the sensor.
To calibrate a sensor:
On the left corner of the screen, WebVision is listed. Expand
WebVision to view all the devices associated with it.
•
•
1. Select a device from the list of devices in WebVision.
Click the corresponding link to view the properties of
that device.
2. Click the Sensor Calibration tab. The Sensor
Calibration page appears. All the sensors associated
with the selected device are listed in the Sensor Name
list. The Actual Reading column lists the actual value
measured by the sensor.
3. Specify the correct value that the controller is supposed
to measure in Calibrated Value column. The difference
between the two values is displayed in Calibrated
offset column. The controller adds the calibrated offset
value to the measured value to correct the error.
4. Click Save to save the settings.
•
•
•
Start Zero Balance: Click on this button to balance
the device for the zero air flow setpoint.
4. Click Save to save the settings.
95-7769—01
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
The following are the two types of loads that DLC sheds to
maintain demand below the peak setpoint:
To perform Min/Max Balancing:
Complete the following procedure to do min/max balancing.
NOTE: To do min/max balancing ensure that the VAV device
is online.
Off Continuous Loads
Off Continuous loads are the first loads that are shed by DLC.
Once shed, they are not restored immediately. Loads marked
as Off Continuous generally control the loads that are least
important to overall operation of the facility. When KW
demand exceeds the peak setpoint, Off Continuous loads are
shed first starting from the lowest numbered load (1) to the
highest (50). These loads are shed until the demand goes
below the peak setpoint limit. The first load is shed at staging
interval seconds after the KW exceeds the peak setpoint.
Additional loads are shed at staging interval, seconds until the
KW is less than the peak setpoint. Off Continuous loads, once
shed are the last to be restored when demand is less than the
normal level (setpoint minus the dead band). Off continuous
loads are restored in the order reverse to which they were
shed (highest load (50th) is restored first). Any Off Continuous
load that is shed remains inactive for at least the configured
Minimum Shed Time.
1. Damper position and Sensed airflow displays the
current damper position and flow sensed by the device.
2. Click the Start Zero Balance to attain the zero flow
setpoint. Job progress status is shown at the bottom of
the page, once the setpoint is attained, confirmation
message is displayed.
3. Once the Zero airflow setpoints is attained, flow sensed
by the device is displayed. Update the actual flow
sensed in the Measured Airflow field and click Apply
Measured Flow.
4. Enter Max Airflow Setpoint value and click Change
Max Setpoint to write the value to the device.
5. Click Start Max Balance to attain the maximum airflow
setpoint. Job progress status of maximum balancing is
shown at the bottom of the page, once the setpoint is
attained, confirmation message is displayed.
6. Update the actual flow sensed in the Measured Airflow
field and click Apply Measured Flow.
Rotating Loads
Rotating loads are shed or adjusted after shedding Off
Continuous loads, as DLC needs to reduce the demand.
Loads marked as Rotating have more important equipment
assigned to them than the loads marked as Off Continuous.
7. Enter Min Airflow Setpoint value and click Change
Min Setpoint to write the value to the device.
8. Click Start Min Balance to attain the minimum airflow
setpoint. Job progress status of minimum balancing is
shown at the bottom of the page, once the setpoint is
attained, confirmation message is displayed.
9. Once the balancing is completed, Click Done to set the
device back to Auto mode and go to the balancing
summary screen.
Rotating loads are shed or adjusted only after all the Off
Continuous loads are shed and if the KW demand still
exceeds the peak setpoint. DLC sheds the Rotating loads in
sequence starting with the lowest numbered load first. When
demand is below the normal level (peak setpoint minus the
dead band), the Rotating loads are restored on a priority
basis; highest priority is given to the load that has been shed
for the longest period. If restoration of a Rotating load causes
KW to raise above the peak setpoint, then the next eligible
Rotating load (usually the next higher numbered Rotating
load) is shed.
Demand Limit Control (DLC)
Demand Limit Control (DLC) continuously monitors the
building's rate of energy consumption. It automatically sheds
or restores loads to prevent the demand (load) from
exceeding the maximum allowable level or configured
setpoint. It is based on the building's power requirements and
operating characteristics. For DLC to have control over
energy savings, the configured setpoint must be less than the
actual demand allocated by the power generating plant. DLC
sheds or adjusts the loads during peak usages only. DLC is
driven from the current KW demand, which is an
instantaneous value averaged over a period of time (demand
averaging window period). It is a good practice to adjust the
DLC window close to the utility company's demand window
period. This in turn will help WebVision to follow the same
criteria as that of the utility company when taking KW demand
shed decisions. The energy history log must also match the
peak demand recorded by the utility company.
NOTE: Note: Rotating loads are restored before Off
Continuous loads when KW demand is below the
normal level (less than the peak setpoint minus the
dead band).
Rotating loads are not eligible for shed until their
Minimum On Time has elapsed after restoration.
Once shed, a Rotating load cannot be shed again
until all the other eligible Rotating loads are shed.
Rotating loads are not restored until their Minimum
Shed Time has elapsed.
Rotating loads can't be in Shed time not more than
the Max Shed time.
DLC Load Shedding and Restoring Methods
Load Assignments
DLC monitors the current KW levels at every staging interval
and averages it over a period of time.
Each device is considered to be an external object when
assigning it to a load. A load consists of a local configuration
that defines the behavior of the load and its association with
an object or a set of objects. These objects are discovered
Excel 10 or Excel 15C devices, which in turn control the
external electrical loads. All the objects associated under one
load assignment are shed at once, restored at once and
overwritten at once depending on the configuration of the load
assignment. Each load assignment is identified by a load
assignment number ranging from 1 to 50.
•
If the current KW demand is above the configured peak
setpoint, then DLC sheds loads at defined intervals until
the demand drops below the peak setpoint.
•
If the KW demand drops below the normal level (peak
setpoint minus the dead band), then the previously shed
loads are actively restored at every staging interval until
the KW demand rises back above the normal level.
21
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Use one of the following filter options to search for the
required load assignment:
Load Shedding Method
1. The DLC starts shedding by first searching for all the Off
Continuous loads that are eligible for shedding.
2. Then, it first sheds the lowest numbered Off Continuous
load and waits the staging interval to see if the demand
has reduced.
•
•
•
Load Name Pattern
Shed Method
Shed State
NOTE: To quickly search, type the first letter of the required
filter criteria in the Keyword text box and type an
asterisk (*). This lists all the names starting with the
first letter that you have written in the Keyword text
box.
3. If the demand is still above the peak setpoint, then DLC
sheds another Off Continuous load. This process
continues until the demand is well within the peak
setpoint limits.
4. If the demand has still not reduced, then DLC searches
for all the Rotated loads.
3. The following information is displayed:
•
•
•
•
Load Assignment Name
Min On/Shed Time
Max Shed Time
Load Restoring Method
•
If the demand drops below the normal level, then the loads
that are currently shed will be actively restored one at a
time, every staging interval, until the demand reaches the
normal level. When restoring loads, DLC, on priority,
searches and restores:
Shed Status
To configure the DLC:
1. Click the DLC tab. The DLC Status page appears.
2. Click the Configure tab. The Configure page appears.
•
The Rotating loads where the load that has been shed
for the longest period is restored first.
•
Then the Off Continuous loads where the load
restoration goes from highest load number to the
lowest load number.
•
Loads are restored every staging interval if the override
condition becomes true or the maximum shed time has
been met. All loads that satisfy these conditions are
restored.
DLC Status
Demand Limit Control is a function that controls the maximum
power demand made on the whole system by shedding some
of the load based on priority where total power usage of
configured loads exceeds the predefined limit. Shedding
requires turning off some digital output, or changing a setpoint
to a more economical level.
Fig. 28. DLC Configure page.
You can view the DLC service status that includes all load
assignment details. DLC status is updated at the rate of the
staging interval.
3. Select the pulse meter options. Click Select Point. A
Selected Pulse Meter pop up appears. Select a
Channel, Device, and Point for configuring DLC and
click OK.
To view the status of the DLC:
1. Click the DLC tab. The DLC Status page appears.
NOTE: Check the Disable DLC Service check box to
disable the DLC service.
4. Enter/Select the following parameters:
•
Peak Set Point: Enter the setpoint to set as the
peak limit. The range for peak set point value is 0-
6000.
•
Demand Window Period: Select the demand
window period from the Demand Window Period
drop-down list. The valid range is in steps of 1
minute to 15 minutes. It is the time interval over
which the instantaneous KW demand is averaged to
determine the effective KW peak demand value.
This value, in turn drives the DLC to shed or restore
loads. The demand value is read from the pulse
meter for every 15 seconds and the average
demand value is calculated accordingly.
Fig. 27. DLC Status page.
2. The following information is displayed as read only text:
•
•
Setpoint: Displays the setpoint value.
Current KW: Displays the average power
consumption of the total assigned load.
DLC Status: Displays the current DLC status. Four
modes present are: Disable, Deadband, Shed, and
Restore.
•
Staging Interval: Select the staging interval from
the Staging Interval drop-down list. The valid range
is in steps of 20 seconds to 120 seconds.
WebVision collects the KW samples for every 15
•
NOTE: Use Filters to quickly search the required DLC mode.
95-7769—01
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
seconds and at the end of a staging interval,
compares the power consumption with that of the
active demand setpoint and the dead band.
Dead Band: Enter the dead band in the Dead Band
text box. The dead band peak value is 1000.
Table 4. (Continued)Load Shed Methods.
If you have
selected the
Load Shed
Method as…
•
Then…
5. Click Save to save the settings.
Rotating
Load
In the Minimum Shed Time box, enter the
minimum length of time a load must be off
after it is shed by the DLC. In the Maximum
Shed Time box, enter the maximum time a
load that is shed by the DLC, must remain off
or inactive.
To add a Load:
1. Click the DLC tab. The DLC Status page appears.
2. Click the Load Assignment tab. The Load
Assignment page appears.
NOTE: The maximum shed time must
always be greater than the minimum
shed time. A load cannot be in the
shed state for more than the
configured maximum shed time. It
can be restored after the minimum
shed time has elapsed (lesser than
the setpoint minus the dead band).
In the Minimum On Time box, enter
the minimum time that the load must
be active ('On').
Last
Resort
Load
In the Minimum Shed Time box, enter the
minimum length of time a load must be off
after it is shed by the DLC.
Fig. 29. Load Assignment page.
NOTE: The maximum shed time for a Last
Resort load is twice its minimum
shed time and is displayed as
disabled text in the Maximum Shed
Time box.
3. Click Add Load. The Add Load page appears.
4. Enter/Select the following details:
NOTE: All the fields marked with and asterisk (*) are
mandatory.
•
•
•
•
Min Shed Time: Enter a valid value within the
specified 0-99 minutes range.
Max Shed Time: Enter a valid value within the
specified 0-99 minutes range.
Min On Time: Enter a valid value within the
specified 0-99 minutes range.
Assign/Unassign Devices: After configuring a
load, you can assign it to an external load object,
which in turn controls the electrical loads. All the
devices with the Device Name and their Assigned
Load (the name of the load that is assigned to that
device) are listed. Check the devices that you want
to assign to the current load.
•
•
Load Assignment Name: Enter a unique name for
load assignment.
Shed Method: Select a load shed method from the
Load Shed Method drop-down list.
Table 4. Load Shed Methods.
If you have
selected the
Load Shed
Method as…
Then…
OFF
In the Minimum Shed Time box, enter the
minimum length of time a load must be off
after it is shed by the DLC. In the Minimum On
Time box, enter the minimum length of time
the load must be active before it can be shed
or restored by the DLC.
Continuous
Load
5. Click Save to save the settings.
To edit the Load:
1. Click the DLC tab. The DLC Status page appears.
2. Click the Load Assignment tab to display the Load
Assignment page.
3. Select the load to edit from the Load Assignment
Name list and the selected load's details appear.
NOTE: The valid range for the minimum
shed time and minimum on time is 0
to 99 minutes.
5. Click Save to save the settings.
Assign Load
It displays the status of an individual load assignment or all
load assignments. If the DLC load configuration is modified,
then the load assignment status is displayed as Normal.
WebVision restores all the load assignments immediately by
23
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
issuing a restore command even if the load assignments are
in the shed state. After re-loading the configuration, all the
Minimum On/Shed timers are also reset.
•
•
Admin
System Utilization
To configure the System general properties:
NOTE: When DLC is in the Reloading Configuration
mode, only the status of the load assignments is
displayed. It implies that the respective load objects
are not displayed.
Use the following procedure to configure the system general
properties:
1. Click the Systems tab. The General tab of the System
page appears (Fig. 31).
To view the load assignment details:
1. Click the DLC tab. The DLC Status page appears.
2. Click the Load Assignment tab. The Load
Assignment page appears.
Fig. 31. System Tab - General Tab.
2. Enter/Select the following site details:
Fig. 30. Load Assignment Details.
•
Properties
WebVision Name: The entered WebVision
name is displayed.
Time and Date Settings
•
3. The following information appears in a tabular format:
•
•
•
•
•
Load Assignment Name: A unique name for load
assignment.
Min On Time: Displays the minimum period for
which the load is active.
Min Shed Time: Displays the period for which the
load is shed.
Max Shed Time: Displays the maximum period for
which the load is shed or made inactive.
Shed Method: Displays the method used to shed
load. For example, it can be Rotating, Off
Continuous, and so on.
•
•
•
Select the Time Format and Date Format.
Click Set System Date Time. The Set System
Date Time box appears. Set the date and time
and click OK.
•
Select Use Internet Time Server to enable this
option. The Time Server Address is enabled. Set
the host name of the Internet Time Server.
Ensure that the DNS server that WebVision uses
(DNS configuration done in Network Server) for
hostname to IP resolution must be able to
resolve the host name of the Internet. Time
Server to IP address. Ensure that WebVision is
connected to Internet and is able to access the
time server. If you are not sure how to do it,
contact your local Network Administrator for help.
Delete Load
To delete a load
1. On the Load Assignment page, select the name of the
load you want to delete from the Load Assignment
Name column.
2. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears.
3. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
NOTE: WebVision automatically synchronizes its time with
the internet time servers. Synchronization happens
every 24 Hours or when the Sync Now button is
pressed.
•
WebVision is Network Time Master: Select this
box to enable periodic time synchronization
between WebVision and devices on the network.
Time synchronization happens every 24 Hours,
when the system clock is changed, DST starts or
ends or when the Sync Now button is pressed.
Time Zone: Select the applicable time zone of
the WebVision (where the WebVision is
System
You can use the System page only if you have a Contractor's
privileges. Use this page to configure general settings of the
system that include Time and Date settings, new package
installation, SMTP settings, Network settings, and Home Page
settings.
•
installed). Every time the Time Zone is changed,
you must reboot WebVision to apply the new
time zone. Click Save after selecting the new
time zone, WebVision prompts you to reboot the
machine. After reboot, set the time and date as
explained above.
Use this System page to configure:
•
•
•
•
•
General Properties
Site Setup
Network Setup Details
Dial In Settings
E-mail Setup
95-7769—01
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
3. Choose US English or Metric as the standard for
setting the Engineering Units. All the point values in
the WebVision user interface are shown in the selected
unit.
4. For local weather, check the Enable check box. Select
a State and City from the corresponding lists.
5. Click Save to save the settings.
• IP Settings: (continued)
•
•
•
IP Address: A 32 bit address used to identify
WebVision on IP network. This address is
typically represented in dotted-decimal notation,
with the decimal value of each octet separated
by a period, for example, 192.168.0.1.
HTTP Port: Enter the port number. The default
port number is 80. If the port number entered is
other than 80 then you must type the
application's URL followed by the port number.
For example, http://199.63.24.224:81.
Network Mask: This is used to separate Network
Address and Host Address from IP Address in an
IP network. For example:
To configure Site setup:
Use the following procedure to configure the site setup:
1. Click the Systems tab. The System page with General
Properties appears.
2. Click the Site Setup tab. The Site Setup page appears.
3. Enter the following site details.
IP address - 192.168.1.100
Network Mask - 255.255.255.0
(IP Address) & (Network Mask) = Network
Address = 192.168.1.0
NOTE: Note: The supported background image formats
include: jpg, jpeg, and gif. The size of the image file
must not exceed 1MB.
(IP Address) & (Network Mask)' = Host Address
= 0.0.0.100; where “&” is logic and operation and
“'” is the logic complement operation.
Gateway IP Address: IP Address of a host that
is used as a gateway by WebVision to
communicate with hosts on other networks.
Typical scenario is when you connect to
WebVision using a host on a different network
using a browser.
DNS1 Server Name: The IP Address of the host
on the network that WebVision uses to resolve
host name to IP Address or vice-versa. This
service is mainly utilized by WebVision for Mail
Notification and Internet Time Synchronization.
DNS2 Server Name: The IP Address of the host
on the network that WebVision uses to resolve
host name to IP Address or vice-versa. This
service is mainly utilized by WebVision for Mail
Notification and Internet Time Synchronization.
Mac ID: The unique hardware identification of a
network device.
•
•
Contractor Details:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Company Name
Contractor Phone
Contractor Website
Contractor Email
Company Logo: Click the Browse button to
browse for the site logo. Upload the selected
logo.
•
•
Login Screen Image
•
Image: Click the Browse button to browse for
the site image. Upload the selected image.
NOTE: Click Reset Image to restore the default image.
4. For outside air temperature, click Select Point and
select Channel, Device, and Point from the
corresponding list.
•
•
NOTE: Click Clear to clear the fields.
Map Host Name to IP Address:
5. To provide weather conditions from an external link,
type the required URL and a Display Name for the link.
6. Click Save to save the settings.
•
Click Advance Settings. The Advance
Settings window appears.
•
Type the Host Name. It is a unique name
given to a network equipment. You can
change it if required. The host name
corresponds to the MAC address.
Type the IP Address. It is the numerical
address used to identify a device on a
network.
Click OK. Each host Name is mapped to the
specified IP Address. You can use either to
access the device on the network.
To configure Network setup:
Use the following procedure to configure the network setup:
•
•
1. Click the Systems tab. The System page with General
Properties appears.
2. Click Network Setup. The Network Setup page
appears.
3. Enter/select the following details:
•
Channel Info:
•
IP Settings:
•
Channel Name: LonNetwork name used in the
WebVision.
•
Host Name: Host Name is the name of the
WebVision on TCP/IP network. This name is
used to find WebVision on the network with the
help of the DNS server.
•
Domain ID: This is used to name a group of
devices connected to a LonNetwork. The
Domain ID must contain numbers form zero [0] to
nine [9] and must be in pairs. For example, if the
length of the Domain ID is configured as 3, then
the Domain ID is 12 34 56. There must be a
space between each pair.
Subnet/Node ID: The Subnet represents a
LonNetwork and Node ID represents a controller
on that network. Here this Subnet/Node ID is
used to identify the LonNetwork of the
WebVision.
•
•
Domain: Name of the domain in which
WebVision exists.
DHCP: To assign IP addresses dynamically.
NOTE: Since the IP address changes frequently, it is not
possible to communicate with other WebVision
applications on the network.
•
25
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
•
Channel Info: (continued)
Domain Length: Length of the Domain ID.
To enable Dial In settings:
Complete the following procedure to enable the dial in settings
on your computer/laptop:
•
4. Click Save to save the settings.
1. Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel > Network
Connection.
2. Go to File > New Connection.
To configure Dial-up settings:
Use the following procedure to configure the dial-up settings:
1. Click the Systems tab. The System page with General
Properties appears.
2. Click the Dial-Up Setup tab. The Dial-Up Setting page
appears.
3. Select required option from the Dial Up Type group
box. Whenever you are not on network and still want to
access WebVision, you can use the Dial-in facility.
Using this feature you can access WebVision from
anywhere.
4. Enter the following details.
•
Dial In:
•
Local IP Address: IP address of the local
machine from where you want to access the
WebVision application.
Remote IP Address: IP address of remote
machine where WebVision application is hosted.
User Name: Type the user name.
•
•
•
Password: Type the password.
Fig. 33. File - New Connection menu selection.
•
Modem Setting:
•
Initialization String: As specified in the
specification of the modem used.
Baud Rate: As specified in the specification of
the modem used.
3. The New Wizard screen appears. Click Next.
•
NOTE: The default modem settings works for most of the
modems. If the modem is not working, then change
the configuration.
5. Click Save to save the settings.
Deployment Diagram
WEBVISION
DAIL-UP ADAPTER
MODEM
Fig. 34. New Connection Wizard screen.
LOCAL IP ADDRESS
USERNAME
PSTN
PASSWORD
DAIL-UP ADAPTER
MODEM
REMOTE IP ADDRESS
PC / LAPTOP
M28781
Fig. 32. Deployment Diagram.
95-7769—01
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
4. Select the Connect to the Internet option and click
Next.
7. Type the name of the service provider and click Next.
Fig. 38. Connection Name - Service Provider.
Fig. 35. Network Connection Type screen.
8. Type your phone number and click Next.
5. Select the Set up my connection manually option and
click Next.
Fig. 39. Phone Number to Dial screen.
Fig. 36. Setup my connection manually - button
9. Select the required option for connection availability and
click Next.
6. Select the Connect using a dial-up modem option and
click Next.
Fig. 40. Connection Availability screen.
Fig. 37. Connect using a dial-up modem button.
27
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
10. Type the user name and password and click Next.
The same credentials are used while enabling dial in
settings in WebVision.
server and domain names prior to configuring the
SMTP E-mail server option. An example to
maintain the format: SMTP.server.com.
Email Address: Enter a valid e-mail address.
The account must be present in the SMTP
server.
User Authentication: Check this box to provide
the user credentials. On selection it enables the
following parameters.
•
•
•
User Name: Type the user name of the SMTP
server. Type any name of your choice. For
example, webvision1.
•
•
Password: Type the SMTP password.
Confirm Password: Retype your password.
NOTE: The password field cannot be empty. The maximum
number of characters is 50. The characters allowed
are: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, _, !, @, #, $, %, ^, *, -, |, SPACE.
4. Click Save to save the settings.
5. Click Send Test Mail. The Email Service Status
displays the status. A test message is sent to the e-mail
address. A confirmation message appears.
6. If the settings are incorrect then, the Last Failure
Message field displays the reason for failing in sending
the message.
Fig. 41. Internet Account Information - User Name and
Password.
11. Click Finish to complete the connection.
Configuring Admin
These files have .dist as the file extension. You can upload
files up to 5MB in size.
Complete the following procedure to install a new package:
1. Click Browse to upload the Software Update Package.
This allows you to install software updates, if any, that
are published by Honeywell for WebVision.
2. Click Install.
Reboot WebVision
1. Click the Reboot button to reboot WebVision. This logs
you out and then initiates reboot.
2. Re-logon after 5 to 10 minutes after the reboot is
completed.
Fig. 42. Completing the New Connection Wizard screen.
Backup Configuration
To configure E-mail setup:
The backup file has .dist as the file extension.
Complete the following procedure to configure the e-mail
setup details:
Complete the following procedure to backup the configuration
settings:
1. Click the Systems tab. The System page with General
Properties appears.
2. Click the Email Setup tab. The Email Setup page
appears.
1. Click Backup Configuration to backup the
configuration settings.
2. A window appears prompting you to Save the backup
3. Enter the following details:
file.
•
SMTP Server
3. Click Save to save the backup file and specify the
•
Enable Email Service: Check this box to enable
location for the file.
or
Click Cancel to close the pop-up.
the SMTP protocol.
•
Use Sever WebVision as SMTP gateway:
Check this box to use WebVision server as
SMTP gateway.
Restore Configuration
•
Email Server: Enter the SMTP e-mail server to
use this service.
You must configure SMTP e-mail server to send
alarm notifications. The Internet Service Provider
(ISP) or Network Administrator has to provide the
You can restore the backed up files using this feature. The
backup file has .dist as the file extension.
Complete the following procedure to restore the configuration
settings:
95-7769—01
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
1. Click Restore Configuration to restore the
configuration settings from the backup file. The Restore
Configuration dialog box appears. Select the backup
file that has to be restored.
2. Click Restore. WebVision restores the file and
automatically logs out before starting to restore. Once
restoring is complete, WebVision automatically reboots.
This may take about 5 to 10 minutes.
Device Configuration Changes
Device configuration covers seven areas:
3. Logon to WebVision again, after 5 to 10 minutes.
NOTE: When saving the file, the default File Type option is
.dist.
Decommissioning XL15A
Following are the considerations for de-commissioning XL15A
(W7760A):
1. Alarms – Alarms in XL15A cannot be automatically
transferred to WebVision. Looking at the XL15A
configuration in LonSpec, manually create
corresponding Alarms configuration in WebVision.
Follow the steps given in User Guide or Online help to
understand how to create Alarms in WebVision.
2. Trends – Trends in XL15A cannot be automatically
transferred to WebVision. Looking at the XL15A
configuration in LonSpec, manually create
Download Audit Log
Complete the following procedure to download the audit log:
1. Click the Download Audit Log button.
2. Click Open to view the file.
or
Click Save to save the file at the required location.
The file displays information related to the action performed
by all the users.
corresponding Trends configuration in WebVision.
Follow the steps given in User Guide or Online help to
understand how to create Trends in WebVision.
WebVision comes loaded with default trends for each
type of supported device in disabled state. If the trend
that has to be created is already present and meets the
requirement, the user is advised to just enable that
trend instead of creating a new one.
Download System Log
Complete the following procedure to download the system
log:
1. Click the Download System Log button.
2. Click Open to view the file.
or
Click Save to save the file at the required location.
3. Schedules – Looking at the XL15A configuration in
LonSpec, manually create corresponding Schedules
configuration in WebVision. Follow the steps given in
User Guide or Online help to understand how to create
Schedules in WebVision.
4. Loops – WebVision does not support inbuilt loops.
However, if this feature is critical, the user can replace
XL15A with XL15C. Or the user can disconnect XL15A
from the Lon Network. If XL15C is used, the same loops
can be configured in XL15C using LonSpec and re-
commissioned. If the XL15A is disconnected from
network, the user should be aware that it may be driving
RIOs or may have bindings with other devices to get
some sensor information. The device should be
reconfigured and re-commissioned using LonSpec to
remove such dependencies.
5. Network Time Master – If XL15A is acting as Network
Time Master, when decommissioned, WebVision can be
configured to act as Network Time Master. Refer
WebVision’s User Guide or Online Help for details.
6. DLC – If XL15A is performing Demand Limit Control
(DLC). The same can be done in WebVision. However
the user should note that WebVision supports only one
Setpoint. The configuration has to be done as
appropriate. Refer WebVision’s User Guide or Online
Help for details.
7. Pulse Meter Input – If a Energy Pulse Meter is
connected to XL15A because it is running DLC or
because it is providing that information to a different
XL15A, then if replacing XL15A with XL15C will allow
the user to configure XL15C to connect Pulse Meter and
act as source for KW input for DLC running in
WebVision.
The file displays the logged system level error and trace
message.
System Utilization
Complete the following procedure to view system
performance:
1. Click the Systems tab. The System page with General
Properties appears.
2. Click System Utilization. The System Utilization page
appears.
3. You can view the Resource Utilization graph details on
your screen.
NOTE: This screen helps you to understand the WebVision
resources that are being used.
Migration of LCBS Sites in
WebVision
Ensure that the site configuration backup is available in
LonSpec.
You should use either LonSpec or WebVision as the primary
configuration tool. Having more than one tool would require
effort to keep them in sync that is manual and error prone.
At certain sites where XL15B is installed, the most current
LonSpec database is present on the XL15B. Such databases
must be brought into LonSpec and used for migration.
29
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
8. Alarm Dial-Out – This feature is not supported by
WebVision or by any alternate mechanisms. Hence this
has to be dropped as part of migration process.
9. Runtime Logs - This feature is not supported by
WebVision or by any alternate mechanisms. Hence this
has to be dropped as part of migration process.
10. Bindings between XL15A and RIOs – XL15A can be
replaced with XL15C to drive the loops configured. If the
loops are driving RIOs, the same be achieved using
XL15Cs and RIOs. The user should replace XL15A with
XL15C, configure the same loops in XL15C, associate
RIOs to XL15C in LonSpec and re-commission XL15C
and RIOs.
the occupancy state of those controllers that are
following T7350. If WebVision has to drive the
occupancy state of those controllers, user should first
unassign them from T7350 in LonSpec, commission
T7350 and the assigned controllers before configuring
schedules in WebVision
2. If T7350 is acting as Network Time Master, it has to be
disabled from LONSpec and re-commission T7350. The
Network Time Master Functionality in WebVision has to
be enabled. Once enabled, WebVision will synchronize
the clocks on all supported devices with Real-Time
Clocks that can be updated over the Lon network
XL15C changes
XL15C is supported in WebVision. However, there are some
differences that should be noted (below):
NOTE: The user should remember that replacing a controller
would involve rewiring and testing the physical
installation. The new XL15C that is replacing existing
XL15A has to be purchased separately and will not
be provided along with WebVision.
1. LonSpec creates bindings between XL15Cs and
assigned RIOs as shown in ‘refer points’ screen. These
bindings are present to read/command all I/Os on RIO
even if they are not used. WebVision does not have
concept of associating RIOs with XL15Cs. Therefore,
following is the behavior during migration:
Decommissioning XL15B
a. When the XL15C bindings are uploaded in WebVi-
sion, only used/ configured bindings are actually
shown and bindings on un-configured I/Os are
ignored
WebVision supports most of the functionality of XL15B.
However XL15B configuration has to be manually created in
WebVision. Configuration of the following functions should be
recreated in WebVision:
b. LonSpec allows naming I/Os of RIO (W7761).
These names are stored in associated XL15C’s sec-
ondary configuration file. As WebVision does not
support this file, all the RIO point names will appear
with default names in WebVision after migration.
User would manually associate them by creating
appropriate bindings between XL15Cs and RIOs.
2. If an XL15C controller at the site uses a poll point
configured to poll an unsupported LON device, the
Device, NV and Field information will not show up in
WebVision’s XL15C configuration wizard as the device
is not present in WebVision’s database. As part of de-
commissioning the unsupported device, the user has to
re-commission the XL15C so that information is
removed from the configuration
1. Alarms
2. Trends
3. Schedules – Unlike in XL15B, WebVision does not
support year round schedules. WebVision supports
weekly schedules that repeat through out the year.
Hence the schedules should be modified accordingly
4. DLC – Note that WebVision supported only one
Setpoint as against three in XL15B. Configuration
should be done accordingly
5. Special Graphics – Special Graphics in XL15B can be
created as Locations and Graphics on Locations in
WebVision
6. Network Time Master functionality
7. Internet Time Synchronization
8. Alarm Emailing
9. User accounts
10. Home Page graphics and Login Page graphics
3. The time taken to upload/download XL15C depends on
the number of loops configured in that XL15C. If more
number of loops is configured, WebVision will take more
time to upload/download. XL15C stores each loop
configuration in separate sections in its memory.
WebVision while uploading reads general device
configuration, reads the number of loops, reads I/Os
configured and then uploads configuration of each loop
and I/O
4. WebVision will upload all the objects that are configured
and used in control logic. If there are any Math
Functions, Setpoints, Logic Loops, Start Stop Loops that
are just given names or engineering units but do not
read any input or drive any output, such objects may be
ignored. The same reason is applicable while
downloading from WebVision. This optimizes the
download/upload process and does not impact the
XL15C configuration.
Decommissioning T7300
Following are the considerations for de-commissioning
T7300:
1. If the devices on the Lon network are following schedule
in T7300, then a similar schedule should be created in
WebVision and assign those devices to follow schedule
created in WebVision. The schedule configuration can
be referred in LonSpec and has to be manually created
in WebVision.
2. If T7300 is acting as Network Time Master, the Network
Time Master Functionality in WebVision has to be
enabled. Once enabled, WebVision will synchronize the
clocks on all supported devices with Real-Time Clocks
that can be updated over the Lon network
5. While uploading bindings, WebVision will not upload
bindings in which unconfigured objects like Control
Loops, Start Stop Loops, Logic Loops, Analog Inputs
are acting as source or target of the bindings.
T7350 Changes
WebVision supports configuration and management of T7350:
1. If a T7350 exists at the site and is driving scheduled
occupancy state of other devices, the user should
ensure that none of the schedules in WebVision drive
95-7769—01
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
LONSPEC METRIC VALUES
To fix the configuration error, use the following procedure:
LonSpec downloads metric values to the controller.
WebVision does not do any unit conversion of XL15C
configuration values when displaying in the user interface.
Therefore, what the user gets to see is what is present in the
controller. The following step eases the comparison process:
1. Open the configuration of each XL15C and go to
Control Loops tab.
1. Before comparing XL15C configuration with LonSpec,
right click on the project and open Edit Project dialog as
Metrics before proceeding further.
Fig. 44. LONSpec Configuration Screen.
2. Select Loop 6 (clDATLowLim) in control loops and click
Control Params. The Control Loop Parameters
dialog box appears.
Fig. 43. Edit project.
This ensures that you see all the values in LonSpec in the
Metric system.
Fig. 45. Control Loop Parameters dialog box.
FIXING RAPIDZONE CONFIGURATION ERRORS IN
LONSPEC
Due to a configuration error in RapidZone, sites built in
Rapidzone and migrated to LONSpec may have a
configuration error for every XL15C controller (W7760C). As a
result, device upload step in WebVision causes problems.
3. Select an appropriate option for Analog Limit Select
and click OK.
4. Repeat the above steps for all the XL15Cs.
5. After changing the Analog Limit Select, re-commission
all the XL15Cs with LONSpec.
31
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
NOTE: When re-commissioning, please use full commission
command, not quick commission.
LONSpec Changes
Complete the following steps for migrating the existing LCBS
sites to WebVision:
6. After re-commissioning, disconnect LonSpec from the
1. Ensure that LonSpec database which is used to
commission the site is ready. Open the LonSpec project.
Click Network > Edit on the menu bar. The Edit
Network dialog box appears.
network.
WebVision Configuration Steps
Start the migration process on a fresh WebVision without any
existing config file. There should not be any devices present in
WebVision
1. Configure WebVision as given in the Quick Start Guide
and connect it to Ethernet and LON network.
2. Logon to WebVision through internet browser.
3. Click System > Network Setup. In Channel Info, set
the Domain ID to the same domain ID configured in
LonSpec typically 2C (44 decimal). The ID must be
specified in Hex format.Click Save to save the changes.
Fig. 46. Edit Network dialog box.
2. Click Advanced Features. The Advanced Features
Fig. 48. Channel Info - Domain ID and Domain Length
fields.
dialog box appears.
4. Click the Devices tab and go to Device List screen.
5. Click Discover. A dialog box appears. Select Channel
as Channel 1 and click Discover. A progress bar
appears indicating the discovery progress.
6. After the discovery is complete, all the discovered
devices are listed on the left side of the table. Review
the subnet/node ids of discovered devices to ensure
that there are no conflicts. WebVision will detect the
clash and on confirmation from the user, it would
change the subnet/node id of the device.
NOTE: Changing subnet/node id will break any bindings
going in and out of that device. It is suggested that
the user find the clash manually and rectify them
through LonSpec.
Fig. 47. Advanced Features dialog box.
7. Select all the devices by clicking on each device (or
click the SelectAll box) and then click Add to add them
to WebVision database.
3. Set the Domain index for non-zero length domain to
0 (LNS based systems). Click OK to save the
changes.
4. Modify the original LonSpec project so that it does not
NOTE: The user should click on the device to select the
device in the discovered list to do further operation
on them. Although mouse scrolling across the
discovered devices records appear as selection,
they are actually not selected
contain unsupported devices. The following are
frequently used:
a. XL15A
b. XL15B
c. Command Display 1 and 2
d. T7300
8. Enter a name for each device that should appear in then
UI and click Done to complete the discovery process.
9. Select all the devices and click Upload to upload the
device configuration onto WebVision. A progress bar
appears indicating the progress of the Upload
operation. Once the upload is complete, the Synced On
option is enabled for each device.
10. Ensure that all the devices are in Auto mode in the
Mode Column. If any device is in Manual or any other
mode, select that device and click Set Mode to Auto.
11. Click the Device Bindings sub-tab next to Device List
subtab.
e. RapidLink/SLTA/PCLTA used by LonSpec, LonSta-
tion and XL15A.
f. RF Gateway
g. CX-VFD
It is highly recommended not to have these devices
physically connected to the Lon Network as it could
result in partial upload of binding information into WebVi-
sion, or worse interfere with WebVision functionality.
5. Disconnect WebVision from the network and re-
commission all the devices using LonSpec.
95-7769—01
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
12. Click Upload to upload the LON binding information
onto WebVision. A progress bar appears indicating the
progress of the Upload operation.
not solve the problem, user should manually fill in
the missing information. Any attempts to do
download without performing this operation may
break the control system in the site.
Points can be overridden through any means in
WebVision for a period of time. However, if
WebVision is powered off during that period and
re-started, WebVision will not restore the point i.e.
will not cancel the override even if the specified
override time has elapsed. In this case, a stale
value will be observed in WebVision. To cancel
the original override operation, the user should
override the point again for a minute and that
would restore the default value.
If XL15Cs use Math Functions that are type
Network Special, the configuration will get
uploaded properly into WebVision. However the
WebVision interface does not show Math
Functions of type Network Special in the user
interface.
NOTES
7.
1.
Ensure all the devices are in Auto mode. If you
see any device in Manual or any other mode,
select that device and click Set Mode to Auto to
change the mode.
2.
Click Download in Devices > Device List or
Devices > Device Bindings to initiate the
process of writing configuration data that is
present in WebVision to devices. This operation
should be performed only if it is absolutely
necessary. If there is no requirement to change
the configuration in the devices this operation
must not be performed.
8.
3.
The migration procedure has been tested with
LonSpec version 05.01.00.00 and later. It is
recommended that users use at least this version
for migration.
4.
5.
After the auto-resolution of Node ID conflict, if the
configuration upload fails (especially for XL15C),
user should wait a minute and retry the operation.
WebVision does not support access through
PPPoE connection. PPPoE is the data link layer
protocol used for broadband internet connections.
If the user is using PPPoE, the user is advised to
purchase a WiFi router or equivalent that supports
PPPoE and connect WebVision to the Ethernet
side of the router. Follow the User Guide of the
router to have the desired setup
WARRANTY AND RETURNS
Refer the user to Honeywell's standard warranty policy in the
Environmental and Combustion Controls Product Catalog
(form 70-6910). This literature is available on
customer.honeywell.com. Try the following link:
http://customer.honeywell.com/request.cfm?form=70-6910
6.
It is recommended that all the device
configurations and bindings are checked field by
field to ensure that the migration was successful
as expected. If any information is found missing,
the user can retry upload operation of
configuration/bindings as applicable. If that does
33
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
APPENDIX A – SUPPORTED DEVICES
This appendix provides configuration information for the
following controllers and devices:
and an LON jack. All wall modules include a space
temperature sensor, however a remote C7068A return air
sensor can also be used.
•
•
Constant Volume Air Handling Unit Controller
Supported Output Types
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Table 5 lists the supported output types.
Table 5. Supported Output Types.
Output
Options
Heating Floating, thermal, PWM, on/off, multi-stage
electric
Cooling Floating, thermal, PWM, on/off, multi-stage
compressor
Configuring Chilled Ceiling
Controllers (CHC)
Chilled Ceiling Controller Models
Table 6 lists the Chilled Ceiling Controller models.
Description
Table 6. Chilled Ceiling Controller Models.
Setpoint
The W7763C, D and E Controllers are Chilled Ceiling
Controllers in the Excel 10 product line. They cover a wide
range of control applications including radiators, induction
units, and fan coil units with manual fan switching, chilled
ceiling and chilled beam and are suitable for either wall
mounting or unit mounting. The controllers can operate as
stand-alone units or networked using the standard Echelon
Model
W7763C
W7763D
W7763E
Inputs Outputs Knob
Sensor Bypass
3
4
4
2
2
2
X
X
X
X
®
LONWORKS bus. Interfaces are provided for a wide range of
actuator types. Heating systems can be water or electric, and
cooling systems can be chilled water supply or compressors.
Extensive timing and interlock features make the W7763
especially suitable for systems using electric heat and
compressors.
Sequences
Heat and cool sequences can be selected to be active or not
active, giving a total of four different sequence options:
•
•
•
•
Heat only
Cool only
Heat/cool changeover
Heat and cool sequence
Navigating to CHC Pages
Go to the Devices tab. Expand the list of devices on the left
pane (listed under WebVision). Select a device to view its
properties.
The controller automatically disables heat and cool control
until the window is closed again. Frost protection remains
active.
Features
Modes of Operation
The controller has the following modes of operation:
®
•
•
LonMark HVAC profile 8020
®
Stand-alone operation or on high speed 78 kilobit LON
network.
Uses Echelon LonTalk protocol.
Direct connection of thermal actuators.
Factory-configured default parameters.
Wide range of supported valves and actuators.
Available with setpoint knob for wall mounting.
Built-in LON jack for easy network access.
Occupied mode This is the normal operating condition for a
room or zone when it is occupied. The controller can be
switched into this mode by a network command, by the room
occupancy sensor, or by a bypass button on the wall module.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Standby mode The standby mode saves energy by reducing
heating or cooling demand during periods where the room is
temporarily unoccupied.
LON service pin and LED accessible without disassembly.
The W7763C, D and E are LonMark-compliant Chilled Ceiling
Controllers in the Excel 10 family product line. These
Unoccupied mode This mode is used for longer unoccupied
controllers provide room temperature control using different
heating and cooling sequences. The controller is provided
with default configuration settings from the factory and is fully
operable on installation. Using standard Echelon configuration
tools, the controller can be configured with job-specific
settings. The TR21 and TR23 wall modules interface with the
Chilled Ceiling Controllers and provide the following options:
setpoint adjustment, an occupancy bypass button and LED,
periods, such as at night or during weekends and holidays.
Window open If the controller is configured for window open
detection, the controller automatically disables heat and cool
control until the window is closed again. Frost protection
remains active.
Frost protection If the temperature drops below 46 °F
(8 °C), the controller enables the heating circuit as frost
protection.
95-7769—01
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Fan fail When configured with an air flow detector, the
controller protects equipment by disabling the system when
the fan fails (for fan coil units with manual fan speed control).
Table 7. Input/Output Detail. (Continued)
PIN
I/O
Digital
Function Number
Characteristics
Changeover The controller operates two-pipe units
configured with a changeover input.
OUTPUTS
Override
LED
6
0 to 5 Vdc (≤ 10mA)
(Wall
Dewpoint When configured with a chilled water temperature
sensor, the controller will close the cool valve when the chilled
water temperature falls below the dew point. The dew point
may be a fixed value or calculated based upon input from a
humidity sensor.
Module
Connection
Only)
Triac
(2 pairs)
Heat and
Cool
14, 15, 24 Vac, 250 mA max
17, 18 continuous,
650 mA max surge
(≤ 30 sec.)
Condensation When configured with a condensation switch,
the controller will close the cool valve when condensation is
detected.
CHC Outputs
Input/Output
Table 7 lists the Input/Output (I/O) detail.
Description
Table 7. Input/Output Detail.
PIN
CHC applications can have a variable number of heating and
cooling stages. The number of pipes used on the unit could be
two or four. The outputs could be staged, PWM, floating, or
Thermal type. In addition the outputs can be of Change over
mode.
I/O
Digital
Function Number
Characteristics
INPUTS
Window/
4
7
Closed ≤ 400 ohm
Open ≥ 10K ohm
occupancy/
changeover/
air flow/
Purpose
Define the operation of the chilled ceiling controller outputs
and the type of equipment to be controlled.
condensation
Digital
Override
Closed ≤ 400 ohm
Open ≥ 3.3k ohm
Mode
(SeeTable 5
on page 34)
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Analog
Humidity
Sensor
1
3, 9
8
0 to 10 Vdc
Procedure
Analog
Temperature
Sensor
20K ohm NTC
(25 °C)
1. Click the Outputs button on the left pane to open the
Output Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Analog
(Wall
Setpoint
Adjustment
10k Ohm
Module
Connection
Only)
4. Click Next to display the Input Configuration page.
CHC Output Fields
Table 8 describes the field definitions.
Table 8. CHC Outputs - Field Definitions.
Definition
Name
Application
Safety
Select/disable ceiling protection
Condensation Protection
Chilled Ceiling protection option
It enables dew-point calculation and condensation protection. The cold water temperature value must be
available (either wired connected or shared via the network). If the humidity value is available (either connected
or shared via the network), the controller uses it to calculate the dew-point temperature for the cold water
temperature limitation; otherwise it uses a settable dew-point setpoint.
35
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 8. CHC Outputs - Field Definitions. (Continued)
Definition
Name
Application (continued)
No Condensation Protection
Disable the dew-point temperature calculation and protection. The cold water temperature and the humidity are
not needed by the controller; the chilled ceiling protection can still be performed by the condensation switch.
System
Define the type of equipment that is being controlled in terms of the number of pipes used on the unit.
Two Pipe
A unit that has only two pipes. Selecting this system type limits the controller to control only one valve output and
operate in a changeover mode. When operating in the changeover mode, the controller uses only the one valve
for controlling both heating and cooling. Use this configuration only when changeover operation is required.
Four Pipe
A unit that has four pipes connected, providing both heating and cooling at the same time. The controller uses
one output to control heating only and one output to control cooling only, as configured in the Outputs page.
Control Outputs
Configures the two control outputs for the different type of actuators and control sequences required for the
application.
Output 1 - Mode
The output triac pair connected to terminals 13/14/15 of the controller.
Select the control sequence option to be allocated to Output 1. For four-pipe applications, always allocate this
output to the heat option to minimize field wiring errors. For two-pipe applications, the changeover option is the
only option.
Heat Mode
The output is modulated open when heat energy is needed in the space.
Cool Mode
The output is modulated open when cool energy is needed in the space; it is also modulated to limit the cold
water temperature above dew-point temperature (if enabled).
ChangeOver Mode
The output is modulated open when heat or cool energy is needed in the space. In Cool Mode, the output is
modulated to limit the cold water temperature above the dew-point temperature (if enabled).
Not Used
The output is not controlled by the controller and is always off.
Output1 - Type
Select the type of actuator to be connected to the output.
Floating
A three-point actuator that can be commanded open or closed. It is on terminals 14/15 and/or 17/18. The run-
times for the actuator are configured in the Outputs page.
Floating
A three point actuator that can be commanded open or closed on terminals 14/15 and/or 17/18. The run-times for
the actuator are configured in the Outputs page. The Zero Energy Position (no Heat and no Cool) is the middle
Position (50%). The Cool Range is 0 to 50%; the Heat Range, 50 to 100%. The Range can be reversed by
selecting the Actuator Direct or Reverse Option. During the Synchronization Process, the fan is turned off.
PWM
A duty-cycled output where the 24VAC output is pulsed on/off in the duty cycle range 0% to 100%. This actuator
drives output terminal 14 and/or 17.
One Stage
A single-stage on/off output. It switches terminals 14 and/or 17.
Two Stage
A two-stage output: Terminals 14/17 are switched for stage 1 and terminals 15/18 are switched for stage 2.
95-7769—01
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 8. CHC Outputs - Field Definitions. (Continued)
Definition
Name
Control Outputs (continued)
Three Stage
A three-stage switched output. Terminals 14/17 are switched for stage 1, terminals 15/18 are switched for stage
2. Both terminal 14+15 and/or 17+18 are switched for stage 3.
Thermal
A switched on/off output for switching a 24V thermal actuator on terminal 14/17.
Output 2 - Mode
The output triac pair connected to terminals 16/17/18 of the controller.
Select the control sequence option to be allocated to output 2. For four-pipe applications, always allocate this
output to the cool option to minimize field wiring errors. For two-pipe applications, only the changeover option is
available.
The selection options are the same as for Output 1.
Procedure
CHC Inputs
1. Click the Inputs button on the left pane to open the
Input Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Purpose
To select the wall module parameters and input points to
configure a CHC controller.
4. Click Next to display the Equipment Control
Configuration page or Back to display the Output
Configuration page.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
CHC Input Fields
Table 9 describes the field definitions.
Table 9. CHC Inputs - Field Definitions.
Field and Definition
Name
Controller / Wall Module
Configures the functionality of the connected wall module. Be careful that the features configured here are the same as the features
available on the wall module device to be connected.
Space Temp Sensor
Specify whether or not the controller is to be used with a space temperature sensor connected to its input. Normally, a space
temperature sensor is used, but in cases where the space temperature is supplied from another device via the network, the local
space temperature sensor input is not used.
Yes
The local space temperature sensor input is used. Ensure that a space temperature sensor is actually connected otherwise the
controller measures incorrect values.
No
The local space temperature sensor is not used. This option must be selected when a sensor is not connected.
LED/LCD Display
This configuration defines whether a Wall Module with LED or a Wall Module with LCD Display is connected.
For the LED, either the Override Status or the Effective Occupancy Status is displayed. The LCD Display show the both - the
Effective and the Override Status and an additional Off Condition.
The Override Status results from the Scheduler, the Network Override, the Override Button and the Occupancy Sensor. The Off
Condition results from the Fan Speed Switch, the Window Contact and the Medium from nviApplicMode.
LED Override
The LED shows the Override from the Override Button or from the Network. On indicates Override Bypass, 1 Flash per Second
indicates Override Unoccupied, 2 Flashes per Second indicates Override Standby or Occupied. 4 Flashes indicates the Controller
answers of the Network Management Command Wink.
37
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 9. CHC Inputs - Field Definitions. (Continued)
Name
Field and Definition
Controller / Wall Module (continued)
LED Occupancy
The LED shows the effective Occupancy mode. On indicates effective Occupied or Bypass, 1 Flash per Second indicates effective
Standby, Off indicates effective Unoccupied. 4 Flashes indicates the Controller answers of the Network Management Command
Wink.
LCD Display
This mode is used only for a Wall Module with LCD Display. The Display has following Symbols to show the Occupancy Modes: Sun
indicates effective Occupied or Bypass, Half Sun indicates effective Standby, Moon indicates effective Unoccupied. No Symbol and
OFF in 7-Segment indicates the Controller is Off. In the Off mode, a Snow Flag indicates whether Frost Protection is configured.
Blinking Symbols are used to show the Override: Blinking Sun indicates Override Occupied or Bypass, blinking Half Sun indicates
Override Standby, Blinking Moon indicates override unoccupied. The Controller answers with the Network Management Command
Wink with blinking Sun and Moon.
Override Button
Define how the override button on the connected wall module is to be used.
None
The wall module button is not used for bypass function.
ByPass Only
The Bypass button, when pressed, has two different functions depending on the length of time the button is held down:
Two seconds puts the controller in Bypass.
Five seconds puts the controller in Unoccupied.
Bypass
The Bypass button, when pressed, has the following function:
In two seconds the controller is in Bypass mode.
Setpoint Knob
The setpoint knob is available in different types of scale, and with different setpoint meanings, based on the country of usage. The
temperature engineering unit used (°C or °F) is the setting made in WebVision when creating the new project. That setting is used
for the total project. Note that the setpoint knob only affects the Occupied and Standby Setpoints. The Unoccupied setpoint is not
affected by the setpoint knob. Note that Version C and D Chilled Ceiling controllers have an on-board setpoint. They cannot be used
with an external TR21 or TR23 setpoint device.
The range of setpoint knob value lies between -9tdf to +9tdf.
No Knob
The setpoint knob is ignored. Note that this must be chosen if there is no setpoint knob connected to the controller. This selection
prevents the controller from reacting to incorrect setpoint values.
Relative
The setpoint knob is a relative knob, showing only a setpoint shift as (+) and (-) changes to the configured setpoint.
Absolute Middle
The setpoint knob is an absolute knob, showing the setpoint in absolute degrees. It is used as the space temperature setpoint
midway between the heating and cooling zero energy band.
Setpoint Limits
These two fields specify the allowed range of adjustment available from the wall module setpoint knob. This range is used by the
building manager for energy management purposes, to balance allowed comfort conditions with energy usage.
(SETPOINT KNOB = RELATIVE)
When the setpoint knob has been chosen as relative, the setpoint limits define the range of adjustment of the setpoint knob from the
zero point, in (DDC) for °C installations and (DDF) for °F installations.
(SETPOINT KNOB = ABSOLUTE MIDDLE)
When the setpoint knob has been chosen as absolute, the setpoint limits are limits on the absolute range of the setpoint knob in
(Deg.C) for °C installations and (Deg.F) for °F installations.
95-7769—01
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 9. CHC Inputs - Field Definitions. (Continued)
Name
Field and Definition
Input Ports
Specifies usage of the controller inputs
a
Analog Input 1 and Analog Input 2
Window Closed
Indicates if a window is closed. Close window disables the controller operation. If the contact is closed, the window is closed.
Window Open
Indicates if a window is opened. An open window enables the controller operation. If the contact is closed, the window is closed.
Occupied Sensor
Indicates if the room is occupied. If the contact is closed, the space is occupied.
Unoccupied Sensor
Indicates if the room is unoccupied. If it is unoccupied, the controller switches from the occupied operating setpoints to the standby
operating setpoints.
ChangeOver Cool
This selection is for local heat/cool changeover operation for two-pipe units using a switch or local thermostat switch. When the
contact closes, this input indicates that the system can operate in cooling mode. When the contact opens, this input indicates that
the system can operate in heating mode.
ChangeOver Heat
This selection is for local heat/cool changeover operation for two-pipe units using a switch or local thermostat switch. When the
contact closes, the input indicates that the system can operate in heating mode. When the contact opens, the input indicates that
the system can operate in cooling mode.
Condensation
Indicates if there is condensation in the ceiling. When condensation is detected, the controller closes the cooling output. The cooling
output is controlled again after 5 minutes if condensation is not detected anymore. When the contact closes, there is condensation.
No Condensation
Indicates if there is no condensation in the ceiling. As long as there is no condensation, the contact is closed. If the contact opens,
the controller closes the cooling output. The cooling output is controlled again after 5 minutes if condensation is no longer detected.
When the contact closes, there is no condensation.
Movement
This selection is used for movement detector configuration where a closed contact indicates movement. Movement detector is the
same as occupancy sensor, but with an additional Hold Time of 15 minutes. This adds a delay to the occupancy signal such that the
space is considered occupied until 15 minutes has elapsed since the last movement is detected.
Cold Water
The cold water temperature sensor input is used. Ensure that a cold water temperature sensor is actually connected otherwise the
controller measures incorrect values.
Not Used
The cold water temperature sensor is not used. This option must be selected when a sensor is not connected and is shared via the
network.
Analog Input 3
Specify whether or not the controller is to be used with a humidity sensor connected to its input. If the controller is configured for ceiling
protection, as defined in the Outputs page, the humidity must be either connected or shared via the network.
Humidity
The humidity sensor input is used. Ensure that a humidity sensor is actually connected; otherwise, the controller measures incorrect
values.
Not Used
The humidity sensor input is not used.
a
You cannot configure the same for Analog Input1 and Analog Input2. For example, you cannot configure Analog Input1 as
Window Contact and Analog Input2 as Window Contact. All digital inputs for Input2 are supported since controller version
1.0.4.
39
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Procedure
CHC Equipment Control
1. Click the Equipment Control button on the left pane to
open the Equipment Control Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Switching Levels
Configuration page or Back to display the Inputs
Configuration page.
Purpose
Define the main control features of controller outputs.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
CHC Equipment Control Options
Table 10 describes the configuration options.
Table 10. CHC Equipment Control - Options.
Option and Definition
Name
Output Options
Defines the operating characteristics of the two valve actuator outputs.
Output 1 and Output 2
Define operation of output 1 and output 2, as configured in the Outputs page. The settings for both Outputs have
the same meaning as described in the following text.
Valve Direction
Define the operating direction of the valves for actuator types Floating, PWM, and Thermal.
Direct
To open, the valve is modulated from 0% to 100%.
Reverse
To open, the valve is modulated from 100% to 0%.
Min Stage Off Time
Define the minimum off-time for control outputs configured for operation as staged outputs. This setting is
particularly useful for heat exchanger operation or compressor units. Each stage of the controlled output
stays off for the minimum period of time before the controller turns it on again. The selectable range is 0 to
600 seconds.
Valve Runtime
This configuration parameter has three different functions depending on the control output type selected in
Control Outputs.
(CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE = FLOATING)
The value is the actuator run-time in the range 20 to 600 seconds.
(CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE = PWM)
The value is the cycle period of the PWM output in the range 20 to 600 seconds.
(CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE = ONE, TWO OR THREE STAGE)
The value is the minimum on-time for each of the stages, for controlling compressor units
PWM Options
Configures the full range of the PWM outputs. For many PWM-controlled devices, an output of 0% or 100% is not
allowed since a PWM output shows no switching at these percentages. Therefore, most PWM devices have a
minimum duty cycle and a maximum duty cycle between which they operate from zero to full scale. The fields here
configure the full range settings. You can swap the Zero and Full range values to achieve reverse operation for a
PWM output.
Zero
PWM % duty cycle for fully closed position.
Full
PWM % duty cycle for fully open position.
95-7769—01
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
CHC Switching Levels
4. Click Next to display the Miscellaneous Configuration
page or Back to display the Switching Levels
Configuration page.
Purpose
To configure the staged output switching levels.
CHC Zone Control fields
Setpoints can range from 10 to 35 ºC (50 to 95 ºF).
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Also specify dew-point temperature setpoint and a safety
band to be used in case the dew point calculation fails or a
humidity sensor is not available. These fields are not used
when the controller is not configured for ceiling protection.
Procedure
1. Click the Switching Levels button on the left pane to
open the Switching Levels Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
CHC Miscellaneous
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Zone Control Configuration
page or Back to display the Equipment Control page.
Purpose
To configure energy management parameters.
CHC Switching Level fields
All levels can be set in the range 0% to 100%.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
CHC Zone Control
Procedure
1. Click the Miscellaneous button on the left pane to open
the Miscellaneous Parameters Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Purpose
To configure the heating and cooling setpoints for the
Occupied, Standby, and Unoccupied operating modes.
Mode
4. Click Next to display the PID Configuration page or
Back to display the Zone Control Configuration page.
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
CHC Miscellaneous Options
Table 11 describes the options.
Procedure
1. Click the Zone Control button on the left pane to open
the Zone Control Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
Table 11. CHC - Miscellaneous Options.
Option and Definition
Name
Miscellaneous
Configures operator bypass and priority options.
Bypass Time
Define the period of time (0 to 1080 minutes) in which the controller operates to occupied setpoints after the
local user has pressed the override button.
Override Priority
Allocate priority between local wall module operations (for example, Bypass) and commands from the
building management central. Choices are:
Last Wins
Last received input takes precedence. It can be either the Bypass button or the Network signal.
Network Wins
The Network signal always takes precedence over the Bypass button
41
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 11. CHC - Miscellaneous Options. (Continued)
Option and Definition
Name
Energy Management
DLC SetPoint Bump
For load shedding applications, define the temporary setpoint shift to be added to the setpoint when the controller
receives a Load Shedding command. By raising the setpoint during cooling operation, or reducing the setpoint
during heating operation, the controller reduces the amount of heat or cool energy dissipated as a contribution to
load shed algorithms. The parameter can be set in the range 0 to 10DDC (0 to 18DDF).
Cool. Rec. Ramp, Heat. Rec. Ramp
Define the rate at which the setpoint is reset during changes between occupancy modes to provide a form of
optimum start algorithm
Procedure
CHC PID
1. Click the PID button on the left pane to open the PID
Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Wiring Configuration page or
Back to display the Miscellaneous Configuration
page.
Purpose
Configure the variables for closed loop control. PID
parameters can be set separately for both heating and cooling
control.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
CHC PID settings
Table 12 describes the settings.
Table 12. CHC - PID Settings.
Setting and Definition
Name
PID
Cooling/Heating
Allows the algorithm control parameters to be configured.
Proportional band
This value is the temperature deviation between setpoint and space temperature, which causes the control
output to modulate from 0% to 100% of full range. The variable can be set in the range 2 to 100DDC (3.6 to
180DDF), 1.3 to 100DDC (2.3DDF to 180DDF) for Proportional Control only.
Reset Time
This value is the integral reset time in the range 0 to 3200 sec. Setting the Integral constant to zero disables
integral operation.
Derivative Time
This value is the derivative constant in the range 0 to 3200 sec. Setting the derivative constant to zero disables
derivative operation.
Thermal Switching Band/PID Boost
Cooling/Heating
Boost Temp
Allows a boost band to be set for normal PID operation and when using thermal actuators. The variables indicate
a setpoint-space temperature deviation outside which the outputs are switched to full operation to act as a boost
function when space temperature deviates significantly from the desired setpoint. This band also serves as a
threshold for two-point switching of thermal actuators. The threshold can be set in the range 0 to 10DDC (7.2 to
180DDF). If the threshold is set to 0DDC, the boost function is disabled.
95-7769—01
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 14. CHC - LON Bus Terminals. (Continued)
CHC Wiring Diagram
Output1 /
Output2
Terminal
14/15
Terminal
17/18
Purpose
3-stage
14 On = stage 2
17 On = stage 1
Display the wiring diagram for the controller.
15 On = stage 2
14 On + 15 On = stage 3
14 = PWM
18 On = stage 2
17 On + 18 On = stage 3
17 = PWM
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
PWM
15 = not used
18 = not used
Thermal
14 = Pulse Modulated
15 = not used
17 = Pulse Modulated
18 = not used
Procedure
1. Click the Wiring button on the left pane to open the
Wiring Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Power
24VAC: 50/60 Hz.
4. Click Back to display the PID Configuration page.
Configuring the Constant Volume Air
Handling Unit Controllers (CVAHU)
Fields
DI1 Window / Occupancy / Air Flow / Changeover.
Description
Table 13. CHC - Wiring Diagram.
The W7750 series is the Constant Volume Air Handling Unit
(CVAHU) controller in the Excel 10 family. It is a LonMark
compliant device designed to control single zone and heat
pump air handlers. The W7750 series can be configured to
control a wide variety of possible equipment arrangements.
Name
Wall
Module
Definition
Use these terminals to connect the Wall Module.
•
•
•
•
Override LED
Setpoint
Bypass Button
The various models available for The XL10 CVAHU are:
Room Temp Sensor
•
•
•
W7750A
W7750B
W7750C
LON Bus
The terminals in Table 14 are used to connect the LON Bus
FTT-10A. The LON terminals are insensitive to polarity.
Purpose
To configure a CVAHU application.
Table 14. CHC - LON Bus Terminals.
Output1 /
Output2
Terminal
14/15
Terminal
17/18
Navigating to CVAHU Pages
Go to the Devices tab. Expand the list of devices on the left
pane (listed under WebVision). Select a device to view its
properties.
Floating
1-stage
2-stage
14 On = open valve
15 On = close valve
14 = On/Off
17 On = open valve
18 On = close valve
17 = On/Off
CVAHU Device Property Fields
Table 15 lists the CVAHU device properties for each controller
model.
15 = not used
18 = not used
14 On = stage 1
14 On + 15 On = stage 2
17 On = stage 1
17 On + 18 On = stage 2
Table 15. XL10 CVAHU Device Properties for each Model.
W7750A W7750B
Criteria
W7750C
Digital Outputs
Analog Outputs
6 (Relay)
8
5
0
0
3
Conventional or
yes
yes
yes
Heat pump control
Stages of electric or
gas fired heating
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
Stages of Cooling
43
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 15. XL10 CVAHU Device Properties for each Model. (Continued)
Criteria
W7750A
W7750B
W7750C
Heating
Cooling
N/A
N/A
Floating, or Pulse width
modulated
Floating, Pulse width
modulated, reverse Pulse width
modulated, Analog, or reverse
Analog
Floating, or Pulse width
modulated
Floating, Pulse width
modulated, Reverse Pulse width
modulated, Analog, or reverse
Analog
Mixed Air Damped Output Floating
Floating or Pulse width
modulated
Floating, Pulse width
modulated, Reverse Pulse
Width modulated, Analog, or
reverse Analog
Optional Outputs
AuxEcon, OccStatus, Free1,
Free2, Free1PulseOn
AuxEcon, OccStatus, Free1,
Free2, Free1PulseOn
AuxEcon, OccStatus, Free1 or
reverse Free1
or Free1PulseOff
or Free1PulseOff
Free2 or Reverse Free2
Free1PulseOn or
Free1PulseOff
Free1AO or Free1AORev
Free2AO or Free2AORev
Override
Occupancy sensor override and Occupancy sensor override and Occupancy sensor override and
window open override
window open override
window open override
Analog Inputs
3 resistive
4 resistive and 2 voltage
4 resistive and 2 voltage
With Outdoor 20KNTC sensor
support
Digital Inputs
3 digital inputs
5 digital inputs
5 digital inputs with Coil Freeze
Status support
LED digital output
Power Supply
Yes
N/A
Yes
Yes
22 Vdc power supply
22 Vdc power supply
NOTE: One digital input is reserved for the Wall Module
Bypass. One analog input reserved for Wall Module
Sensor and one analog input reserved for Wall
Module Setpoint. Consult the System Engineering
Guide before configuring the CVAHU. Also, refer to
Excel 10 W7750A,B, C Constant Volume AHU
Controller Specification Data (form 74-2956); or
Excel 10 W7750A, B, C Constant Volume AHU
Controller Installation Instructions (form 95-7521) for
more information.
NOTE: Packaged Economizer is selected by using
EconNonePackaged and selecting the AuxEcon
optional Output. This output will enable the
economizer when the CVAHU is in the Occupied
mode.
Purpose
Enter all outputs, including optional outputs, to be controlled
by the CVAHU Controller.
T
his literature is available on customer.honeywell.com
Try the following link for any document:
http://customer.honeywell.com/request.cfm?form=xx-xxxx
.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
CVAHU Outputs
Procedure
1. Click the Outputs button on the left pane to open the
Output Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Select the appropriate controller type from the
Controller Type list.
4. Select the power frequency from the Power Frequency
list.
5. Select the appropriate equipment type from the
Equipment Type list.
Description
CVAHU applications can have a variable number of heating
and cooling stages. The outputs could be of staged, PWM,
floating, or Analog type. In addition there is a Change over
relay (Heat Pump Application) and Economizer Output. The
Economizer output can be Floating, PWM, Analog, or
Packaged Economizer 1. Optional points can also be selected
from this selection.
6. Choose the number of heating stages (1-4) or the type
(PWM or Floating) from the Heating list.
95-7769—01
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
7. Choose the number of cooling stages (1-4) or the type
(PWM or Floating) from the Cooling list.
9. Configure the Optional points. Refer to Table 16 on
page 45 for possible values.
8. Select the type of economizer from the Economizer list.
a. If the heating, cooling, or economizer is configured
as PWM, the Period, Zero Scale, and Full Scale
settings must be configured.
10. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
11. Click Next to display the Input Configuration page.
b. If the heating, the cooling, or the economizer is
configured as Floating, the Motor speed settings
must be configured.
CVAHU Controller Outputs
Table 16 lists the CVAHU Outputs for each controller model.
Table 16. CVAHU Outputs for each Model.
W7750B
Output
Heating
W7750A
W7750C
1 to 4 stages
1 to 4 stages
1 to 4 stages, HeatPWM or
HeatingFloating
1 to 4 stages, HeatPWM,
HeatPWMRev, HeatAO,
HeatAORev, or HeatingFloating.
Cooling
1 to 4 stages, CoolPWM or
CoolingFloating
1 to 4 stages, CoolPWM,
CoolPWMRev, CoolAO,
CoolAORev, or CoolingFloating.
Economizer
EconNone or EconFloating
EconNone, EconPWM, or
EconFloating
EconNone, EconPWM,
EconPWMRev, EconAO,
EconAORev or EconFloating.
Optional Points OccStatus, AuxEcon, Free1, Free2, OccStatus, AuxEcon, Free1, Free2, OccStatus, AuxEcon, Free1,
Free1PulseOn, Free1PulseOff.
Free1PulseOn, Free1PulseOff.
Free1Rev, Free2, Free2Rev
Free1PulseOn, Free1PulseOff,
Free1AO, Free1AORev, Free2AO,
Free2AORev.
Maximum of one optional point.
Maximum of three optional points.
No optional points available.
NOTE: The optional points Free1AO, Free2AO,
Free1AORev, Free2AORev are available in the
W7750C Model of CVAHU only. These enumerations
must be selected to use terminals 6,7 and 8 of
W7750C model. These outputs can be driven by
XL15A or XL15C, but since Free1 and Free2 are
digital in nature, XL15A and XL15C can only
command these points to ON or OFF. Hence, these
points can be driven only by digital outputs of Xl15A/
Xl15C loops.
Table 17. CVAHU Outputs Fields. (Continued)
Name
Heating
Definition
Refer to table above for selecting Heating
options:
•
If you select Floating, enter the Motor
Speed settings.
•
If you select PWM, enter the PWM
settings.
Cooling
Refer to the table above for selecting
Cooling settings:
CVAHU Outputs fields
•
If you select Floating, enter the Motor
Speed settings.
If you select PWM, enter the PWM
settings.
Table 17 lists the CVAHU Outputs fields.
•
Table 17. CVAHU Outputs Fields.
Economizer
Refer to the table above for selecting
Economizer options:
Name
Definition
Controller Type
Select one of the following model types:
•
If you select Floating, enter the Motor
Speed settings.
•
•
•
W7750A
W7750B
W7750C
•
If you select PWM, enter the PWM
settings.
The wizard does not allow commissioning
if incorrect Model Type is selected
Power Frequency Select one of the following options:
•
•
50 Hz
60 Hz
Equipment Type Select one of the following options:
•
•
Conventional
HeatPump
45
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 17. CVAHU Outputs Fields. (Continued)
CVAHU Inputs
Name
Definition
Motor Speed
You can configure three Motor Speed
settings:
Description
To select the wall module type, voltage and resistive inputs for
a CVAHU application.
•
•
•
Heating
Cooling
Economizer
Purpose
Enter all inputs to be wired to the CVAHU.
If you select HeatingFloating for
configuring Heating settings, Motor speed
for heating is enabled.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Similarly, if you select CoolingFloating or
Econfloating for cooling and economizer
respectively, Motor Speed for Cooling and
Economizer is enabled.
Procedure
1. Click the Inputs button on the left pane to open the
Input Configuration page.
PWM Settings
PWM settings are enabled if heating,
cooling, or Economizer is configured as
PWM.
It consists of Zero Scale, Full Scale, and
Period values to control PWM output type.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Select Space Temp sensor type.
4. Select the optional Digital and Analog Inputs.
5. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
6. Click Next to display the Equipment Control
Configuration page or Back to display the Output
Configuration page.
Optional Points available for the XL10 CVAHU
NOTE: When selecting one of the following, the wizard
assigns a digital output I/O terminal to the function.
CVAHU Inputs fields
Table 19 lists the CVAHU Inputs fields.
XL10 CVAHU Optional Points fields
Table 18 lists the Optional Points available for the XL10
CVAHU.
Table 19. CVAHU Inputs Fields.
Name
Definition
Table 18. Optional Points for XL10 CVAHU.
Space Temp
Space Temp sensor type. Select one of
the following options:
Wall Module
LCD Wall Module (physical sensor)
Network Only (network sensor signal)
Note: The LCD wall module is supported
by the following versions of CVAHU:
CVAHU Model A- v1.02.14
Name
Definition
Occupancy_Status Energized if the controller is currently in
Occupied mode.
Free1
Network controller digital output. Follows
the input signal nviFree1. Turns on when
nviFree1 is on.
CVAHU Model C – v2.01.103
Free2
Network controller digital output. Follows
the input signal nviFree2. Turns on when
nviFree2 is on
Wall Module
You cannot modify this option as it is
read-only. Wall Module supports the
following types:
Free1_Pulse_On Momentary digital output (1 Sec.).
Typically used for controlling lighting
systems. This output turns the lights on.
Uses nviFree1
•
•
•
•
Sensor Only
Sensor Setpoint
Sensor Bypass
Sensor Setpoint Bypass
Free1_Pulse_Off Momentary digital output (1 Sec.).
Typically used for controlling lighting
systems. This output turns the lights off.
Uses nviFree1.
See the table below for further details.
Unused_Out
Aux_Econ
No digital output assigned.
Tracks occupancy (On for OCC, OFF for
UNOCC). Emulates the T7300's internal
economizer output signal for controlling
external economizer packages.
95-7769—01
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 19. CVAHU Inputs Fields. (Continued)
Table 19. CVAHU Inputs Fields. (Continued)
Name
Definition
Name
Definition
Optional Digital
Inputs
You can configure digital inputs. The
W7750A can be configured with a
maximum of two digital inputs. The
W7750B, W7750B Enhanced, and the
W7750C, can be configured with all four
digital inputs. CoilfreezeStat is available
on W7750C only.
Optional Analog
Inputs
You can configure both resistive and
voltage type analog inputs. The W7750A,
has one resistive analog input that can
be configured. The W7750B, W7750B
Enhanced, and W7750C have two
resistive and two voltage inputs that can
be configured. The W7750C supports the
OutdoorTemp20KNTC sensor type.
Configure one of the following as an
optional digital point:
Configure one of the following as a
Resistive optional analog point:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OccSensor
OccTimeclock
ProofAirFlow
EconEnable
IaqOverride
SmokeMonitor
DirtyFilter
Shutdown
WindowOpen
MonitorSw
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DschgTempPT3000
OutdoorTempPT3000
RtnTempPT3000
DschgTemp20KNTC
OutdoorTemp20KNTC
RtnTemp20KNTC
Unused RAI
Configure one of the following as a
Voltage/current optional analog point:
ScheduleMaster
Dehumidify
Unused DI
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rtn HumidityC7600C
RtnEnthalpy
OdHumidityC7600C
OdEnthalpy
FilterPress
SpaceCO2
MonitorSensor
Rtn HumidityH7621
Rtn HumidityC7600B
OdHumidityH7621
OdHumidityC7600B
Unused VAI
The RtnHumidityH7621/31 and
OdHumidityH7621/31 humidity sensors
for voltage inputs are supported by
CVAHUs of model type CVAHU C whose
versions are 2.01.103 and above.
The other humidity sensor models H7620
and H7630 work fine when CVAHU is
configured to use the existing C7600C
humidity sensors.
The DischTemp20KNTC sensor can be
used to report valid temperatures up to
180 °F. This is applicable CVAHU C
models whose versions are 2.01.103 and
above. This is applicable to CVAHU
Model A also whose version is 2.01.13
and above.
The wall module configuration affects the Use Wall Module
(under the Zone Option page) and Over Ride Priority (under
the Miscellaneous Parameters page). The possible values
of Use Wall Module and Override Priority is given in Table 20:
47
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 21. CVAHU Equipment Control Fields. (Continued)
Name Definition
Table 20. Use Wall Module vs. Override Priority.
Use Override
Priority
in
Cascade Control Configure cascade control. Default is No.
Use Wall
Module as
Yes is available only if both a Discharge
Air Temperature sensor and modulating
heating or cooling are configured.
Setpoint in Miscellaneous
Zone Option
page
Parameter
page
Sensor
Meaning
C.O.R. Fail Mode Changeover Relay (For Heat Pump only)
fail mode: Heating or Cooling.
Sensor No
only
None
Use Wall Module
as Sensor only
Sensor Yes
Setpoint
None
Use Wall module
as Sensor as well
as get set point.
This option determines which mode
(Heating or Cooling) is activated on
power failure to the C.O.R. This item is
available only if HeatPump was selected
on the Output page.
Sensor No
Bypass
Normal
Bypass
Use Wall module
as Sensor as well
as for bypass.
Fan Control
You can select one of the following fan
control options:
Sensor Yes
Setpoint
Bypass
Normal
Bypass
Use the Wall
•
Auto - Auto cycles the fan with call for
cooling (and heating if Fan Heating is
On).
module as the
Sensor source for
temperature
setpoint as well
as input to bypass
scheduled
•
Continuous - Indicates that the fan
runs continuously in the Occupied
mode, and intermittently (with call for
heating/cooling) in the Unoccupied
mode.
occupancy state
Fan-Heating
Select one of the following options:
CVAHU Equipment Control
•
•
On
Off - Select Off to allow for control
circuits where, when in heat mode, the
fan is directly controlled by an
interlock control circuit (not part of the
Excel 10 controller) which brings on
the fan once the plenum temperature
has risen above its setpoint. This
option is typically used in roof top air
handlers with gas-fired heating.
Description
Sensor type, Cascade control options, COR Mode, Fan, and
Smoke control options.
Purpose
Define equipment control settings.
Smoke Control
This value determines what the controller
does when a smoke alarm occurs (either
from the digital input, or via the
LONWORKS network). Select one of the
following options:
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Procedure
•
•
•
FanOffDmperClose
FanOnDmperOpen
FanOnDmperClosed
1. Click the Equipment Control button on the left pane to
open the Equipment Control Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Fan Fail Time
Enabled when Air Flow switch is
selected.
4. Click Next to display the Economizer Parameters
Configuration page or Back to display the Input
Configuration page.
This value sets the amount of time that
must pass after fan start-up before the Air
Flow Switch is checked. This action
allows the fan to come up to speed and
prevents false air flow failure alarms.
CVAHU Equipment Control fields
Table 21 lists the CVAHU Equipment Control fields.
Filter Pressure
Stpt
Filter Pressure Setpoint. Enabled if
analog Filter Pressure sensor is selected.
Table 21. CVAHU Equipment Control Fields.
If the measured pressure exceeds this
setpoint, the Dirty Filter alarm is issued.
There is a built-in hysteresis of 25
percent of the Filter Press Stpt value (for
the Dirty Filter alarm to return to normal).
Name
Definition
Main Sensor
Set sensor type, if any, to Space
Temperature or Return Air Temperature.
Return Air option is available only if a
Return Air sensor is configured on the
CVAHU Controller Inputs page.
95-7769—01
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 22. CVAHU Economizer Fields. (Continued)
CVAHU Economizer
Name
Definition
Purpose
IAQ Position
Minimum Position of Damper used when
poor Indoor Air Quality conditions exist
(IAQ sensor > IAQ Setpoint, or if Digital
IAQ Switch is on). Select a value from 0
to 100 percent.
Define the four settings for using an economizer in a CVAHU
application.
Mode
Use Heat for IAQ Enable or disable heat.
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
•
Yes enables heat when damper is
open for IAQ purposes.
No disables heat if controller is in Cool
mode.
•
Procedure
1. Click the Economizer button on the left pane to open
the Economizer Configuration page.
NOTE: A discharge low temperature
condition overrides this setting
and closes the dampers to
prevent equipment damage due
to freezing.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Select the Enable Type for the economizer.
4. Use the Min Position field to select a Minimum Position
for the Outdoor damper.
5. Use the IAQ Position field to select a minimum damper
position for poor Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) conditions.
6. Use the Use Heat for IAQ field to choose whether or not
to use heat during poor Indoor Air Quality conditions.
7. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Enable Setpoint
Defines the setpoint value for enabling
the economizer.
OA Temp High
Limit
Defines the high limit for the outside
temperature.
CVAHU HC Stages
8. Click Next to display the Heat-Cool Stages
Configuration page or Back to display the Equipment
Control Configuration page.
Description
The minimum on/off times, Cycles/ hour, Minimum and
maximum recovery ramps are set for heating and cooling
stages of a CVAHU application.
CVAHU Economizer fields
Table 22 lists the CVAHU Economizer fields.
Table 22. CVAHU Economizer Fields.
Purpose
Name
Definition
Define heating and cooling (h/c) stage parameters, including
minimum on and off times.
Enable Type
Source of the economizer enable
decision for determining when to use
outdoor air for cooling. The list of
available selections is:
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NoLocalEconSensor
OutdoorTemp
DiffTemp
OdEnthTypeA
OdEnthTypeB
OdEnthTypeC
OdEnthTypeD
SingleEnthalpy
DiffEnthalpy
Procedure
1. Click the H/C Stages button on the left pane to open the
Heat-Cool Stages Configuration page.
2. Select MinHeatOn/Off for Heating and MinCoolOn/Off
for Cooling.
3. Enter information into available fields.
4. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
5. Click Next to display the Zone Options Configuration
page or Back to display the Economizer Parameters
Configuration page.
Digital
The W7750A will have the following
options only:
•
•
•
NoLocalEconSensor
OutdoorTemp
Digital
Min. Position
Minimum position of the Outdoor Damper
(0 to 100 percent). Under normal
Occupied-mode operation, the dampers
are not closed below this setting.
If Unoccupied, or if a Discharge Low
Temperature condition exists, the
dampers are closed below this setting.
49
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
CVAHU HC Stages fields
Table 23 lists the CVAHU HC Stages fields.
CVAHU Zone Options
Purpose
Table 23. CVAHU HC Stages Fields.
Configure CVAHU Controller zone options such as cooling
and heating setpoints (temperature settings).
Name
Definition
Minimum On/Off
MinHeatOn enables minimum on/off
time. MinHeatOff replaces set minimum
on/off times with a 30-second default.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
MinCoolOn enables minimum on/off time.
MinCoolOff replaces set minimum on/off
times with a 30-second default.
Procedure
1. Click the Zone Options button on the left pane to open
the Zone Options Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Miscellaneous Configuration
page or Back to display the Heat-Cool Stages
Configuration page.
Cycles/Hour
OAT Lockout
Cycles per hour (cph). Enter a value from
2 through 12. For example, cph for
conventional heating stage one is
normally 3 cph. Consult your hardware
installation guide for recommended
values.
Outside Air (OA) temperature lockout.
OA temperature values below the
Cooling lockout setting disables the
cooling stages. OA temperature values
above the heating lockout setting disable
the heating stages.
CVAHU Zone Options fields
Table 24 lists the CVAHU Zone Option fields.
Table 24. CVAHU Zone Options Fields.
Min. Recov. Ramp Minimum recovery ramp (degrees per
hour). Enter a value from 2 through 20 for
cooling; 3 through 20 for heating. See
Name
Definition
Cooling Occupied Temperature range is 50 to 90 ºF
Excel 10 System Engineering manual,
(form 74-2958) at for a discussion of the
recovery ramp feature of the CVAHU.
Setpoint
(10 to 32 ºC). Thermostat reaches this
temperature during Occupied times while
in the cooling mode.
•
This literature is available on
customer.honeywell.com. Try the
following link:
Cooling Standby
Setpoint
Temperature range is 50 to 90 ºF
(10 to 32 ºC). Thermostat reaches this
temperature during Standby times while
in the cooling mode.
http://customer.honeywell.com/
request.cfm?form=74-2958
Min. Recov. Ramp Minimum recovery Oa (outside air)
Cooling
Unoccupied
Setpoint
Temperature range is 50 to 90 ºF
(10 to 32 ºC). Thermostat reaches this
temperature during Unoccupied times
while in the cooling mode.
Oa Temp
temperature. Enter value from 0 through
100 for cooling or heating. See Excel 10
System Engineering manual for a
discussion of the CVAHUs recovery ramp
feature.
Heating Occupied Temperature range is 50 to 90 ºF
Setpoint
(10 to 32 ºC). Thermostat reaches this
temperature during Occupied times while
in the heating mode.
Max. Recov. Temp Maximum recovery ramp (degrees per
hour). Enter a value from 6 through 20 for
cooling; 8 through 20 for heating. See
Excel 10 System Engineering manual for
a discussion of the recovery ramp feature
of the CVAHU.
Heating Standby Temperature range is 50 to 90 ºF
Setpoint
(10 to 32 ºC). Thermostat reaches this
temperature during Standby times while
in the heating mode.
Max. Recov. Oa
Temp
Maximum recovery Oa (outside air)
temperature. Enter value from 0 through
100 for cooling or heating. See Excel 10
System Engineering manual for a
discussion of the recovery ramp feature
of the CVAHU.
Heating
Unoccupied
Setpoint
Temperature range is 50 to 90 ºF
(10 to 32 ºC). Thermostat reaches this
temperature during Unoccupied times
while in the heating mode.
Min. Limit Setpoint Provides a lower limit on the allowed
settings of the setpoint knob of the Wall
Module. Enabled if Wall Module Setpoint
is configured (Input Configuration page).
Values range from -9 to 9, (Setpoint
default set to OFFSET) or from 50 to 90
(Setpoint default set to
Fan Run On Time Enter an amount of time (from 0 to 120
seconds) the fan will continue to run after
the last stage of heating or cooling has
switched off. This value is only applicable
during Unoccupied times, and during
Occupied times if the Fan Control field is
set to AutoFan.
ABSOLUTE_MIDDLE).
95-7769—01
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 24. CVAHU Zone Options Fields. (Continued)
Table 25. CVAHU Miscellaneous Fields. (Continued)
Name
Max. Limit
Setpoint
Definition
Name
Definition
Provides an upper limit on the allowed
settings of the setpoint knob of the Wall
Module. Enabled if Wall Module Setpoint
is configured (Input tab). Values range
from -9 to 9, (Setpoint default set to
OFFSET) or from 50 to 90 (Setpoint
default set to ABSOLUTE_MIDDLE).
Use Wall Module Select one of the following options:
•
•
Yes
No
If set to Yes, the wall module setpoints
are used by the controller and those set
in the configuration are ignored.
If set to No, the setpoint values set in the
configuration are used.
CVAHU Miscellaneous
Override Type
Specify the type of Bypass override
functions that are available from the Wall
Module’s Override push button. Select
one of the following options:
Purpose
Define additional CVAHU Controller parameters, such as DLC
setpoint bump.
•
None (no Bypass configured for wall
module)
Normal
Bypass (no Continuous Unoccupied
allowed from the push button)
Mode
•
•
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Override Priority
Set the priority scheme for the Bypass
override function. Options are:
Procedure
•
LastWins - Last received input takes
precedence. It can be either the
Bypass button or the Network signal.
NetManOccWins - The Network signal
always takes precedence over the
Bypass button.
1. Click the Miscellaneous button on the left pane to open
the Miscellaneous Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
•
4. Click Next to display the PID Configuration page or
Back to display the Zone Options Configuration
page.
NOTE: This field is available only if
Override Type is Normal or
Bypass Only.
CVAHU Miscellaneous fields
Bypass Time
Set the time period for a bypass override
event. Values range from 0 through 1080
minutes. Enabled if Override Type is
Normal or Bypass Only
Table 25 lists the CVAHU Miscellaneous fields.
Table 25. CVAHU Miscellaneous Fields.
Name
Definition
Max. DaTemp
Setpoint
Values range from 65 to 135 ºF
(18.33 to 57.22 ºC). Enabled if a
discharge air temperature sensor is
selected.
IAQ CO2 Setpoint Setting above which the Indoor Air
Quality (IAQ) is deemed to be poor, and
the controller enters the IAQ override
mode. Values range from 0 to 2000 PPM
(Enabled when SpaceCo2 sensor is
selected).
Min. DaTemp
Setpoint
Values range from 0 to 60 ºF
(-17.78 to 15.56 ºC). Enabled if a
discharge air temperature sensor is
selected.
DLC Setpoint
Bump
Upon receipt of a DLC_Shed signal over
the LONWORKS network, the current
operating setpoint value is bumped up/
down (for cool/heat modes) by this
amount. Values range from 0 to 10 DDF
(0 to 5.56 DDK).
Setpoint Knob
Type
Relative - (plus or minus up to 9 DDF (5
DDK) from the current actual setpoint set
on the Zone Options tab).
Absolute Middle - (the knob of the Wall
Module sets the midpoint between the
heat and cool current actual setpoints)
51
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
discharge sensors or wiring are in noisy environments and the
value reported to the controller is not stable (such that it
bounces). The Control Band is used only in modulating
control, and has no purpose when staged control is
configured.
CVAHU PID
Purpose
Adjust PID (Proportional Integral Derivative) control
parameters for the CVAHU.
CVAHU PID fields
Mode
Table 26 lists the CVAHU PID fields.
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Table 26. CVAHU PID Fields.
Name
Cooling
Proportional Gain (1.1 to 16.7 DDK).
Definition
Enter the range in degrees 2 to 30 DDF
CAUTION
Can cause short cycling of compressors or wide
swings in space temperature and excessive
overdriving of modulating outputs.
Equipment Damage Possible.
Cooling
Integral Gain
Enter the range in seconds (0 to 5,000).
Cooling
Derivative Time
Enter the range in seconds (0 to 9,000).
Enter the range in degrees 2 to 30 DDF
If large or frequent change to PID control parameters
is made, it is possible to cause equipment problems
such as short cycling compressors (if the stage
minimum run times were disabled). Other problems
that can occur include wide swings in space
temperature and excessive overdriving of modulating
outputs.
Heating
Proportional Gain (1.1 to 16.7 DDK).
Heating
Integral Gain
Enter the range in seconds (0 to 5,000).
Heating
Derivative Gain
Enter the range in seconds (0 to 9,000).
DA Heating
Control Band
Enter the range in degrees 5 to 30 DDF
(2.8 to 16.7 DDK).
The default values provide proper control for most
applications. If the PID parameters require adjustment away
from these values, use caution to ensure that equipment
problems do not arise. If any change to PID control
parameters is made, the adjustments should be gradual. After
each change, allow the system to stabilize so the effects are
accurately observed. Make further refinements as needed
until the system is operating as desired.
DA Cooling
Control Band
Enter the range in degrees 5 to 30 DDF
(2.8 to 16.7 DDK)
Econ
Control Band
Enter the range in degrees 5 to 30 DDF
(2.8 to 16.7 DDK).
NOTE: Throttling Range or Proportional Gain determines
what impact the error has on the output signal.
Decreasing the Throttling Range amplifies the effect
on the error, that is, for a given error (the difference
between the measured space temperature and the
current actual space temperature setpoint), a small
Throttling Range causes a higher output signal
value.
If the default values are changed and you want to reset them,
add a second CVAHU Controller to the subnet, record then re-
enter the default PID values to the first CVAHU.
Procedure
1. Click the PID button on the left pane to open the PID
Configuration page.
Integral Time
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Custom Wiring page or Back
to display the Miscellaneous Parameters
Configuration page.
Determines what impact the error-over-time has on the output
signal. Error-over-time has two components that make up its
value: the amount of time the error exists and the size of the
error. The higher the integral time, the slower the control
response. In other words, a decrease in Integral Time causes
a more rapid response in the output signal.
Derivative Time or Gain
CAUTION
Determines what impact the error rate has on the output
signal. The error rate is how fast the error value is changing. It
can also be the direction space temperature is going, either
towards or away from the setpoint and its speed - quickly or
slowly. A decrease in Derivative Time causes a given error
rate to have a larger effect on the output signal.
Equipment Damage Possible.
Setting Control Band too low may cause large over or
undershooting of setpoint.
The smaller the Control Band, the more responsive the control
output. Be careful not to set the Control Band (heating,
cooling, or econ) too low. This can happen if the space or
95-7769—01
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
CVAHU Custom Wiring
CVAHU Wiring Diagram
Configuring CVAHU Custom Wiring
Use the CVAHU Custom Wiring page to assign configured
Purpose
Display the wiring diagram for the controller.
outputs to physical pins.
Mode
Purpose
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
View or modify sensor output wiring locations.
Mode
Procedure
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
1. Click the Wiring Diagram button on the left pane to
open the Wiring Diagram Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Back to display the PID Configuration page.
Limits
Outputs must be configured using the Unit Ventilator
Controller Outputs page.
CVAHU Wiring Terminals
Table 28 lists the CVAHU Wiring terminals.
Table 28. CVAHU Wiring Terminals.
Procedure
1. Click the Wiring Assignment button on the left pane to
open the Wiring Assignment page.
Terminal
Connected To
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Earth Ground
LED
2. For Custom Assignment, select Custom from the
Output Assignment field. The Custom Assignment fields
become editable.
3. Enter information into available fields.
4. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Bypass
Sensor
AI Ground
Set Point
AI-1 Ohm
AI Ground
DI-1
5. Click Next to display the Wiring Diagram page or Back
to display the PID Configuration page.
CVAHU Custom Wiring fields
Table 27 lists the CVAHU Custom Wiring fields and definitions.
10 and 11
12
DI Ground
DI-2
Table 27. CVAHU Custom Wiring Fields.
13
Not used
14 and 15
LONWORKS Bus
Name
Default
Definition
16 through 20 Not used
This column displays the default assignments
Assignment as the outputs are configured in the Outputs
page.
21
Vac Com
Vac
22
Custom
Custom assignment is used to change the
23
Rh
Assignment assignments.
24
Rc
Existing If the device is online, this shows the
a
assignments as in the device. Else, it shows
from the database.
25 and 26
Network (DO1)
G (DO2)
27
28
29
30
31
Y2 (DO3)
W2 (DO4)
W1 (DO5)
Not used (DO6)
a
DO = Digital Output
NOTE: Fields appearing grayed out indicate those fields that
change based on the Controller Type selected on the
Outputs Configuration page.
53
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Supported Output Types
Table 30 lists the supported output types for the FCU
Controller.
Configuring Fan Coil Unit
Controllers (FCU)
Table 30. FCU Controller Output Types.
Description
The W7752 D, E, F, and G Controllers are communicating
mains-powered Fan Coil Unit Controllers in the Excel 10
product line. They cover a wide range of fan coil control
applications. The controllers can operate as stand-alone units
or networked using the standard Echelon LONWORKS bus.
Interfaces are provided for a wide range of actuator types.
Heating systems can be water or electric, and cooling
systems can be chilled water supply or compressors.
Extensive timing and interlock features make the W7752
especially suitable for systems using electric heat and
compressors.
Output
Heating
Options
Floating, thermal, PWM, on/off, multi-
stage electric
Cooling
Floating, thermal, PWM, on/off, multi-
stage compressor
Fan
On/Off, 2-speed, 3-speed
On/Off
Electric Reheat
Navigating to FCU Pages
Go to the Devices tab. Expand the list of devices on the left
pane (listed under WebVision). Select a device to view its
properties.
Features
•
•
LonMark HVAC profile 8020.
Stand-alone operation or on high speed 78 kilobit LON
network.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Uses Echelon LonTalk protocol.
Direct connection of thermal actuators.
Direct connection to fan switch.
Sequences
Heat and cool sequences can be selected to be active or not
active, giving a total of eight different sequence options (each
can be with or without fan control):
Direct connection to electric heat.
Factory-configured default parameters.
Wide range of supported valves and actuators.
Interlocks and time delays to protect equipment.
Slim design fits into narrow fan coil units.
Terminations all on one side allow controller to be
positioned at back of fan coil unit.
•
•
•
•
•
Heat only
Cool only
Heat/cool changeover
Heat and cool sequence
All the above with electric reheat
•
Power supplied by power mains.
Modes of Operation
FCU Controller Models
Table 29 lists the FCU Controller models.
The controller has the following modes of operation:
•
Occupied mode
This is the normal operating condition for a room or zone
when it is occupied. The controller can be switched into
this mode by a network command, by the room occupancy
sensor, or by a bypass button on the wall module. In the
occupied mode the fan is controlled by the setting of the
fan speed switch on the wall module or by the control algo-
rithm when the switch is set to auto. The fan can be
configured to remain on or turn off during the zero energy
band.
Table 29. FCU Controller Models.
OS Number
W7752D2xxx
W7752E2xxx
W7752F2xxx
W7752G2xxx
Power Input
230 Vac
Reheat Delay
YES
230 Vac
115 Vac
115 Vac
NO
YES
NO
•
Standby mode
The standby mode saves energy by reducing heating or
cooling demand during periods where the room is tempo-
rarily unoccupied. In this mode the fan is switched off
during the zero energy band.
The W7752D,E,F and G are LonMark compliant Fan Coil Unit
Controllers in the Excel 10 family product line. These
controllers provide room temperature control for two and four
pipe fan coil units with optional electric heating coils
W7752D,F) and can control single, two or three speed fans.
The controller is provided with default configuration settings
from the factory and is fully operable on installation. Using
standard Echelon configuration tools, the controller can be
configured with job-specific settings. A variety of optional wall
modules interface with the FCU controllers and provide any or
all of the following: setpoint adjustment, fan speed
•
•
Unoccupied mode
This mode is used for longer unoccupied periods, such as
at night or during weekends and holidays.
Window open
The controller is configured for window open detection, the
controller automatically disables heat and cool control until
the window is closed again. Frost protection remains
active.
adjustment, and occupancy bypass button. All wall modules
include a space temperature sensor, however a remote
C7068A return air sensor can also be used.
•
Frost protection
If the temperature drops below 46 °F (8 °C), the controller
enables the heating circuit as frost protection.
95-7769—01
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
•
•
Fan fail
FCU Outputs
When configured with an air flow detector, the controller
protects equipment by disabling the system when the fan
fails
Description
FCU applications can have a variable number of heating and
cooling stages. The number of pipes used on the unit could be
two or four. The outputs could be of staged, PWM, floating, or
Thermal type. In addition the outputs can be of Change over
mode.
Changeover
The controller operates two-pipe FCUs configured with a
changeover input.
FCU Input/Output Specifications
Table 31 lists the FCU Input/Output specifications.
Purpose
Define the operation of the controller outputs and the type of
fan coil unit to be controlled.
Table 31. FCU Input/Output Specifications.
Input/Output
Inputs
Function
Characteristic
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Digital
Window/
Closed ≤ 400 ohm,
open ≥ 10K ohm
occupancy/
changeover/air
flow
Procedure
1. Click the Outputs button on the left pane to open the
Output Configuration page.
Analog/Digital
(Wall Module
connection only)
Fan speed/
Override
Resistor Network
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Analog
Temperature
Sensor
20K ohm NTC
10k Ohm
4. Click Next to display the Input Configuration page.
Analog
Setpoint
(Wall Module
connection only)
adjustment
FCU Outputs fields
Table 32 on page 56 lists the FCU Outputs fields and
definitions.
Outputs
Digital
(Wall Module
connection only)
Override LED
Heat and cool
0/5 Vdc
Triac (2 pairs)
(See Table 30 for
options)
24 Vac, 250 mA
max. continuous,
650 mA max. surge
(≤30 sec)
Relay (3)
Fan Switching
20 to 253 Vac, 3A
max.
High Power relay Electric heat
(W7725D, F only) (resistive load)
20 to 300 Vac, 10A
max., 6A max.
55
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 32. FCU Outputs - Fields and Definitions.
Definition
Field
Types
FCU
Select the hardware version to be used for the controller. The different hardware versions have
different combinations of inputs and outputs. See the inset table below. The type of hardware you
select affects the choices that appear in the rest of the pages for FCU. Based on your hardware
selection, the configuration software ensures that you cannot configure a controller for an
application it cannot perform.
Selection in
Tool
Controller
Type
Number of Relays for:
Number of
Outputs
Number of
Digital Inputs Transceiver
LON
Fan
Reheat
W7752D_F
W7752D
W7752F
3
1
2
2
1
W7752E_G_J W7752E
W7752G
FTT-10
3
0
1
W7752J
System
Define the type of fan coil unit that is being configured. It describes the number of pipes used on
the unit.
Two Pipe
A fan coil unit that has only two pipes. This system type limits the controller to control only one
valve output and operate in a changeover mode. When operating in the changeover mode, the
controller uses only the one valve for controlling both heating and cooling. Use this configuration
only when changeover operation is required.
Four Pipe
A fan coil unit that has four pipes connected, providing both heating and cooling at the same time.
The fan coil controller uses one output to control heating only and one output to control cooling
only, as configured in the control outputs (Equipment Control page).
Relay
Fan
Select the number of stages required for the fan output.
Outputs
Relay 4
Select the use of the fourth relay for those controller types with four relays. This relay is normally
used for electric reheat, but can also be used for switching equipment not directly controlled by the
fan coil controller.
Reheat
The relay is switched on when the control algorithm demands electrical reheat as defined in the
Reheat Options (Equipment Control tab).
Free Use
The relay is switched on and off as commanded from the network. It is not controlled by the
internal fan coil controller temperature control algorithm.
Rel Not Used The Relay is not switched by the fan coil controller and cannot be commanded via the network.
95-7769—01
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 32. FCU Outputs - Fields and Definitions. (Continued)
Definition
Field
Control
Outputs
Configures the two control outputs for the different type of actuators and control sequences required for the
application.
Output 1 -
Mode
The output triac pair connected to terminals 13, 14, and 15 of the controller.
Select the control sequence option for Output 1. For four-pipe applications, the heating option is
recommended to minimize field wiring errors. For two-pipe applications, the changeover option is
the only selection.
Heat Mode
Cool Mode
The output is modulated open when heat energy is needed in the space.
The output is modulated open when cool energy is needed in the space
ChangeOver The output is modulated open when heat or cool energy is needed in the space.
Mode
Not Used
The output is not controlled by the controller and always remains off.
Select the type of actuator to be connected to the output.
Output 1 -
Type
Floating
A three-point actuator that can be commanded open or closed. This type is on Terminals 14/15
and/or 17/18. The run times for the actuator are configured in the Equipment Control tab.
Floating Mid A three point actuator that can be commanded open or closed on terminals 14/15 and/or 17/18.
The run-times for the actuator are configured in the Outputs tab. The Zero Energy Position (no
Heat and no Cool) is the middle Position (50%). The Cool Range is 0 to 50%; the Heat Range, 50
to 100%. The Range can be reversed by selecting the Actuator Direct or Reverse Option. During
the Synchronization Process, the fan is turned off.
PWM
Duty-cycled output where the 24VAC output is pulsed on/off in the duty cycle range: 0 percent to
100 percent. This type drives output Terminal 14 and/or 17.
One Stage
Two Stage
Single-stage on/off output. This type switches Terminals 14 and/or 17.
Two-stage on/off output. This type switches Terminal 14/17 for stage 1 and Terminal 15/18 for
stage 2.
Three Stage Three-stage switched output. The output switches Terminal 14/17 for stage 1 and Terminal 15/18
for stage 2. It switches both Terminals 14/15 and/or 17/18 for stage 3.
Thermal
Switched on/off output. This type switches a 24V thermal actuator on Terminal 14/17.
Output 2 -
Mode
The output triac pair connected to terminals 16, 17, and 18 of the controller.
Select the control sequence option for Output 2. For four-pipe applications, the Cool Mode option
is recommended to minimize field wiring errors. For two-pipe applications, the ChangeOver Mode
option is the only selection.
Output 2 -
Type
The selection options are the same as for Output 1.
Procedure
FCU Inputs
1. Click the Inputs button on the left pane to open the
Input Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields (see Table 33 on
Purpose
To configure the wall module parameters and input points for a
FCU controller.
page 58).
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Mode
4. Click Next to display the Equipment Control
Configuration page or Back to display the Output
Configuration page.
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
57
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
FCU Inputs fields
Table 33 lists the FCU Inputs fields and definitions.
Table 33. FCU Inputs Fields.
Definition
Name
Wall
Configures the functionality of the connected wall module. Always ensure that the features configured here are the
Module same as the features available on the wall module device to be connected.
Space
Temp
Sensor
Specify whether or not the controller is to be used with a space temperature sensor connected to its input. A
space temperature sensor is typically used, but in cases where the space temperature is supplied from
another device via the network, the local space temperature sensor input is not used.
YES
The local space temperature sensor input is used. Ensure that a space temperature sensor is actually
connected otherwise the controller measures incorrect values.
NO
The local space temperature sensor is not used. This option must be selected when a sensor is not
connected.
LED/LCD This configuration defines whether a Wall Module with LED or a Wall Module with LCD Display is connected.
Display For the LED there is shown either the Override Status or the Effective Occupancy Status. The LCD Display
show both the Effective and the Override Status, and an additional Off Condition.
The Override Status results from the Scheduler, the Network Override, the Override Button and the
Occupancy Sensor. The Off Condition results from the Fanspeed Switch, the Window Contact and the
Medium from nviApplicMode.
LED Override
The LED shows the Override from the Override Button or from the Network. On indicates Override Bypass, 1
Flash per Second indicates Override Unoccupied, 2 Flashes per Second indicates Override Standby or
Occupied. 4 Flashes indicates the Controller answers of the Network Management Command Wink.
LED Occupancy
The LED shows the effective Occupancy Mode. On indicates effective Occupied or Bypass, 1 Flash per
Second indicates effective Standby, Off indicates effective Unoccupied. 4 Flashes indicates the Controller
answers of the Network Management Command Wink.
LCD Display
This mode is used only for a Wall Module with LCD Display. The Display has following Symbols to show the
Occupancy Modes: Sun indicates effective Occupied or Bypass, Half Sun indicates effective Standby, Moon
indicates effective Unoccupied. No Symbol and OFF in 7-Segment indicates the Controller is Off. In the Off
Mode, a Snow Flag indicates whether Frost Protection is configured. Blinking Symbols are used to show the
Override: Blinking Sun indicates Override Occupied or Bypass, blinking Half Sun indicates Override Standby,
Blinking Moon indicates override unoccupied. The Controller answers with the Network Management
Command Wink with blinking Sun and Moon.
Override Define how the override button on the connected wall module is to be used.
Button
None
The wall module button is not used for bypass function.
BYPASS UNOCCUPIED
The Bypass button, when pressed, has two different functions depending on the length of time the button is
held down:
•
•
Two seconds puts the controller in Bypass.
Five seconds puts the controller in Unoccupied.
Bypass Only
The Bypass button, when pressed, has the following function:
Two seconds puts the controller in Bypass.
Fan Speed Switch
Define the type of switch used on the Wall module. Note that this setting also controls the maximum speed
setting of the fan. For example, if a three-speed fan is used, but the fan speed switch is set to two-speed, the
fan only operates with two speeds.
Normal
Settings based Switch Function
Setting
Fan speed switch function
The fan speed switch is ignored
Off/Auto/On
Off/Auto/Low/High
Off/Auto/Low/Medium/High
No Fan Switch
Three Position
Four Position
Five Position
95-7769—01
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 33. FCU Inputs Fields. (Continued)
Definition
Name
Wall
Module Knob
(cont.)
Setpoint The setpoint knob is available in different types of scales, and with different setpoint meanings, based on the
country of usage. The temperature engineering unit used (°C or °F) is the setting made in WebVision when
creating the new project. This setting is used for the total project.
NOTE: The setpoint knob only affects the Occupied and Standby Setpoints. The Unoccupied setpoint is not
affected by the setpoint knob.
No Knob
The setpoint knob is ignored. Note that this must be chosen if there is no setpoint knob connected to the
controller. Selecting “NO” prevents the controller from reacting to incorrect setpoint values.
Relative
The setpoint knob is a relative knob, showing only a setpoint shift as (+) and (-) changes to the configured
setpoint.
Absolute Middle
The setpoint knob is an absolute knob, showing the setpoint in absolute degrees. It is used as the space
temperature setpoint midway between the heating and cooling zero energy band.
Setpoint These two fields specify the allowed range of adjustment available from the wall module setpoint knob. It is
Limits
used by the building manager for energy management purposes to balance allowed comfort conditions with
energy usage.
(SETPOINT KNOB = RELATIVE)
When the setpoint knob as been chosen as relative, the setpoint limits define the range of adjustment of the
setpoint knob from the zero point, in (DDC) for °C installations and (DDF) for °F installations.
(SETPOINT KNOB = ABSOLUTE MIDDLE)
When the setpoint knob has been chosen as absolute, the setpoint limits are limits on the absolute range of
the setpoint knob in (Deg.C) for °C installations and (Deg.F) for °F installations.
Digital Input
Points
Specifies usage of the digital input of the controller.
Digital Input 1
Window Closed
Indicates if a window is opened. An open window disables the controller operation. If the contact is closed,
the window is closed.
Window Open
Indicates if a window is opened. An open window disables the controller operation. If the contact is closed,
the window is open.
Occupied Sensor
Indicates if the room is occupied. While unoccupied, the controller switches from the occupied operating
setpoints to the standby operating setpoints. If the contact is closed, the space is occupied.
Unoccupied Sensor
Indicates if the room is unoccupied. While unoccupied, the controller switches from the occupied operating
setpoints to the standby operating setpoints. If the contact is closed, the space is unoccupied.
Air Flow
For monitoring correct fan operation using an air flow switch. When the fan is commanded on, the controller
monitors this input for the fan run-up time. If the fan does not run within 30 seconds, the input indicates that
the fan has failed. Similarly, the input indicates if the fan fails during normal operation. If the contact is closed,
the fan runs.
No Air Flow
For monitoring correct fan operation using an air flow switch. When the fan is commanded on, the controller
monitors this input for the fan run-up time. If the fan does not run within 30 seconds, the input indicates that
the fan has failed. Similarly, the input indicates if the fan fails during normal operation. If the contact is closed,
the fan is not running.
ChangeOver Cool
This selection is for local heat/cool changeover operation for two-pipe units using a switch or local thermostat
switch. When the contact closes, this input indicates that the system can operate in cooling mode. When the
contact opens, this input indicates that the system can operate in heating mode.
Changeover Heat
This selection is for local heat/cool changeover operation for two-pipe units using a switch or local thermostat
switch. When the contact closes, the input indicates that the system can operate in heating mode. When the
contact opens, the input indicates that the system can operate in cooling mode.
59
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 33. FCU Inputs Fields. (Continued)
Definition
Name
Digital Input
Points
(continued)
Movement
This selection is used for movement detector configuration where a closed contact indicates movement.
Movement detector is the same as occupancy sensor, but with an additional Hold Time of 15 minutes. This
adds a delay to the occupancy signal such that the space is considered occupied until 15 minutes has
elapsed since the last movement is detected.
No Movement
This selection is used for movement detector configuration where a closed contact indicates no movement.
Movement detector is the same as occupancy sensor, but with an additional Hold Time of 15 minutes. This
adds a delay to the occupancy signal such that the space is considered occupied until 15 minutes has
elapsed since the last movement is detected.
Not Used
This setting indicates that the digital input is not used. Use this setting if nothing is connected to the controller
to ensure that spurious signals do not cause the controller to operate incorrectly. The status of this digital
input is reported to the network for use as a free digital input if required. It has no effect on the control
algorithm.
Procedure
FCU Equipment Control
1. Click the Equipment Control button on the left pane to
open the Equipment Control Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Purpose
Define the main control features of controller outputs.
Mode
4. Click Next to display the Fan Configuration page or
Back to display the Inputs Configuration page.
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
FCU Equipment Control fields
definitions.
Table 34. FCU Equipment Control Options.
Definitions
Name
Output Defines the operating characteristics of the two valve actuator outputs.
Options
Output 1 / Output 2
Define operation of output 1 and output 2 as configured in the Outputs page. The fields have the same meanings for
both outputs.
Fan Interlock
Normally used to protect electric heating coils controlled by Output 1 or Output 2. Without this protection, heating coils
can overheat. This option can also prevent ice-up or condensation build-up on cooling or compressor coils.
Yes
The fan always turns on for the run-up time before turning on the control output, to ensure air is flowing over the electric
heating coil before turning on the electric coil. The fan continues to run after the electric coil is turned off, for the post-run
time, to ensure the electric coil is cooled down before the fan turns off.
Similarly, for cooling coil condensation protection, the fan re-run and post-run times are observed.
Additionally, if the digital input is configured for fan fail detection, and the fan does not operate within the defined run-up
time, then the control output is not turned on. This action also occurs if the fan fails during normal operation.
No
There is no interlock between fan operation and the control outputs.
Valve Direction
Define the operating direction of the valves for actuator types Floating, PWM, and Thermal.
Direct
To open, the valve is modulated from 0% to 100%.
Reverse
To open, the valve is modulated from 100% to 0%.
95-7769—01
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 34. FCU Equipment Control Options. (Continued)
Definitions
Name
Output Options (continued)
Min Stage Off Time
Define the minimum off-time for control outputs configured for operation as staged outputs. This setting is particularly
useful for heat exchanger operation or compressor units. Each stage of the controlled output stays off for the minimum
period of time before the controller turns it on again. The selectable range is 0 to 600 seconds.
Valve Runtime
This configuration parameter has three different functions depending on the control output type selected in Control
Outputs:
(CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE = FLOATING) The value is the actuator run-time in the range 20 to 600 seconds.
(CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE = PWM) The value is the cycle period of the PWM output in the range 20 to 600
seconds.
(CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE = ONE, TWO OR THREE STAGE) The value is the minimum on-time for each of the
stages, for controlling compressor units.
Reheat Defines the control output level at which the electric reheat relay (relay 4) switches.
Options
Switch Level
Define the control output level at which the electric reheat output switches on. Range 0% to 100%.
Use a setting of 5% where electric heating has priority over a water heating valve, for example, as the first heating
sequence. Or use for electric heating control only.
Use higher settings, for example, 90%, where water heating has priority over electric heating. Or when electric heating
is required during summer/winter changeover periods.
Hysteresis
Define the control output level (Switch level - Hysteresis) at which the Reheat control output switches off.
PWM Allows the full range of the PWM outputs to be configured. Many PWM-controlled devices cannot provide an output of
Options 0% or 100% because a PWM output shows no switching at these percentages. Therefore, most PWM devices have a
minimum duty cycle and a maximum duty cycle between which they operate from zero to full scale. The fields here allow
you to configure the full range of settings. It is possible to swap the Zero and Full range values to achieve reverse
operation for a PWM output.
Zero
PWM % duty cycle for fully closed position.
Full
PWM % duty cycle for fully open position
FCU Fan fields
FCU Fan
Table 35. FCU Fan Field Options.
Definitions
Purpose
Define fan operation.
Name
Fan
Fan Occupancy
General Configure the operation of the fan during occupied
periods.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Auto Mode
The fan is automatically turned on and off
according to heat or cool demand.
Procedure
Continuous Mode
1. Click the Fan button on the left pane to open the Fan
Configuration page.
During the occupied period, the fan continuously
operates at least at the minimum speed. If heat or
cool demand requires a higher speed, the fan
automatically operates to the required speed. This
setting does not affect automatic fan operation
during standby and unoccupied periods.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Switching Levels
Configuration page or Back to display the Equipment
Control Configuration page.
Min On Time
Min Off Time
Fan
Define the pre-run (Fan Run-up Time) and post-
Interlock run (Fan Overrun Time) times for the fan, when
fan interlock has been selected (Equipment
Control page).
61
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 36. FCU Zone Control Options. (Continued)
Name Definitions
FCU Switching Levels
Purpose
Unoccupied
Setpoints during Unoccupied mode. Setpoints
can range from 10 to 35 °C (50 to 95 °F).
To configure fan switching level and staged output switching
levels.
Mode
FCU Miscellaneous
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Purpose
To configure energy management parameters.
Procedure
1. Click the Switching Levels button on the left pane to
open the Switching Levels Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Zone Control Configuration
page or Back to display the Fan Configuration page.
Procedure
1. Click the Miscellaneous button on the left pane to open
the Miscellaneous Parameters Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
FCU Switching Levels fields
Acceptable range for all levels is 0% to 100%. A setting of 0%
means the fan is OFF for this and the following stages.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the PID Configuration page or
Back to display the Zone Control Configuration page.
FCU Zone Control
FCU Miscellaneous fields
Purpose
Table 37. FCU Miscellaneous Field Options.
Configure the heating and cooling setpoints for the Occupied,
Standby and Unoccupied operating modes.
Name
Definitions
Miscellaneous Configures operator bypass and priority
options.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Bypass Time
Define the period of time (0 to 1080 minutes)
in which the controller operates to occupied
setpoints after the local user has pressed the
override button.
Procedure
1. Click the Zone Control button on the left pane to open
the Zone Control Configuration page.
Override Priority
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Miscellaneous Configuration
page or Back to display the Switching Levels
Configuration page.
Allocate priority between local wall module
operations (for example, Bypass) and
commands from the building management
central. Choices are:
Last Wins - Last received input takes
precedence. It can be either the Bypass
button or the Network signal.
Network Wins - The Network signal
always takes precedence over the Bypass
button.
FCU Zone Control fields
Setpoints can range from 10 to 35 °C (50 to 95 °F).
Energy
DLC SetPoint Bump
Table 36. FCU Zone Control Options.
Management For load shedding applications. Define the
temporary setpoint shift to be added to the
setpoint when the controller receives a Load
Shedding command. By raising the setpoint
during cooling operation, or reducing the
setpoint during heating operation, the
controller reduces the amount of heat or cool
energy dissipated as a contribution to load
shed algorithms.
Name
Definitions
Temperature Cooling/Heating
Setpoints
Occupied
Setpoints during Occupied mode. Setpoints
can range from 10 to 35 °C (50 to 95 °F).
Standby
Setpoints during Standby mode. Setpoints can
range from 10 to 35 °C (50 to 95 °F).
•
The parameter can be set in the range 0 to
10 DDC (0 to 18 DDF).
95-7769—01
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 37. FCU Miscellaneous Field Options. (Continued)
Table 38. FCU PID Options. (Continued)
Name Definitions
Thermal
Name
Energy
Definitions
Cool.Rec.Ramp, Heat.Rec.Ramp
Cooling /Heating
Management Define the rate at which the setpoint is reset
Switching
Band/PID
Boost
Boost Temp
(continued)
during changes between occupancy modes
to provide a form of optimum start algorithm.
Sets a boost band for normal PID operation
and when using thermal actuators. The
variables indicate a setpoint-space
temperature deviation outside, which switches
the outputs to full operation This option acts as
a boost function when space temperature
deviates significantly from the desired
setpoint. This option also serves as a
threshold for two-point switching of thermal
actuators.
FCU PID
Purpose
Configure the variables for closed loop control. PID
parameters can be set separately for both heating and cooling
control.
•
The threshold can be set in the range
0 to 10 DDC (7.2 to 180 DDF).
If the threshold is set to 0 DDC, the boost
function is disabled.
Mode
•
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
FCU Wiring Diagram
Procedure
1. Click the PID button on the left pane to open the PID
Configuration page.
Purpose
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Wiring Diagram
Configuration page or Back to display the
Miscellaneous Configuration page.
Display the wiring diagram for the controller.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Procedure
FCU PID fields
1. Click the Wiring button on the left pane to open the
Wiring Configuration page.
Table 38. FCU PID Options.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Name
Definitions
PID
Cooling/Heating
4. Click Back to display the PID Configuration page.
Proportional band
This value is the temperature deviation
between setpoint and space temperature,
which causes the control output to modulate
from 0% to 100% of full range.
FCU Wiring Terminals
DI1 Window / Occupancy / Air Flow / Changeover.
•
Range 2 DDC to 100 DDC (3.6 to 180
DDF) for PID control, respectively;
1.3. to 100 DDC (2.3 to 180 DDF) for P
Control only.
Table 39. FCU Wiring Diagram.
Name
Definitions
Wall Module Use these terminals to connect the Wall
Module:
Reset Time
This value is the integral reset time in the
range 0 to 3200 sec. Setting the Integral
constant to zero disables integral operation.
•
•
•
•
Override LED
Setpoint
Bypass Button
Room Temp Sensor
Derivative Time
This value is the derivative constant in the
range 0 to 3200 sec. Setting the derivative
constant to zero disables derivative operation.
63
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
LON Bus
Configuring Hydronic Controllers
(HYD)
The terminals in Table 40 are used to connect the LON Bus
FTT-10A. The LON terminals are insensitive to polarity,
eliminating wiring errors during installation. Recommended
wire size is level IV 22 AWG nonshielded, twisted pair, solid
conductor wired.
Description
The W7762A and B Controllers are Hydronic Controllers in
the Excel 10 product line. They cover a wide range of control
applications including radiators, induction units, and fan coil
units with manual fan switching, and are suitable for either
wall mounting or unit mounting. The controllers can operate
as stand-alone units or networked using the standard Echelon
LONWORKS bus. Interfaces are provided for a wide range of
actuator types. Heating systems can be water or electric and
cooling systems can be chilled water supply or compressors.
Extensive timing and interlock features make the W7762
especially suitable for systems using electric heat and
compressors.
Table 40. LON Bus Terminal Connections.
Output 1 /
Output 2
Terminal 14/15
14 on = open valve
15 on = close valve
14 = on/off
Terminal 17/18
17 on = open valve
18 on = close valve
17 = on/off
Floating
1-stage
2-stage
15 = not used
18 = not used
14 on = stage 1
17 on = stage 1
14 on + 15 on =
stage 2
17 on + 18 on =
stage 2
Features
3-stage
14 on = stage 1
15 on = stage 2
17 on = stage 1
18 on = stage 2
•
•
LonMark HVAC profile 8020
Stand-alone operation or on high speed 78 kilobit LON
network.
14 on + 15 on =
stage 3
17 on + 18 on =
stage 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Uses Echelon LonTalk protocol.
PWM
14 = PWM
17 = PWM
Direct connection of thermal actuators.
Direct connection to fan switch.
15 = not used
18 = not used
Thermal 14 = Pulse modulated 17 = Pulse modulated
15 = not used 18 = not used
Direct connection to electric heat.
Factory-configured default parameters.
Wide range of supported valves and actuators.
Interlocks and time delays to protect equipment.
Slim design fits into narrow fan coil units.
Output Characteristics: 24 Vac, 250 mA max continuous, 650
mA max surge.
Fan Relays
These terminals are used to connect a Fan.
Characteristics: 20 to 253 Vac, 3 A max.
Terminations all on one side allow controller to be
positioned at back of fan coil unit.
•
Power supplied by power mains.
Power Mains In
Description
POWER SUPPLY
W7752D and W7752E: 230 Vac + 10%, -15%; 50/60Hz
W7752F and W7752G: 115 Vac + 10%, -15%; 50/60 Hz
The W7762A and B are LonMark compliant Hydronic
Controllers in the Excel 10 family product line. These
controllers provide room temperature control using different
heating and cooling sequences. The controller is provided
with default configuration settings from the factory and is fully
operable on installation. Using standard Echelon configuration
tools, the controller can be configured with job specific
settings. TR21 and TR23 wall modules interface with the
Hydronic Controllers and provide the following options:
setpoint adjustment, an occupancy bypass button and LED,
and a LON network access jack. All wall include a space
temperature sensor, however a remote C7068A return air
sensor can also be used.
POWER CONSUMPTION
W7752D and W7752E: 30 VA max
W7752F and W7752G: 30 VA max
Operational temperature
32 to 122 °F (0 to 50 °C)
Reheat Relay
These terminals connect an Electric Reheat.
Characteristics: 20 to 200 Vac, 10 A max.
Table 41. Hydronic Heating and Cooling Options.
Output
Options
Heating Floating, thermal, PWM, on/off, multi-stage electric
Cooling Floating, thermal, PWM, on/off, multi-stage
compressor
95-7769—01
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Heat and cool sequences can be selected to be active or not
active, giving a total of four different sequence options:
Unoccupied mode
This mode is used for longer unoccupied periods, such as at
night or during weekends and holidays.
•
•
•
•
Heat only
Cool only
Heat/cool changeover
Heat and cool sequence
Window open
If the controller is configured for window open detection, the
controller automatically disables heat and cool control until the
window is closed again. Frost protection remains active.
Modes Of Operation
The controller has the following modes of operation.
Frost protection
If the temperature drops below 46 ºF (8 ºC), the controller
enables the heating circuit as frost protection.
Occupied mode
This is the normal operating condition for a room or zone
when it is occupied. The controller can be switched into this
mode by a network command, by the room occupancy sensor,
or by a bypass button on the wall module.
Fan fail
When configured with an air flow detector, the controller
protects equipment by disabling the system when the fan fails
(for fan coil units with manual fan speed control).
Standby mode
The standby mode saves energy by reducing heating or
cooling demand during periods where the room is temporarily
unoccupied.
Changeover
The controller operates two-pipe units configured with a
changeover input.
HYD Inputs/Outputs
Table 42. Hydronic Controller Input and Output Information.
PIN
Inputs
Outputs Description
Function
Number
Characteristics
Inputs
Digital
Window/occupancy/
changeover/
4
Closed<=400 ohm; open>=10K ohm
air flow/condensation
Override
7
9
8
6
Closed<=400 ohm; open>=3.3k ohm
20K ohm NTC (25 °C)
10k Ohm
Analog
Temperature Sensor
Setpoint Adjustment
Override LED
Outputs Digital
ON: 5 Vdc, 10 mA.
OFF: 0 Vdc, <1 mA
Triac (2pais) Heat and Cool
14, 15, 17, 18 24 Vac; 250 mA max continuous; 650 mA max surge (<=30 sec)
Mode
HYD Outputs
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Description
HYD applications can have a variable number of heating and
cooling stages. The number of pipes used on the unit could be
two or four. The outputs could be of staged, PWM, floating, or
Thermal type. In addition the outputs can be of Change over
mode.
Procedure
1. Click the Outputs button on the left pane to open the
Output Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Purpose
4. Click Next to display the Input Configuration page.
Define the operation of the hydronic controller outputs and the
type of equipment to be controlled.
65
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
HYD Outputs fields
Table 43. Hydronic Controller Types and Outputs.
Definition
Name
Types HYD
Select the hardware version to be used for the controller. Each hardware version has different combinations of inputs
and outputs. The software checks Type against the controller's selected application so that you cannot configure a
controller for an application that it cannot perform.
Selection
in Tool
Controller
Type
Onboard
Setpoint
Number of
Outputs
Number of
Digital In
Transceiver
FTT-10
FTT-10
W7762A
W7762B
System
W7762A
W7762B
No
2
2
1
1
Yes
Define the type of equipment (number of pipes) being controlled.
TWO_PIPE
Unit has only two pipes. Selecting this system type limits the controller to control only one valve output and operate in
a changeover mode. When operating in changeover mode, the controller uses only the one valve for controlling both
heating and cooling. Use this configuration only when changeover operation is required.
FOUR_PIPE
Unit has four pipes connected, providing both heating and cooling at the same time. The controller uses one output to
control heating only and one output to control cooling only (as specified in Control Outputs).
Control Configures the two control outputs for the different type of actuators and control sequences required for the application.
Outputs
Output 1- Mode
Output triac pair connected to terminals 13/14/15 of the controller.
Select the control sequence option for output 1. For four-pipe applications, always allocate this output to the heat
option to minimize field wiring errors. For two-pipe applications, you can select only the changeover option.
HEATING
The output is modulated open when heat energy is needed in the space.
COOLING
The output is modulated open when cool energy is needed in the space.
CHANGEOVER
The output is modulated open when heat or cool energy is needed in the space.
OUTP_NOT_USED
The output is not controlled by the controller and is always off.
Output 1- Type
Select the type of actuator to be connected to the output.
FLOATING
Three-point actuator that can be commanded open or closed (terminals 14/15 and/or 17/18). The run-times for the
actuator are configured on the Equipment Control tab (Output Options).
FLOATING_MID
A three point actuator that can be commanded open or closed on terminals 14/15 and/or 17/18. The run-times for the
actuator are configured in the Outputs tab. The Zero Energy Position (no Heat and no Cool) is the middle Position
(50%). The Cool Range is 0 to 50%; the Heat Range, 50 to 100%. The Range can be reversed by selecting the
Actuator Direct or Reverse Option. During the Synchronization Process, the fan is turned off.
PWM
Duty-cycled output where the 24VAC output is pulsed on/off in the duty cycle range 0% to 100%. This type drives
output terminal 14 and/or 17.
ONE_STAGE
Single-stage on/off output that switches terminal 14 and/or 17.
TWO_STAGE
Two-stage output: Terminal 14/17 is switched for stage 1 and terminal 15/18 is switched for stage 2.
THREE_STAGE
Three-stage switched output. Terminal 14/17 is switched for stage 1, terminal 15/18 is switched for stage 2. Both
terminals 14+15 and/or 17+18 are switched for stage 3.
THERMAL
Switched on/off output for switching a 24V thermal actuator on terminal 14/17.
95-7769—01
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 43. Hydronic Controller Types and Outputs. (Continued)
Definition
Name
Control Output 2- Mode
Outputs Output triac pair connected to terminals 16/17/18 of the controller.
(cont.) Select the control sequence option to be allocated to output 2. For four-pipe applications, always allocate this output to
the cool option to minimize field wiring errors. For two-pipe applications, you can select only the changeover option.
Output 2- Type
Selection options are the same as for Output 1.
Procedure
HYD Inputs
1. Click the Inputs button on the left pane to open the
Input Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Purpose
To configure the wall module parameters and input points for a
HYD controller.
4. Click Next to display the Equipment Control
Configuration page or Back to display the Output
Configuration page.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
HYD Inputs fields
Table 44. Wall Module and Hydronic Controller Inputs.
Definition
Configures the functionality of the connected wall module. Be careful that the features configured here are the same as
Name
Wall
Module the features available on the wall module device to be connected.
Space Temp Sensor
Define whether or not the controller is to be used with a space temperature sensor connected to its input. Typically, a
space temperature sensor is used, but in cases where the space temperature is supplied from another device via the
network, the local space temperature sensor input is not used.
YES
The local space temperature sensor input is used. Ensure that a space temperature sensor is actually connected,
otherwise the controller measures incorrect values.
NO
The local space temperature sensor is not used. This option must be selected when a sensor is not connected.
LED/LCD Display
This configuration defines whether a Wall Module with LED or a Wall Module with LCD Display is connected.
For the LED there is shown either the Override Status or the Effective Occupancy Status. The LCD Display shows the
both – the Effective and the Override Status and an additional Off Condition.
The Override Status results from the Scheduler, the Network Override, the Override Button and the Occupancy Sensor.
The Off Condition results from the Fanspeed Switch, the Window Contact and the Medium from nviApplicMode.
LED_OVERRIDE
The LED shows the Override from the Override Button or from the Network. On means Override Bypass, 1 Flash per
Second means Override Unoccupied, 2 Flashes per Second means Override Standby or Occupied. 4 Flashes
means the Controller answers of the Network Management Command Wink.
LED_OCCUPANCY
The LED shows the effective Occupancy Mode. On means effective Occupied or Bypass, 1 Flash per Second means
effective Standby, Off means effective Unoccupied. 4 Flashes means the Controller answers of the Network
Management Command Wink.
LCD_DISPLAY
This Mode is used only for a Wall Module with LCD Display. The Display has following Symbols to show the
Occupancy Modes: Sun means effective Occupied or Bypass, Half Sun means effective Standby, Moon means
effective Unoccupied. No Symbol and OFF in 7-Segment means the Controller is Off. In the Off Mode, a Snow Flag
indicates whether Frost Protection is configured. Blinking Symbols are used to show the Override: Blinking Sun
means Override Occupied or Bypass, blinking Half Sun means Override Standby, Blinking Moon means override
unoccupied. The Controller answers with of the Network Management Command Wink with blinking Sun and Moon.
67
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 44. Wall Module and Hydronic Controller Inputs. (Continued)
Definition
Name
Wall
Override Button
Module Define how the override button on the connected wall module is to be used.
(cont.)
NO_BUTTON
The wall module button is not used for the bypass function.
BYPASS_UNOCCUPIED
The Bypass button, when pressed, has two different functions depending on the length of time the button is held
down:
Two seconds puts the controller in Bypass.
Five seconds puts the controller in Unoccupied.
BYPASS
The Bypass button, when pressed, has the following function:
Two seconds puts the controller in Bypass.
Setpoint Knob
The setpoint knob is available in different types of scale, and with different setpoint meanings, based on the country of
usage. The temperature engineering unit used (°C or °F) is the setting made in WebVision when creating the new
project. This setting is used for the total project. Note that the setpoint knob only affects the Occupied and Standby
Setpoints. The Unoccupied setpoint is not affected by the setpoint knob.
NOTE: Hydronic controller Version B has an on-board setpoint. It cannot be used with an external TR21 or TR23
setpoint device.
NO_KNOB
The setpoint knob is ignored. Note, that this must be chosen, if there is no setpoint knob connected to the controller,
to prevent the controller from reacting to incorrect setpoint values.
RELATIVE
The setpoint knob is a relative knob, showing only a setpoint shift as (+) and (-) changes to the configured setpoint.
ABSOLUTE_MIDDLE
The setpoint knob is an absolute knob, showing the setpoint in absolute degrees. It is used as the space temperature
setpoint midway between the heating and cooling zero energy band.
Setpoint Limits
These two fields specify the allowed range of adjustment available from the wall module setpoint knob. It is used by
the building manager for energy management purposes, to balance allowed comfort conditions with energy usage.
(SETPOINT KNOB = RELATIVE)
The setpoint limits define the range of adjustment of the setpoint knob from the zero point, in (DDC) for °C
installations and (DDF) for °F installations.
(SETPOINT KNOB = ABSOLUTE MIDDLE)
The setpoint limits are limits on the absolute range of the setpoint knob in (Deg.C) for °C installations and (Deg.F) for
°F installations.
95-7769—01
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 44. Wall Module and Hydronic Controller Inputs. (Continued)
Definition
Name
Digital Specifies usage of the controller's digital input. Digital Input 1.
Input
Points
DI_WINDOW_CLOSED
Indicates if a window is opened. An open window disables the controller operation. If the contact is closed, the
window is closed.
DI_WINDOW_OPEN
Indicates if a window is opened. An open window disables the controller operation. If the contact is closed, the
window is open.
DI_OCCUPIED_SENSOR
Indicates if the room is occupied. While unoccupied, the controller switches from the occupied operating setpoints to
the standby operating setpoints. If the contact is closed, the space is occupied.
DI_UNOCCUPIED_SENSOR
Indicates if the room is occupied. While unoccupied, the controller switches from the occupied operating setpoints to
the standby operating setpoints. If the contact is closed, the space is unoccupied.
DI_CHANGEOVER_COOL
This selection is for local heat/cool changeover operation for two-pipe units using a switch or local thermostat switch.
When the contact closes, this input indicates that the system can operate in cooling mode. When the contact opens,
this input indicates that the system can operate in heating mode.
DI_CHANGEOVER_HEAT
This selection is for local heat/cool changeover operation for two-pipe units using a switch or local thermostat switch.
When the contact closes, the input indicates that the system can operate in heating mode. When the contact opens,
the input indicates that the system can operate in cooling mode.
DI_MOVEMENT
This selection is used for movement detector configuration where a closed contact indicates movement. Movement
detector is the same as occupancy sensor, but with an additional Hold Time of 15 minutes. This adds a delay to the
occupancy signal such that the space is considered occupied until 15 minutes has elapsed since the last movement
is detected.
DI_NO_MOVEMENT
This selection is used for movement detector configuration where a closed contact indicates no movement.
Movement detector is the same as occupancy sensor, but with an additional Hold Time of 15 minutes. This adds a
delay to the occupancy signal such that the space is considered occupied until 15 minutes has elapsed since the last
movement is detected.
DI_NOT_USED
This setting indicates that the digital input is not used. Use this setting if nothing is connected to the controller to
ensure that spurious signals do not cause the controller to operate incorrectly. The status of this digital input is
reported to the network for use as a free digital input if required. It has no effect on the control algorithm.
Procedure
HYD Equipment Control Outputs
1. Click the Equipment Control button on the left pane to
open the Equipment Control Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Switching Levels
Configuration page or Back to display the Input
Configuration page.
Purpose
Define the main control features of controller outputs.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with LonSpec Off-line or
On-line.
69
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
HYD Outputs fields
Name
Table 45. Hydronic Controller Outputs Fields.
Definition
Output Defines the operating characteristics of the two valve actuator outputs, Output 1 and Output 2 as configured in the
Options Outputs tab. The settings for both Outputs have the same meaning as described in the following text.
Valve Direction
Define the operating direction of the valves for actuator types Floating, PWM, and Thermal.
DIRECT
To open, the valve is modulated from 0% to 100%.
REVERSE
To open, the valve is modulated from 100% to 0%.
Min Stage Off Time
Define the minimum off-time for control outputs configured for operation as staged outputs. This setting is particularly
useful for heat exchanger operation or compressor units. Each stage of the controlled output stays off for the minimum
period of time before the controller turns it on again. The selectable range is 0 to 600 seconds.
Min St On or PWM Per or Valve Runtime
This configuration parameter has three different functions depending on the control output type selected in Control
Outputs:
(CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE = FLOATING)
The value is the actuator run-time in the range 20 to 600 seconds.
(CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE = PWM)
The value is the cycle period of the PWM output in the range 20 to 600 seconds.
(CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE = ONE, TWO OR THREE STAGE)
The value is the minimum on-time for each of the stages, for controlling compressor units.
PWM Configures the full range of the PWM outputs. For many PWM-controlled devices, an output of 0% or 100% is not
Options allowed since a PWM output shows no switching at these percentages. Therefore, most PWM devices have a minimum
duty cycle and a maximum duty cycle between which they operate from zero to full scale. The fields here configure the
full range settings. You can swap the Zero and Full range values to achieve reverse operation for a PWM output.
ZERO
PWM % duty cycle for fully closed position.
FULL
PWM % duty cycle for fully open position.
HYD Switching Levels
HYD Zone Control
Purpose
Purpose
To configure the Hydronic controller staged output switching
levels.
To configure the heating and cooling setpoints for the
Occupied, Standby, and Unoccupied operating modes.
Mode
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Procedure
Procedure
1. Click the Switching Levels button on the left pane to
open the Switching Levels Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
1. Click the Zone Control button on the left pane to open
the Zone Control Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Zone Control Configuration
page or Back to display the Equipment Control
Configuration page.
4. Click Next to display the Miscellaneous Configuration
page or Back to display the Switching Levels
Configuration page.
HYD Switching Levels fields
All levels can be set in the range 0% to 100%.
HYD Zone Control fields
Setpoints can range from 10 to 35 ºC (50 to 95 ºF).
95-7769—01
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Procedure
HYD Miscellaneous Parameters
1. Click the Miscellaneous button on the left pane to open
the Miscellaneous Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Purpose
To configure miscellaneous and energy management
parameters.
4. Click Next to display the PID Configuration page or
Back to display the Zone Control Configuration page.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
HYD Miscellaneous Parameter fields
Table 46. Hydronic Miscellaneous and Energy Management Parameters.
Name
Definition
Miscellaneous Configures operator bypass and priority options.
Bypass Time
Define the period of time (0 to 1080 minutes) in which the controller operates to occupied setpoints after the
local user has pressed the override button.
Override Priority
Allocate priority between local wall module operations (for example, Bypass) and commands from the building
management central. Choices are:
LAST WINS – Last received input takes precedence. It can be either the Bypass button or the Network
signal.
NETWORK WINS – The Network signal always takes precedence over the Bypass button.
Energy
DLC Stpt Bump
Management For load shedding applications, define the temporary setpoint shift to be added to the setpoint when the
controller receives a Load Shedding command. By raising the setpoint during cooling operation, or reducing the
setpoint during heating operation, the controller reduces the amount of heat or cool energy dissipated as a
contribution to load shed algorithms. The parameter can be set in the range 0 to 10DDC (0 to 18DDF).
Cool Rec Ramp, Heat Rec Ramp
Define the rate at which the setpoint is reset during changes between occupancy modes to provide a form of
optimum start algorithm.
Procedure
HYD PID
1. Click the PID button on the left pane to open the PID
Configuration page.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Purpose
To configure the variables for closed loop control. PID
parameters can be set separately for both heating and cooling
control.
4. Click Next to display the Wiring Configuration page or
Back to display the Miscellaneous Configuration
page.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
HYD PID fields
Table 47. Hydronic PID Parameters.
Definition
Name
PID
Cooling/Heating
Proportional band
This value is the temperature deviation between setpoint and space temperature, which causes the control
output to modulate from 0 to 100% of full range. The variable can be set in the range 2 to 100 DDC (3.6 DDF to
180 DDF), respectively; 1.3 to 100 DDC (2.3 DDF to 180 DDF) for P Control only.
Reset Time
This value is the integral reset time in the range 0 to 3200 sec. Setting the Integral constant to zero disables
integral operation.
Derivative Time
This value is the derivative constant in the range 0 to 3200 sec. Setting the derivative constant to zero disables
derivative operation.
71
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 47. Hydronic PID Parameters. (Continued)
Definition
Name
Thermal
Switching
Band/PID
Boost
Cooling/Heating
Boost Temp
Sets a boost band for normal PID operation and when using thermal actuators. The variables indicate a
setpoint-space temperature deviation outside which the outputs are switched to full operation to act as a boost
function when space temperature deviates significantly from the desired setpoint. These values also serve as a
threshold for two-point switching of thermal actuators.
•
•
The threshold can be set in the range 0 to 10 DDC (7.2 to 180 DDF).
If the threshold is set to 0 DDC, the boost function is disabled.
LON Bus
HYD Wiring
The terminals in Table 49 are used to connect the LON Bus
FTT-10A. The LON terminals are insensitive to polarity.
Purpose
To display the wiring diagram for the Hydronic controller.
Table 49. LON Bus FTT-10A Terminal Connections.
Output 1 /
Mode
Output 2
Terminal 14/15
14 on =open valve
15 on = close valve
14 = on/off
Terminal 17/18
17 on = open valve
18 on = close valve
17 = on/off
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Floating
1-stage
2-stage
3-stage
Procedure
1. Click the Wiring button on the left pane to open the
Wiring Configuration page.
15 = not used
18 = not used
14 on = stage 1
17 on = stage 1
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
14 on + 15 on = stage 2 17 on + 18 on = stage 2
14 on = stage 1
15 on = stage 2
17 on = stage 1
18 on = stage 2
4. Click Back to display the PID Configuration page.
14 on + 15 on = stage 3 17 on + 18 on = stage 3
HYD Wiring fields
DI1 Window / Occupancy / Air Flow / Changeover
PWM
14 = PWM
17 = PWM
15 = not used
18 = not used
Thermal 14 = Pulse modulated 17 = Pulse modulated
15 = not used 18 = not used
Table 48. HYD Wiring Diagram.
Name
Definition
Wall Module
Override LED
Setpoint
Bypass Button
Power
Power Supply 24 Vac; 50/60 Hz
Room Temp Sensor
95-7769—01
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Procedure
Configuring the Excel 10 Remote
Input/Output Device (RIO)
1. Click the Input_pane button on the left pane to open the
Input Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Description
The W7761A Excel 10 Remote Input/Output Device (RIO) is a
LonMark compliant device designed to monitor and control
HVAC equipment, lighting, and other miscellaneous loads in a
distributed network.
4. Click Next to display the Output Configuration page.
RIO Inputs fields
Usage
Table 50. RIO Analog and Digital Inputs.
In this version of the wizard, only the Excel 15 W7760A
Building Manager uses the RIO.
Name
Definition
Analog Inputs Specify up to six analog inputs (four
1 through 6
Resistive
resistive, two voltage).
Application
UNUSED
The RIO communicates with other controller nodes,
monitoring devices, and engineering tools using the
LonWorks Bus. RIOs provide inputs (analog and digital) and
outputs (digital) to any node on the LonWorks Bus.
DISCHARGE_TEMP_PT3000
OUTDOOR_TEMP_PT3000
RETURN_TEMP_PT3000
DISCHARGE_TEMP_20KNTC
RETURN_TEMP_20KNTC
SPACE_TEMP_T7700
Refer to Excel 10 W7761A Remote Input/Output Device
Specification Data, form 74-2698; Excel 10 W7761A Remote
Input/Output Device Installation Instructions, form 95-7539; or
Excel 10 W7761A Remote Input/Output Device System
Engineering, form 74-2699 for more information. This
literature is available on customer.honeywell.com. Try the
following link:
AI1-4 Name After configuring a resistive analog input,
enter a descriptive name (up to 18
characters).
Voltage
UNUSED
FIL_ST_PRESS_DIFF_AI
MONITOR_SENSOR1_AI
OD_HUM_C7600B_AI
OD_HUM_C7600C_AI
OUTDOOR_ENTHALPY_AI
RETURN_ENTHALPY_AI
RTN_HUM_C7600B_AI
RTN_HUM_C7600C_AI
SPACE_CO2_AI
http://customer.honeywell.com/request.cfm?form=xx-xxxx
Purpose
To configure RIO inputs and outputs.
Configuration Parameters
•
Six analog inputs – four are resistive type and two are
current or voltage
AI5-6 Name After configuring a voltage analog input,
enter a descriptive name (up to 18
characters).
•
•
All resistive inputs are temperature inputs
Current or voltage can be humidity, airflow, or pressure
sensors
•
•
Four digital inputs
Eight digital outputs, which can be discrete, modulating, or
floating
Digital Inputs
1 through 4
Select ACTIVE_SHORT or ACTIVE_OPEN.
For each Digital Input configured, specify
MAINTAINED or MOMENTARY.
•
Maintained contact closure
RIO devices do not have equipment control or zone option
parameters, only hardware points. The next two sections
describe the options for configuring the RIO:
A maintained contact closure is where
the monitored contact input changes
condition and remains.
•
Momentary contact closure
A momentary contact closure is where
the monitored contact input only needs to
stay in one condition for 1 second
minimum.
RIO Inputs
Use Table 50 to configure the RIO inputs.
Purpose
DI1-4 Name After configuring a digital input, enter a
descriptive name (up to 18 characters).
Configuration of six Analog Inputs and four Digital Inputs of
RIO. Specify up to six analog inputs (four resistive and two
voltage) and four digital inputs.
RIO Outputs
Use Table 51 to configure the RIO outputs.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Purpose
Control points through the RIO using the outputs. Configure
up to eight outputs.
73
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
4. If sensors are being used for display only, then they can
have a larger value for the delta and rely on the
guaranteed periodic update to update the sensor every
55 seconds regardless on the amount of change.
5. If the sensor is bound to another Excel 10 controller,
configure a smaller delta so that the control algorithm
does not see large changes in value.
6. The default value of 0 sends an update every 2
seconds.
7. Click Back to display the RIO's Input Configuration
page.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Procedure
1. Click the Output_pane button on the left pane to open
the Output Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Delta Configuration page or
Back to display the Input Configuration page.
RIO Deltas fields
RIO Outputs fields
Table 52. RIO Deltas.
Name
Delta T1
Definition
Degrees Farheinheit (°F)
Degrees Farheinheit (°F)
Degrees Farheinheit (°F)
Degrees Farheinheit (°F)
Percentage
Table 51. RIO Digital Outputs.
Name
Definition
Delta T2
Delta T3
Delta T4
Delta H
Delta P
Point Select up to eight digital outputs, DO1 to DO8, from
Type the following types:
•
•
•
•
DISCRETE1 through DISCRETE8
FLOAT1_OPEN through FLOAT8_OPEN
FLOAT1_CLOSE through FLOAT8_CLOSE
MODULATE1 through MODULATE8
Inches H O
2
Delta V
Delta C
Delta CO
Volts
The following additional parameters are also
available for configuration:
Milliamperes
•
•
Speed for Floating DOs
PWM settings for Modulated DOs
CO level
2
2
For floating outputs, a corresponding float close
should be available for a float open and vice versa.
If not, the wizard gives an error message while you
try to save the configuration.
Configuring the Unit Ventilator (UV)
The W7753A is the Unit Ventilator Controller in the Excel 10
product line family. The Unit Ventilator is a LonMark compliant
device to monitor/control HVAC equipment, lighting, and other
miscellaneous loads in a distributed network.
RIO Deltas
Refer to Excel 10 W7753A Unit Ventilator Controller
Specification Data (form 74-2962) or Excel 10 W7753A Unit
Ventilator Controller Installation Instructions (form 95-7520)
for more information. This literature is available on
customer.honeywell.com. Try the following link:
Purpose
Delta is an adjustable threshold that allows the user to
determine, on a per-sensor basis, what change in value is
required before the sensor is updated. All Excel 10 controllers
have a guaranteed periodic update time of 55 seconds, which
requires that all sensors report any change every update
period. The delta for each sensor is used to reduce LonWorks
Bus traffic by reducing the amount of updates on a sensor that
are constantly or quickly changing. View or modify Deltas
(change thresholds) for sensors.
http://customer.honeywell.com/request.cfm?form=xx-xxxx
Navigating to Unit Ventilator Pages
Go to the Devices tab. Expand the list of devices on the left
pane (listed under WebVision). Select a device to view its
properties.
Configuring a Unit Ventilator Controller
The options for configuring a Unit Ventilator Controller are as
follows:
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Outputs
Inputs
Equipment Control
Economizer
H/C Stages
Zone Options
Miscellaneous
PID
Procedure
1. Click the Deltas_pane button on the left pane to open
the RIO's Delta Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Wiring Assignment
Wiring Diagram
95-7769—01
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 53. Unit Ventilator Outputs. (Continued)
UV Outputs
heating and cooling stages. The outputs could be of stages,
PWM, or floating types. In addition, the number of fan speeds
and Economizer types must be set. You can also select
optional points.
Name
Definition
Economizer
Selection of Economizer mixed air damper
actuator type: None (or packaged external
economizer), PWM, or Floating.
•
•
•
Econo_None_Pkgd
Econo_PWM
Econo_Floating
Purpose
Select all outputs, including optional outputs, to be controlled
by the Unit Ventilator Controller.
NOTE: If you configure a floating or PWM
economizer, you MUST select a
Discharge Air sensor (see Unit
Ventilator Inputs) to enable
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
automatic damper control.
Motor Speed Actuator motor speeds (in seconds).
Enabled with a selection of floating heating,
floating cooling or floating economizer.
Procedure
1. Click the UVOutputPane button on the left pane to
open the Output Configuration page.
Optional
Points
The first optional point is enabled if there is
sufficient room on the controller. After you
select the first point, the second one is
enabled if there is sufficient space, and so
on.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
The following options are available:
4. Click Next to open the Input Configuration page.
•
Status_Occupied - (output energized
when controller is in Occupied mode)
AND/OR
UV Outputs fields
•
Aux_Econ1 - (Emulates a T7300 – for
controlling an external economizer) AND/
OR
Free1 - (Network-controlled output) AND/
OR
Table 53. Unit Ventilator Outputs.
Name
Definition
•
•
Fan Speeds
Select one of the following fan speeds:
•
•
•
•
No_Fan
Unused - (Point is unused)
One_Speed
Two_Speed
Three_Speed
Controller
Type
The Model type.
Power
Frequency
This field defines the line voltage that Excel
10 Controllers use and also tells LonSpec
the calculation required for noise immunity.
The calculation differs for 50 and 60 Hz
applications
Heating
Select one of the following Heating types:
•
•
•
•
•
Heating_Stage_1
Heating_Stage_2
Heating_PWM
Heating_Floating
No_Heating
PWM Settings PWM Period time (in seconds).
•
Zero Pulse time for a 0 percent output
signal (in seconds).
Full Pulse time for a 100percent output
signal (in seconds). This value must be
less than or equal to the PWM Period.
If you select Floating, the Motor Speed field
displays actuator speed in seconds.
If you select PWM, the PWM Settings
become editable.
•
Cooling
Select one of the following Cooling types:
•
•
•
•
•
Cooling_Stage_1
Cooling_Stage_2
Cooling_PWM
Cooling_Floating
No_Cooling
UV Inputs
space temperature sensor type, wall module type, and the
voltage and digital inputs for a Unit Ventilator application.
If you select Floating, the Motor Speed field
displays actuator speed in seconds.
If you select PWM, the PWM Settings fields
become editable.
Purpose
To select all sensors to be wired to the Unit Ventilator
Controller.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
75
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 54. Unit Ventilator Inputs. (Continued)
Procedure
1. Click the Input button on the left pane to open the Input
Configuration page.
Name
Optional
Definition
User address(es) for analog points. Two
page 76).
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Equipment Control
Configuration page or Back to display the Output
Configuration page.
Analog Points resistive and two voltage sensors are
available.
Select one of the following resistive options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
UnUsedRai
OutDoorTempPt3000
DischargeTempPt3000
ReturnTempPt3000
MixedAirTempPt3000
FanSwitch
DischargeTemp20kntc
ReturnTemp20kntc
MixedAirTemp20kntc
UV Inputs fields
Table 54. Unit Ventilator Inputs.
Name
Definition
Space Temp
Select one of the following Space Temp
sensor type options:
Select one of the following voltage options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
UnusedVai
•
•
•
•
Unused
RtnHumidityC7600C
ReturnEnthalpy
OdHumC7600C
OutdoorEnthalpy
OutdoorCO
FilterStaticPressDiff
SpaceCO2
OutdoorCO2
MonitorSensor1
RtnHumC7600B
OdHumC7600B
RtnHumidityH76721/31
OdHumidityH76721/31
TR21 or TR23 (wall module)
UseReturn Temp
UseDischarge Temp
Select Physical Sensor (Wall Module or LCD
Wall Module) or Network Sensor Signal.
NOTE: The LCD Wall Module is supported
by the devices whose version is
v1.00.10 or above.
Optional
Digital Points input points.
User address(es) for four optional digital
•
•
•
•
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
NOTES:
1.
If you configured a floating or
PWM economizer (see “UV
Outputs” on page 75), you
MUST select a Discharge Air
sensor to enable automatic
damper control.
Select one of the following options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
UnUnsedDi
OccSensor - (usually a motion detector)
IaqOverrideIn
SmokeMonitor
2.
3.
The RtnHumidityH7621/31 and
OdHumidityH7621/31 humidity
sensors for voltage inputs are
supported by UVs whose
versions are 1.01.10 and above.
The DischTemp20KNTC sensor
can be used to report valid
temperatures up to 180 °F. This
is applicable for UVs whose
versions are 1.01.10 and above.
DirtyFilterIn
ShutDown - (shuts down, and disables
automatic temperature control)
WindowOpen
Monitor - (generic switch input to be sent
out over the LonWorks Bus network)
CoilFreezeStat
•
•
•
•
AqstatMakeTmpRise - (make on
Temperature Rise)
•
AqstatBreakTmpRise - (break on
Temperature Rise)
UV Equipment Control Options
•
•
TimeClock
DripPanFull - (locks out cooling when
contacts are made)
Control cascade, fan, and smoke control options.
•
EconEnable - (Economizer enabled
when contacts are made)
Purpose
Define Equipment Control parameters that the Excel 10
Controller uses to control the unitary equipment.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
95-7769—01
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 55. .Unit Ventilator Control Options. (Continued)
Procedure
1. Click the Equipment Control button on the left pane to
open the Equipment Control Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
Name
Definition
Filter Setpoint This option is enabled if an analog Filter
Pressure sensor was selected. If the
measured pressure exceeds this setpoint,
the Dirty Filter alarm is issued. There is a
built-in hysteresis of 25 percent of the Filter
Press Stpt value (for the Dirty Filter alarm to
return to normal).
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Economizer Configuration
page or Back to display the Input Configuration page.
UV Equipment Control fields
UV Economizer Settings
Table 55. .Unit Ventilator Control Options.
Name
Cascade
Control
Definition
Purpose
Cascade control modulates/stages heating/
cooling to control discharge air temperature,
and uses space temperature to reset the
discharge air temperature set point. Select
one of the following cascade control options:
Yes - Select Yes only if 1both a Discharge Air
Temperature sensor and modulating heating
or cooling are configured.
to configure the Unit Ventilator Economizer settings.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
No - Select No if the heating/cooling
equipment are controlled strictly from space
temperature, and discharge temperature is
not used.
Procedure
1. Click the Economizer button on the left pane to open
the Economizer Configuration Page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the H/C Stage Parameters
Configuration page or Back to display the Equipment
Control Configuration page.
Fan Control
Select one of the following fan control
options:
Auto - Auto cycles the fan with call for
cooling (and heating if you set Fan - Heating
to On [next parameter]).
Continuous - Continuous means the fan runs
continuously in the Occupied mode, and
intermittently (with call for heating/cooling) in
the Unoccupied mode
UV Economizer fields
Table 56. Unit Ventilator Economizer Settings.
Fan Run on
Heat
Select one of the following fan control
options:
On
Off - Select Off to allow for control circuits
where, when in heat mode, the fan is directly
controlled by an interlock control circuit (not
part of the Excel 10 controller) which brings
on the fan once the plenum temperature has
risen above its thermostatic set point.
Name
Definition
IAQ Sensor
Setpoint
This is the Indoor Air Quality setpoint. This
setting, in ppm, is compared to the current
actual indoor CO sensor reading to
2
determine the indoor air quality.
OAQ Sensor
Setpoint
This is the Outdoor Air Quality setpoint.
This setting, in ppm, is compared to the
Smoke Control This value determines what the controller
does when a smoke alarm occurs (either
from the digital input, or via the LonWorks
Bus network). Select one of the following
smoke control options:
current actual outdoor CO or CO sensor
2
reading to determine the outdoor air
quality. If OAQ is poor, the economizer
damper is closed to 0%.
Fan Off Damper Closed
Fan On Damper Open
Fan On Damper Closed
Enable Type
Source for economizer enable decisions.
Choose one of the following methods to
determine when to use outdoor air for
cooling:
Fan Fail Time This option is enabled if an Air Flow switch
was selected. This value sets the amount of
time that must pass after closed contacts on
the Air Flow switch are detected before the
controller shuts down and attempts a restart.
If three fan start attempts fail to prove air
flow, the controller is disabled and locked out
until reset. This action allows the fan to come
up to speed on start up, and prevents false
air flow failure alarms.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Digital
OutDoorTemp
OdEnth Type A
OdEnth Type B
OdEnth Type C
OdEnth Type D
DiffTemp
SingleEnth
DiffEnth
EconNul
77
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 56. Unit Ventilator Economizer Settings. (Continued)
UV Heating/Cooling (H/C) Stages
Name
Definition
the minimum on/off times, Cycles/ hour, recovery ramps of a
Unit Vent application for heating and cooling stages.
OA Damper Min Minimum position of the Outdoor Damper
Pos
(0 to 100%). Under normal Occupied-
mode operation, the dampers are not
closed below this setting. If Unoccupied,
or if a Discharge Low Temperature
condition exists, the dampers are closed
below this setting.
Purpose
Define heating and cooling (h/c) stage parameters, including
minimum on and off times.
IAQ Position
Minimum Position of Damper used when
poor Indoor Air Quality conditions exist
(IAQ sensor > IAQ Setpoint, or if Digital
IAQ Switch is on). Value range from 0 to
100%.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Procedure
NOTE: A discharge low temperature
condition overrides this setting
and closes the dampers to
prevent equipment damage due
to freezing.
1. Click the HcStageParameter button on the left pane to
open the H/C Stage Parameters Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Use Heat for IAQ Select one of the following options:
4. Click Next to display the Zone Operations
Configuration page or Back to display the
Economizer Configuration page.
•
Yes - Enables heat to be used when
the damper is opened for IAQ
purposes.
•
No - Keeps heat disabled if controller is
in Cool mode.
UV Heating/Cooling (H/C) Stages parameters
Oa Temp High
Limit
This field is enabled only when Enable
Type is set to Single Enth(alpy). It
provides an outdoor air temperature high
limit setting, above which, the economizer
is disabled, regardless of the current
enthalpy value.
Table 57. Unit Ventilator Heating and Cooling Stage
Parameters.
Name
Min On/Off
Definition
•
•
•
•
Min_heat_on enables minimum on/off
times.
Min_heat_off replaces set minimum
on/off times with a 30 second default.
Min_cool_on enables minimum on/off
times.
Mixed Temp
Setpoint
(ASHRAE Cycle Control Tab.
This field is enabled only when ASHRAE
Cycle III is selected in the Equipment
3 only)
Min_cool_off replaces set minimum
Ashrae Cycle
When a unit ventilator is in the occupied
on/off times with a 30 second default.
mode it typically follows one of three
operating cycles defined by the American
Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-
Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE):
Cycles/Hour
Cycles per hour (cph). Enter value from 2
through 12. For example, cph for
conventional heating stage one is
normally 3 cph. Consult your hardware
installation guide for recommended
values.
•
•
Cycle I: Fixed 100% Outdoor Air
Cycle II: Variable Percentage of
Outdoor Air with Minimum Position
setting
Oa Temp Lock Out OA temperature lockout. OA temperature
values below the cooling lockout setting
disables the cooling stages. OA
•
Cycle III: Variable Outdoor Air
Maintaining Constant Mixed Air
Temperature
temperature values above the heating
lockout setting disable the heating
stages.
Enable Setpoint This setpoint is enabled if Enable Type is
Outside Air Temp, Diff. Temp, or Single
Enth
Ramp
Recovery ramp (degrees per hour). Enter
value from 2 through 20 for cooling or 3
through 20 for heating
OaEconEnTemp For OdTemp, this field sets the threshold.
The economizer is disabled when
OdTemp exceeds this value.
DiffEconEnTemp
Fan Run-On Time Enter amount of time (from 0 to 120
seconds) the fan will continue to run after
the last stage of heating or cooling has
switched off.
For Diff Temp, this field sets the difference
between the Outdoor and Return air
temperatures, above which, the
economizer is disabled.
This value is only applicable during
unoccupied times, and during occupied
times if the Fan Control field is set to
Auto_Fan.
OaEnthEn
For Single Enth, this field sets the
enthalpy value, above which, the
economizer is disabled.
95-7769—01
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 58. Unit Ventilator Zone Options. (Continued)
UV Zone Options
set the heating and cooling setpoints.
Name
Max. Limit
Setpoint
Definition
Provides an upper limit on the allowed
settings of the Wall Module’s setpoint
knob.
Purpose
Enabled if Use Wall Module Setpoint is
Yes. Values range from 55 to 85 °F when
the setpoint knob type is absolute and
range for relative setpoint knob type is –9
to 9 DDf.
Enter all outputs, including optional outputs, to be controlled
by the Unit Ventilator Controller.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
UV Miscellaneous Settings
Use Table 59 to configure the miscellaneous Unit Ventilator
application settings.
Procedure
1. Click the Zone Options button on the left pane to open
the Zone Options Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Purpose
Enter all outputs, including optional outputs, to be controlled
by the Unit Ventilator Controller.
4. Click Next to display the Miscellaneous Parameters
Configuration page or Back to display the H/C Stage
Parameters Configuration page.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
UV Zone Options fields
Procedure
Table 58. Unit Ventilator Zone Options.
1. Click the Miscellaneous button on the left pane to open
the Miscellaneous Parameters Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the PID Configuration page or
Back to display the Zone Options Configuration
page.
Name
CoolingOccupied Enter Occupied cooling setpoint;
Setpoint range: 50 to 95 °F (10 to 35 °C).
Cooling Standby Enter Standby cooling setpoint;
Definition
Setpoint
range: 50 to 90 °F (10 to 32 °C).
Cooling
Unoccupied
Setpoint
Enter Unoccupied cooling setpoint;
range: 50 to 90 °F (10 to 32 °C).
UV Miscellaneous settings
HeatingOccupied Enter Occupied heating setpoint;
Setpoint range: 50 to 90 °F (10 to 32 °C).
Table 59. Unit Ventilator Miscellaneous Settings.
Heating Standby Enter Standby heating setpoint;
Name
Definition
Setpoint
range: 50 to 90 °F (10 to 32 °C).
DLC Setpoint
Bump
Upon receipt of a DLC_Shed signal over
the LonWorks-Bus network, the current
operating setpoint value is bumped up/
down (for cool/heat modes) by this
Heating
Unoccupied
Enter Unoccupied heating setpoint;
range: 50 to 90 °F (10 to 32 °C).
Setpoint
Use Wall Module Select usage of setpoint adjustment
amount. Select a value from 0 through 10.
Setpoint
potentiometer on a connected Wall
Module.
Override Type
Specify the type of Bypass override
functions that are available from the Wall
Module's Override button. You can select
one of the following options:
This field is active if you selected a
Sensor_Setpoint type in the Wall Module
field on the Input tab.
•
•
•
None
Normal
ByPassOnly
Min. Limit
Setpoint
Provides a lower limit on the allowed
settings of the Wall Module’s setpoint
knob.
NOTE: No Continuous Unoccupied
allowed from the Wall Module's
Override button.
Enabled if Use Wall Module Setpoint is
Yes. Values range from 55 to 85 °F when
the setpoint knob type is absolute and
range for relative setpoint knob type is –9
to 9 DDf.
79
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 59. Unit Ventilator Miscellaneous Settings.
Name Definition
CAUTION
Can cause short cycling of compressors or wide
swings in space temperature and excessive
overdriving of modulating outputs.
If a large or frequent change to the PID control
parameters is made, it is possible to cause
equipment problems such as short cycling
compressors (if the stage minimum run times were
disabled). Other problems that can occur include
wide swings in space temperature and excessive
overdriving of modulating outputs.
Equipment Damage Possible
Override Priority Set the priority scheme for the Bypass
override function. You can select one of
the following options:
•
Last - Whichever was last to occur;
either the button was pushed or the
network signal arrived.
•
Net - The network signal always takes
precedence over the push button.
This field is enabled if Override Type is
Normal or Bypass Only.
Bypass Time
Set the time period for a bypass override
event. Value ranges from 0 through 1080
minutes. Enabled if Override Type is
Normal or Bypass Only.
The default values provide proper control for most
applications. If the PID parameters require adjustment away
from these values, use caution to ensure that equipment
problems do not arise. If any change to the PID control
parameters is made, the adjustments should be gradual. After
each change, allow the system to stabilize so the effects are
accurately observed. Make further refinements as needed
until the system is operating as desired.
Max Da Temp
Setpoint
Value ranges from 65 to 135 °F
(18 to 57 °C). Enabled if you selected a
discharge air temperature sensor. This
setting is only used if Cascade Control is
enabled.
If the default values are changed and you want to reset them,
add a second Unit Ventilator Controller to the subnet, record
then re-enter the default PID values to the first Unit Ventilator.
Min. Da Temp
Value ranges from 0 to 60 °F
(-18 to 16 °C). Enabled if you selected a
discharge air temperature sensor. This
setting is used in Cascade Control, and as
the Low Limit alarm threshold for
discharge temp.
Procedure
1. Click the PID button on the left pane to open the PID
Configuration page.
Setpoint Knob
Type
Select Relative (plus or minus up to 10
degrees from the current actual setpoint
set on the Zone Options page), or
Absolute_Middle (the Wall Module’s knob
sets the midpoint between the heat and
cool current actual setpoints).
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Wiring Assignment page or
Back to display the Miscellaneous Parameters
Configuration page.
You can select one of the following
options:
•
•
•
Unused
Offset
Absolute
CAUTION
Equipment Damage Possible
Adjustments may cause large over or undershooting
of setpoint. The default values provide proper control
for most systems.
UV PID settings
UV PID Settings fields
Purpose
Adjust PID (Proportional Integral Derivative) control
parameters for the Unit Ventilator Controller.
Table 60. Unit Ventilator PID Settings.
Name
Definition
Cooling
Throttling
Range
Throttling Range or Proportional Gain
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Determines what impact the error has on the
output signal.
Decreasing the Throttling Range amplifies the
effect on the error, that is, for a given error (the
difference between the measured space
temperature and the current actual space
temperature setpoint), a small Throttling Range
causes a higher output signal value.
Enter the range in degrees: 2 to 30 °F
(-17 to -1 °C]).
95-7769—01
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 60. Unit Ventilator PID Settings. (Continued)
Table 60. Unit Ventilator PID Settings. (Continued)
Name
Definition
Name
Definition
Derivative Time or Gain
Cooling
Integral
Time
Integral Time
Heating
Derivative
Time
Determines what impact the error-over-time has
on the output signal. Error-over-time has two
components that make up its value: the amount
of time the error exists and the size of the error.
Determines what impact the error rate has on the
output signal. The error rate is how fast the error
value is changing. It can also be the direction
space temperature is going, either towards or
away from the setpoint and its speed - quickly or
slowly.
The higher the integral time, the slower the
control response. In other words, a decrease in
Integral Time causes a more rapid response in
the output signal.
A decrease in Derivative Time causes a given
error rate to have a larger effect on the output
signal.
Enter the range in seconds: 0 to 5000.
Derivative Time or Gain
Enter the range in seconds: 0 –to 9000.
Cooling
Derivative
Time
Determines what impact the error rate has on the
output signal. The error rate is how fast the error
value is changing. It can also be the direction
space temperature is going, either towards or
away from the setpoint and its speed - quickly or
slowly.
UV Outputs Wiring Assignment
Use Table 61 to configure the outputs of a Unit Ventilator to
actual physical outputs on a unit ventilator controller.
Purpose
Modify terminal assignments for configured outputs.
A decrease in Derivative Time causes a given
error rate to have a larger effect on the output
signal.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Enter the range in seconds (0 – 9,000).
Throttling Range or Proportional Gain
Heating
Throttling
Range
Limits
Determines what impact the error has on the
output signal.
Outputs must be configured using the Unit Ventilator
Controller Outputs page.
Decreasing the Throttling Range amplifies the
effect on the error, that is, for a given error (the
difference between the measured space
temperature and the current actual space
temperature setpoint), a small Throttling Range
causes a higher output signal value.
Procedure
1. Click the Wiring Assignment button on the left pane to
open the Wiring Assignment page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Enter the range in degrees: 2 to 30 °F
(-17 to -1 °C)
4. Click Next to display the Wiring Diagram page or Back
to display the PID Configuration page.
Heating
Integral
Time
Integral Time
UV Outputs fields
Determines what impact the error-over-time has
on the output signal. Error-over-time has two
components that make up its value: the amount
of time the error exists and the size of the error.
Table 61. Unit Ventilator Outputs - Terminal Assignments.
Name
Default
Assignment
Definition
This column displays the default
assignments as the outputs are
configured in the Outputs page
The higher the integral time, the slower the
control response. In other words, a decrease in
Integral Time causes a more rapid response in
the output signal.
Custom
Assignment
Custom assignment – to change the
assignments
Existing
If the device is online, this shows the
assignments as in the device. Else, it
shows from the database
Enter the range in seconds: 0 to 5000.
81
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
•
Also Digital Outputs: 8 configurable digital Triac outputs.
(24 Vac & 500 mA).
UV Controller Wiring Diagram
Purpose
Navigating to Excel 10 VAV II pages
Display the wiring diagram for the UV controller.
Go to the Devices tab. Expand the list of devices on the left
pane (listed under WebVision). Select a device to view its
properties.
Mode
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Configuration
Inputs
Control Parameters
PID
Flow Pickup
Miscellaneous
Custom Wiring
Wiring Diagram
Configuration can be performed with the device Off-line or
On-line.
Procedure
1. Click the Wiring Diagram button on the left pane to
open the Wiring Diagram Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Back to display the Custom Wiring page.
Purpose
Define VAV configuration attributes for the Excel 10 VAV II
controller.
NOTE: Fields appearing grayed out indicate those fields that
change based on the Controller Type selected on the
Outputs page.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the device On-line or
Off-line.
Configuring the Excel 10 VAV II
Controller
Procedure
The W7751B, W7751HSmart, W7751F, W7751D Standard
are the different model types of the VAV controller belonging
to the Excel10 family. It is a LonMark compliant device
designed to control volume and pressure of air. VAV II
controllers include integrated Flow sensor on an expanded I/O
platform.
1. Click the Configuration button on the left pane to open
the Outputs Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
The expanded hardware platform allows you to configure the
controller with additional Analog and Digital inputs sensors:
4. Click Next to display the Inputs Configuration page.
•
Analog Sensors types: T7750 integrated setpoint pot or
20 k NTC resistive sensors.
Digital inputs: SPST type dry contact type devices.
Excel 10 VAV II Configuration Parameters
•
Table 62. Excel 10 VAV II - Configuration Parameters.
Name
Definition
Model Type
Defines the XL10 Controller Hardware that will be used for this application. The controller type selection is
validated during the download process to prevent a mismatch of hardware configuration.
Valid selections for this field are:
•
•
•
•
W7751B
W7751HSmart
W7751F
W7751DStandard
NOTE: W7751HSmart supports 4 output pins while all other models support 8 output pins.
Pressure Type
Defines the VAV Terminal Unit pressure control operation for this Application. This selection defines how the
controller will operate the VAV Terminal Unit’s damper.
Valid Selections for this field are:
Pressure Dependent - The controller uses space temperature as the primary means of controlling the VAV
Terminal.
Pressure Independent - The controller uses airflow as the primary means of controlling the VAV Terminal
Damper.
95-7769—01
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 62. Excel 10 VAV II - Configuration Parameters. (Continued)
Definition
Name
Box Type
Defines the physical type of VAV Terminal the controller is connected to. This select determines what control
options are available for the VAV Terminal.
Valid selections for this field are:
•
•
•
Single Duct – This VAV Terminal type consist of a single primary air supply inlet connection with or
without a primary flow sensor. This box type is primarily used for cooling only applications, cooling with
local reheat or dual temperature (central heating/cooling) systems.
Dual Duct – This VAV Terminal type consist of separate primary air supply inlets for cooling and heating.
Typically, the box can be configured with a single flow sensor located on the discharge side of the terminal
or in one of the two primary air inlets, a flow sensor in each of the primary air inlets, or no flow sensors.
Flow Tracking – This VAV Terminal type consist of a single inlet air connection receiving it’s primary
source from the condition space. The outlet of the terminal is connected to a return air (or exhaust air)
system.
Wall Module Type Defines the type of wall module to be used for this application. This selection determines the type of control
and options that are available from the wall module.
Valid selections for this field are:
•
•
•
No Sensor – There is no physical wall module connections to this controller.
Sensor – The physical wall module connected to this controller contains a sensor only.
Sensor Override – The physical wall module connected to this controller contains a sensor and push
button override with LED indication.
•
•
•
Sensor Setpoint – The physical wall module connected to this controller contains a sensor and remote
setpoint pot
Sensor Setpoint Override – The physical wall module connected to this controller contains a sensor,
remote setpoint pot, push button override and LED indication.
LCD Wall Module – The physical wall module connected to this controller contains a sensor, remote
setpoint pot., push button override and a LCD display.
NOTE: The LCD Wall Module is supported by VAV devices of type Smart Actuator only whose version is
v1.02.14 and above.
Morning Warmup Defines the control method the controller uses when the controller status is set to morning warm-up.
Type
Valid selections for this field are:
•
•
•
•
Fixed Flow – The controller maintains a fixed air flow setpoint or damper position during the warm-up
period.
Modulating Flow with Reheat – The air flow setpoint is reset by the local space temperature during the
warm-up period. If controller is at maximum flow and additional warm-up is required local reheat is used.
Modulating Flow without Reheat – The air flow setpoint is reset by local space temperature during the
warm-up period. No local reheat is used during the warm-up period.
CZS Terminal Load
Module Reheat
Flow
The check box enables Proportional reheat flow.
When checked, the temperature control loop modulates the damper (pressure-dependent mode) or reset air
flow setpoint (pressure-independent mode) when the controller is in the reheat mode from Minimum Flow
Setpoint to the Reheat Flow Setpoint.
If the check box is not checked, then when the controller is in the reheat mode, there is a step change from
Minimum Flow Setpoint to the Reheat Flow Setpoint.
Motor Speed Section
Damper Motor Defines the time it takes the damper motor actuator to travel from the full close to full open position or visa
Speed
versa. This time should reflect the damper travel time and not the motor actuator speed. Example, if the
actuator motor speed is 90 seconds but the travel time of the damper from full close to full open is 45
seconds then the Dmpr Mtr Spd should be set to 45 seconds.
Reheat Motor Defines the time it takes the reheat actuator to travel from the full close to the full open position or visa versa.
Speed
This time should reflect the reheat valve travel time and not the motor actuator speed. Example, if the reheat
actuator motor speed is 125 seconds but the travel time of the valve from full close to full open is 90 seconds
then the Reheat Mtr Spd should be set to 90 seconds.
83
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 62. Excel 10 VAV II - Configuration Parameters. (Continued)
Definition
Name
Output Settings Section
Flow Type
Defines the control flow algorithm used by the controller. The selection available dependents of the Pressure
Type and Box Type selected.
Valid selections for this field are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Flow Normal – This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to pressure independent and
the Box Type is set to Single Duct or Dual Duct.
Shared Wall Module – This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to pressure
independent or pressure dependent and the Box Type is set to Single Duct.
DD Satel No Flow Mix – This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure
Independent and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct.
DD Satel Flow Mix – This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure Independent
and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct.
DD Satel Constant Volume – This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure
Independent and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct.
DD Master No Flow Mix – This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure
Independent and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct.
DD Master Flow Mix – This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure
Independent and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct.
DD Master Constant Volume – This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure
Independent and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct.
Dual Duct Discharge Sensor – This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure
Independent and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct.
Dual Duct Discharge Sensor Constant Volume – This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is
set to Pressure Independent and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct.
Flow Tracking – This flow type is automatically selected when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure
Independent and the Box Type is set to Flow Tracking
Reheat Type
Defines the type of reheat used by the controller. There are two basic types of reheat available for the VAV
Terminal, VAV Terminal Reheat and Peripheral Reheat.
Valid selections for this field are:
•
•
No Reheat – There is no local reheat associated with the VAV Terminal.
One Stage Reheat – There is one stage of electric reheat associated with the VAV Terminal. One triac
output is required for this option.
•
•
•
Two Stage Reheat – There are two stage of electric reheat associated with the VAV Terminal. Two triac
outputs are required for this option.
Three Stage Reheat – There are three stages of electric reheat associated with the VAV Terminal. Three
triac outputs are required for this option
Three Stage Bin Reheat – There are three stages of electric reheat associated with the VAV Terminal.
The three stages are obtained by first turning on the first electric reheat for stage one, shutting down the
first stage and starting the second stage and finally turning both stages of electric reheat on for the third
stage. Two triac outputs are required for this option.
•
•
•
•
One Stage Periph – There is one stage of electric peripheral reheat associated with the VAV Terminal.
One triac output is required for this option.
Float Reheat – There is a modulating valve for the VAV Terminal reheat. This output uses the series 60
type floating control. Two triac outputs are required for this option.
Float Periph Reheat – There is a modulating valve for the space peripheral reheat. This option uses the
series 60 type floating control for the output to the valve. Two triac outputs are required for this option.
Float Reheat Then Periph – There is a modulating valve for the VAV Terminal reheat and a modulating
valve for the space peripheral reheat. This option uses the series 60 type floating control for both valve
outputs. The VAV Terminal reheat valve is modulated as the first stage of reheat and the peripheral reheat
valve is modulated open as the second stage. Four triac outputs are required for this option.
95-7769—01
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 62. Excel 10 VAV II - Configuration Parameters. (Continued)
Definition
Name
Output Settings Section (continued)
Reheat Type
(continued)
•
Float Periph Then Reheat – There is a modulating valve for the VAV Terminal reheat and a modulating
valve for the space peripheral reheat. This option uses the series 60 type floating control for both valve
outputs. The peripheral valve is modulated as the first stage of reheat and the VAV Terminal reheat valve
is modulated open as the second stage. Four triac outputs are required for this option.
•
•
•
PWM Reheat – There is a modulating valve for the VAV Terminal reheat. This option uses Pulse Width
Modulation control for the output to the valve. One triac output is required for this option.
PWM Periph – There is a modulating valve for the space peripheral reheat. This option uses Pulse Width
Modulation control for the output to the valve. One triac output is required for this option.
PWM Reheat Then Periph – There is a modulating valve for the VAV Terminal reheat and a modulating
valve for the space peripheral reheat. This option uses Pulse Width Modulation control for both valve
outputs. The VAV Terminal reheat valve is modulated as the first stage of reheat and the peripheral reheat
valve is modulated open as the second stage. Two triac outputs are required for this option.
PWM Periph Then Reheat – There is a modulating valve for the VAV Terminal reheat and a modulating
valve for the space peripheral reheat. This option uses Pulse Width Modulation control for both valve
outputs. The peripheral valve is modulated as the first stage of reheat and the VAV Terminal reheat valve
is modulated open as the second stage. Two triac outputs are required for this option.
•
•
Three Stage Reheat – There are three stages of electric reheat associated with the VAV Terminal. Three
triac outputs are required for this option.
Fan Type
Defines the type of fan associated with the VAV Terminal. The selection of the fan type defines the control
algorithm that the controller will apply to the VAV Terminal.
Valid selections for this field are:
•
•
•
No Fan – There is no fan associated with this VAV Terminal.
Series Fan – The fan supplied with this VAV Terminal is a series style configuration.
Parallel Fan Temp – The fan supplied with this VAV Terminal is a parallel style configuration that will use
temperature control for the fan operation.
•
•
VavParallelFlowControl – The fan supplied with this VAV Terminal is a parallel style configuration that
will use flow control for the fan operation.
PWM Fan – The fan supplied with this VAV Terminal is a parallel style configuration that will use
temperature control for the fan operation with a PWM signal to operate the fan.
Optional
Outputs
Defines the type and operation of outputs that are not directly associated with the control algorithms in the
VAV2 controller.
There are two basic types of outputs that can be defined and only one instance of each type is allowed.
Aux Option - This defines an output type that is energized whenever the controller is in the occupied mode
and is de-energized for all other modes.
Valid selections for this field are:
•
•
•
Unassigned – This option output is not assigned to the controller.
Auxiliary_Maintain – This selection assigns one triac output for the auxiliary point.
Auxiliary_Pulse – This selection assigns two triac outputs for the auxiliary point. The controller
momentarily pulses one output for the on command and the second output for the off command.
Free Option - This defines an output type that is energized through the network variable DestFree. With this
assignment an output point within the VAV controller can be commanded from another LON device.
Valid selections for this field are:
•
•
•
Unassigned – This option output is not assigned to the controller.
Free_Net_Maintain – This selection assigns one triac output for the Free point.
Free_Net_Pulse – This selection assigns two triac outputs for the Free point. The controller momentarily
pulses one output for the on command and the second output for the off command.
85
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 62. Excel 10 VAV II - Configuration Parameters. (Continued)
Definition
Name
PWM Settings Section
PWM Period
Defines the time period of the PWM signal. This is usually the sum of the Zero time value and the Full Time
value.
The minimum resolution of the time value is 0.1 seconds.
PWM Zero
PWM Full
Defines the time period for the Zero position pulse. When the on time of the PWM period is at this value the
PWM device will position itself to the zero position.
Defines the time period for the Full position pulse. When the on time of the PWM period is at this value the
PwM device will position itself to the full position.
The minimum resolution of the time value is 0.1 seconds
Table 63. Excel 10 VAV II - Analog and Digital Inputs.
Excel 10 VAV II – Inputs
Use Table 63 to configure the Excel 10 VAV II inputs.
Name
Analog Input Configuration (continued)
Analog 2 If there is a second analog input,
select type:
Definition
Purpose
Specify all sensors to be wired to a controller. Define Inputs
attributes for the VAV II controller.
•
•
•
Discharge Temp NTC
Supply Temp NTC
Unused AI
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the device On-line or
Off-line.
Digital Input Configuration
Digital 1 through You can configure up to three
Digital 3 optional digital points.
Procedure
•
UnusedDI - Select if the point is
unused.
1. Click the Inputs button on the left pane to open the
Inputs Configuration page.
•
Window Open – When open,
disables the temperature control
and moves damper to a fixed
position.
HeatCool ChangeOver – Can
manually control operation mode
for hot air or cold air supplied from
an AHU.
Occ Sensor – Allows an
occupancy sensor to change the
effective occupancy between
standby and occupied mode.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Control Parameters
Configuration page or Back to display the
Configuration page.
•
•
VAV II Inputs fields
Table 63. Excel 10 VAV II - Analog and Digital Inputs.
Name
Definition
Monitor Switch – a simple switch
acting like a digital input. Switch
Closed means On/True and Switch
Open means Off/False.
Analog Input Configuration
Analog 1
NOTE: If the wall module type is
selected without the sensor
option in the General page,
this field appears as
NOTE: No two inputs can be configured as duplicate. In
case the user selects a duplicate input, the wizard
displays a warning and reverts back to the previous
selection.
Analog1. Otherwise, it
appears as Remote Setpt.
Select type:
•
•
Absolute
Relative
If the wall module is configured for a
sensor selection, the options
available are Absolute or Relative.
Otherwise, the options are:
•
•
•
Discharge Temp NTC
Supply Temp NTC
Unused AI
95-7769—01
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
parameters. The controlled variable is the variable that should
be held constant, for example, a room temperature. The
reference variable is the prescribed changeable value of the
controlled variable, for example, room temperature setpoint.
Define PID (Proportional Integral Derivative) parameters for a
VAV II Controller.
Excel 10 VAV II – Control Parameters
Use Table 64 to configure the Excel 10 VAV II Control
Parameters.
Purpose
Define Equipment Control parameters that the Excel 10 VAV II
controller uses to control the unitary equipment. Define VAV II
controller parameters.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the device On-line or
Off-line.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with device On-line or
Off-line.
Procedure
1. Click the PID button on the left pane to open the PID
Parameters page.
Procedure
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
1. Click the Control Parameters button on the left pane to
open the Control Parameters page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Flow Pickup page or Back to
display the Control Parameters page.
4. Click Next to display the PID Parameters page or Back
to display the Inputs page.
Excel 10 VAV II PID Settings fields
Table 65. VAV II PID Settings.
Excel 10 VAV II Control Parameters fields
Name
Cooling
Definition
Table 64. VAV II Control Parameters.
Throttling Range Value ranges from 2 to 30 °F (-17 to -1 °C).
The Proportional gain value is equivalent
to the throttling range.
Name
Definition
Cooling Setpoints Values for the occupied, standby, and
unoccupied settings for the cooling
setpoints.
Integral Action
Value ranges from 0 through 5,000 sec.
Derivative Action Value ranges from 0-255 sec.
Heating
Heating Setpoints Values for the occupied, standby, and
unoccupied settings for the heating
setpoints.
Throttling Range Value ranges from 2 to 30 °F (-17 to -1 °C).
Limits
Values for the high and low limit settings
for the remote setpoint.
Integral Action
Value ranges from 0 through 5,000 sec.
Derivative Action Value ranges from 0-255 sec.
Flow Setpoints
Values for the Maximum, Minimum, Max
Reheat, and Standby settings for the flow
setpoints.
Excel 10 VAV II – Flow Pickup
Duct Settings
Area
Use Table 66 to configure the Excel 10 VAV II flow pickup
settings.
Area of the Duct. The user can choose a
CustomArea option for the Diameter and
enter a value for the area. The valid range
Purpose
2
2
allowed is 0 to 4 ft or 0 to 0.372 m .
Specify differential pressure and velocity for flow sensors.
Define the differential pressures and velocities for the flow
sensors. These values would be used to calculate the flow
linearization values during the download sequence.
Diameter
This list shows a predefined set of duct
diameters. The user can choose a
diameter option and the area will be
automatically calculated. Or, the user can
choose a “Custom Area” option and
manually enter the Area value.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the device On-line or
Off-line.
Wall Module
Setpoint Limits
Values of the High Limit and Low Limit
setpoints on the wall module.
Procedure
1. Click the Flow Pickup button on the left pane to open
the Flow Pickup Table page.
2. Enter information into available fields (see Table 66 on
page 88).
Excel 10 VAV II – PID Settings
Purpose
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Miscellaneous page or Back
to display the PID Parameters page.
Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) values regulate an
analog output based on two analog values (one is a controlled
variable; the other, a reference variable) and operating
87
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Excel 10 VAV II Flow Pickup fields
Excel 10 VAV II MIscellaneous Settings fields
Table 66. VAV II Flow Pickup Fields.
Table 67. VAV II MIscellaneous Settings.
Name
Definition
Name
Definition
Pt 1 through
Pt 10
Ten pairs of airflow values (Inw [Differential
pressure] and FPM [velocity])
Percent Max Flow
Percentages of maximum flow for the
following categories:
Window
Reheat
Minimum
Maximum
Standby
Press
Depress
Purge
Warmup
Flow Sensor
Type
List of tables that contains manufacturers'
specifications for airflow units. Each table
has 10 pairs of airflow values versus feet
per minute or feet per second. When a
sensor is selected from the table, the
airflow values are set to the default specific
to the chosen sensor.
Edit Column
This list has Velocity and Volume options.
You can select Velocity, change the
velocity value and select Yes in Update
Alternate Column to update the volume
values. Alternatively, you can modify the
volume values and update the velocity.
Bypass Settings
Time
Bypass Time (in minutes, default is
180) is the time between the pressing
of the override button at the wall
module and the return to the original
occupancy state. When the Bypass
state is activated, the bypass timer is
set to the Bypass time.
Update Alternate You can choose:
Column Yes - If the other column needs to be
modified
No - If the other column does not need
to be modified
Type
Select either Normal or Bypass
Select either Last or Net.
Priority
Periph Min Pos
Percentage for peripheral valve
minimum position.
Excel 10 VAV II – Miscellaneous
Settings
Demand Limit Offset Degrees of offset for demand limit.
Activated when DestDlcShed is True
or active.
Use Table 67 to configure the Excel 10 VAV II miscellaneous
settings.
Temp Ramp Rate
Fan Flow Setpoint
Fresh Air Required
Ramp time for temperature.
Setpoint in cfm for fan flow.
Purpose
Define miscellaneous parameters for a VAV II Controller.
Amount of fresh air required in cfm.
FreshAirRatio is equal to FreshAirReq
divided by SrcBoxFlow. When
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the device On–line or
Off–line.
FreshAirRatio is large (greater than
100 percent), there is insufficient fresh
air being supplied to the zone even if
the supply air is 100 percent fresh air.
When FreshAirRatio is small, there is
sufficient fresh air being supplied to
the zone. FreshAirRatio is used for
coordination within the HVAC
Procedure
1. Click the Miscellaneous button on the left pane to open
the Miscellaneous Parameters page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Custom Wiring page or Back
to display the Flow Pickup Table page.
subsystem and energy management
decisions by the supply equipment.
Excel 10 VAV II – Custom Wiring
Settings
settings.
Purpose
To enable you to change the output pin configuration.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the device On-line or
Off-line.
95-7769—01
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
NOTE: Fields appearing grayed out indicate those fields that
change based on the Model Type selected on the
Configuration page.
Procedure
1. Click the Custom Wiring button on the left pane to
open the Custom Wiring page.
2. You can choose to change the default assignment.
Select Custom option in the Assignment Type list.
3. Select Default to revert back to the default assignment.
4. The number of outputs available for changing the
configuration depends on the model type. For a
W7751B Smart, only 4 output pins would be enabled.
5. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Configuring the Vacon NX Frequency
Converter (NXVFD)
VACON NX frequency converter (NXVFD) is an electronic
device for control of speed and torque of three-phase
alternating current (AC) motors. NXVFD converts the fixed
frequency and voltage of the main supply (mains) to a variable
frequency and voltage, which can then be regulated to provide
flexible motor operation and reduce energy consumption.
VACON NX frequency converters can be connected to the
LonWorks network using a field bus board.
6. Click Next to display the Wiring Diagram page or Back
to display the Miscellaneous Parameters page.
Excel 10 VAV II Custom Wiring Settings fields
The VACON NXOPTC4 option board is equipped with an
FTT-10A transceiver supporting the Free Topology
Table 68. VAV II Custom Wiring Settings.
transformer coupled network, which allows the network wire to
be connected as bus, star, loop or combination of these. The
converter can then be controlled, monitored and programmed
from the Host system. The LonWorks board shall be installed
in slot E on the control board of the frequency converter. The
converter can then be controlled, monitored and programmed
from the LONWORKS network.
Name
Definition
Selected Outputs All configured outputs
Configured
Outputs
Terminal positions available for the
Selected Outputs.
Default
Assignments
This list is filled with the default
assignment as the user configures the
outputs in the General page.
Configuring NXVFD settings
New
This list is by default filled with the same
options as Default Assignment. But, the
user has an option to change the outputs.
Assignments
IMPORTANT NOTE:
After the option card is installed, it is mandatory to
make the following settings for Control Place and
Frequency Reference:
Existing
Assignments
This list is filled with the outputs
assignment in the controller. This list would
show the actual assignment in the device if
the device is online. If not, it would just
show the values from the database.
1. Selection of Control Place –
The NXVFD device can be controlled from three
different places. They are (default control place is Key
Pad [panel]):
Output
Assignment
Choose one of the following options:
Default
•
•
•
I/O terminal
Key Pad (panel)
Fieldbus
Custom - Choose this option if you want to
over ride default assignments. This
enables the New Assignment column. The
number of output pins enabled depends on
the Model Type selected.
The Key Pad control of NXVFD device is used for
parameter setting, reading status data and giving control
commands.
Excel 10 VAV II – Wiring Diagram
The NXVFD has to be configured to select field bus as
control place before starting any of the operations
through the wizard. This configuration can be performed
using the Key Pad control provided along with device as
follows:
Purpose
Display the wiring diagram for the controller.
•
In the keypad, from the main menu, select the menu
called Keypad Control.
Select the submenu Control Place and set it to
Mode
•
Configuration can be performed with the device Off-line or
On-line.
FieldBus.
NOTE: None of the values sent (through fieldbus), by the
wizard will be considered until and unless the device
is configured with field bus as control place.
Procedure
1. Click the Wiring Diagram button on the left pane to
open the Wiring Diagram Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
2. Selection of Frequency Reference –
The NXVFD can be configured to select the frequency
reference from following different sources:
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Back to display the Custom Wiring page.
•
•
•
•
•
AI1
AI2
Keypad
Fieldbus
Configuring VFD NX Drive parameters
89
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
It is mandatory to set the option to Fieldbus for NXVFD
to consider the frequency setpoint from the wizard.
NXVFD Drive Parameters fields
Table 69. NXVFD Drive Parameters.
Min. Max. Typical
This configuration can be performed using the Key Pad
control provided along with device as follows:
Point
Name
Value Value Value
Description
•
In the keypad, from the main menu, select the menu
called Parameters.
Maximum
Speed
-163.84 163.83 100.0%
Maximum motor speed:
•
Select the submenu I/O Reference and set it to
FieldBus.
The value of the maximum
speed must be validated
against the value of the
minimum speed as follows:
NXVFD device supports the following types of
applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Basic Application
Standard Application
Local/Remote Control Application
PID Control Application
Multi-Step Speed Control Application
Multi-Purpose Control Application
Pump And Fan control Application
-163.84 <= minimum
speed <= maximum speed
<= 163.83
Minimum
Speed
-163.84 163.83 0.0%
Minimum motor speed:
The value of the minimum
speed must be validated
against the value of the
maximum speed as follows:
The basic control interface and the parameters are easy
to use. If a more versatile interface or parameters are
required, a more suitable application can be selected
from above application package.
-163.84 <= minimum
speed <= maximum speed
<= 163.83
Control I/O boards, which are either isolated (NXOPTA8)
or not isolated ((NXOPTA1) from the ground are
available.
Nominal
Speed
300
20000 1725 RPM Nominal motor speed in RPM:
3450 RPM
The used I/O can also be extended by the LONWORKS
option board:
1140 RPM Find this value on the rating
plate of the motor.
•
•
Eight digital inputs (standard signals)
Eight digital outputs (standard signals)
This configuration property is
used to provide the nominal
speed of the motor in RPM.
This value is necessary to
determine the minimum and
maximum speed for the motor,
based on the configuration
properties nciMinSpeed,
Configuring NXVFD Drive Parameters
Use the NXVFD configuration screen to configure the motor
parameters, transmission controller parameters, and
EEPROM saving option parameters.
nciMaxSpeed (entered as
percent of nominal speed).
Mode
Nominal
Frequency
30
320
60 Hz
50 Hz
Nominal motor frequency:
These parameters can be configured in both Off-line and
On-line modes from the wizard.
This configuration property is
used to provide the nominal
frequency for the motor.
Procedure
1. Click on the Configuration tab of NXVFD to open the
VFD Configuration screen.
Acceleration 0.1
Time
3000.0 30 sec.
3000.0 30 sec.
Minimum ramp up time:
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
Defines the acceleration time
for Vacon NX.
Deceleration 0.1
Time
Minimum ramp down time:
Defines the decel.eration time
for Vacon NX
95-7769—01
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 69. NXVFD Drive Parameters. (Continued)
Point Min. Max. Typical
Each Analog Input may be configured as Analog or Digital.
Analog Inputs configured as Analog can receive Input from
various types of sensors. Analog Inputs configured as Digital
can only receive digital signals as inputs
Name Value Value Value
Description
Default -163.84 163.83 0%
Default value for
Drive
Speed
Scale
nviDrvSpeedScale:
DIGITAL INPUTS
Digital Inputs are used to monitor external events, such as
contact closures (10 mA, 5Vdc). The contact closures initiate
alarms, monitor equipment status, and read pulse meters.
These inputs are commonly used as inputs to Control Loops,
Start /Stop Loops, Math Functions & Logic Loops.
It provides scaling for
nviDrvSpeedStpt.
Negative values of
nviDrvSpeedScale indicate
reverse (anti clockwise)
direction of motor rotation.
Each Digital Input can be configured as Maintained,
Momentary, Counter Slow, Counter Fast, Pulse Meter.
This value will be adopted at
power-up and in case of not
receiving any input variable
within the specified Receive
Heartbeat time.
An external digital input source is connected to the digital
input.
Poll Points
The XL15C controller utilizes poll points as a means to
retrieve data from other network devices. Data retrieved by a
poll point is available for linking to XL15C objects such as
math functions, control loops, logic loops, and start/stop loops.
Configuring the XL15C Plant
Controller (XL15C)
The XL15C plant controller is designed to control HVAC
equipment and other miscellaneous loads in a distributed
control network. You can configure plant controller functions
such as start/stop loops, control loops, user-defined setpoint
values, math, and logic functions.
The XL15C polls each point every two seconds. If the
response is not received within ten seconds the poll is
changed to once every 30 seconds. When the response is
received the poll rate returns to once every 2 seconds.
The XL15C controller supports a maximum of 20 poll points.
Control Functions
Purpose
•
•
•
•
•
10 Control Loops
Specify the attributes for up to eight analog inputs and the
sensor types and attributes for up to eight digital inputs.
8 Start/Stop Loops
32 Logic Loops
32 Math Functions
6 Special Network Functions
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Navigating to XL15C Pages
To navigate to XL15C pages:
1. On the left pane click the required device name. The
Device Configuration page appears.
2. Click the Configuration tab. The Configuration page
appears.
Limits
Analog Input: One XL15C Plant controller supports up to
eight analog inputs (AI1 through AI8) as follows: 0 to 8,000
ohms (+-10 ohms), 0 to 10V dc, 4 to 20 mA, using an exter-
nal 500 ohm resistor with a 2-10V dc input, digital sensing
(contact closure).
Configuring the XL15C Controller
The options for configuring the XL15C Controller are as
follows:
Digital Input: Two of the four digital inputs can be configured
as counters. A counter counts the number of active inputs
within the range of 1 through 65,535. Pulse No. 65,536
automatically resets the counter to 0.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Local Inputs
SetPoints (Loop Logic)
Math Functions
Control Loops
Logic Loops
Start Stop Loops
Outputs
Procedure
1. On the Configuration page click the Local Inputs tab.
The Local Inputs page appears on the right pane.
2. To configure the Analog Inputs.
Configuring XL15C Local Inputs
The XL15C controller has 8 Analog Inputs and 8 Digital
Inputs.
a. Select the input channel from Select Input.
b. Type a name in Input Name.
c. Select required input from Input Kind. The input
kind must be one of the following types for an ana-
log input:
ANALOG INPUTS
Analog Inputs are used to monitor external conditions, such
as temperature, humidity or pressure. These inputs are
commonly used for monitoring and as inputs to Control Loops,
Start /Stop Loops, Math Functions & Logic Loops.
•
•
•
Unconfigured (default)
Resistive
Voltage
91
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
•
•
•
20KNTC
Digital Active Short
Digital Active Open
put together). The pulse must last for at least 20
milliseconds frequency must not be greater than
15 Hz.
Pulsemeter - At the most two digital inputs can
be configured as Pulsemeters. If 2 DIS are
configured as Pulsemeter, power from both will
be summed.
•
NOTE: The Analog Inputs may be configured as analog or
digital.
d. Select an Engineering Units. This list is enabled
when the Analog Input is configured as Resistive or
Voltage. The measurement types are listed here.
When you select an Engineering Units option, the
corresponding Engineering unit appear in the Sen-
sor fields.
e. Select an Engineering Unit.
The Engineering Unit list contains all the engineer-
ing units you can assign to a digital input. Engineer-
ing Unit is enabled only for Input Kind of Maintained
and Momentary and disabled for all others.
f. Select a State.
e. Type the Input Low, Input High, Output Low and
Output High. The following fields are available:
The state option has 2 choices: Normally Open and
Normally Closed. By default, normally open is
selected. Normally open = Off when the input con-
tact is open and On when closed. Normally closed =
Off when the input contact is closed and On when
open.
•
•
•
•
Input Low
Input High
Output Low
Output High
g. Select a Type.
NOTE: For standard sensors like PT_3000, 20_KNTC and
so on the values are filled in automatically.
The type option has 2 choices: Unconfigured and
Sensor occupancy. The type option is enabled only
for Input Kind of Maintained and Momentary and
disabled for all others.
f. Select the Input Type if the input is to be shared
across the network. The following Input Types are
available:
h. If the Input Kind selected is Pulsemeter then
Scale Factor field is enabled. Type the scaling fac-
tor. The scale factor is enabled only when the Input
Kind selected is Pulsemeter. The scale factor has a
range of 0 – 1000 KWHR/pulse.
•
•
•
•
Other
OutdoorAirTemp
OutdoorAirHumidity
DischargeAirTemp
4. To configure the Poll Points
The type selection can be made based on the selected
sensor. For example, if the selected sensor is PT_3000, the
type cannot be OutdoorAirHumidity.
a. Select the required poll point from Select Poll
Point.
b. Type a Poll Point Name.
c. Select a controller from Source Device. This
selects a controller which provides the input to the
XL15C's algorithm.
An Input type assigned to one Analog Input cannot be used
again for another Analog Input. For example, if you select
OutdoorAirTemp for Analog Input_1 it cannot be a selection of
any other Analog Input. To select OutdoorAirTemp (for say
Analog_Input_2), the selection for Analog_Input_1 needs to
be changed to Other.
d. Select the network variable from Source NV.
e. Select the field from Source NV Field. This selects
the field from which the data is accessed.
f. Create a link between the poll point object and the
internal object. The appropriate link option displays
the slots available on the source and destination
object. For example, Click Control Loops and
select appropriate Link Type and Link Name.
g. Select an appropriate source slot/link (for example,
Analog link) on the poll point and select an appropri-
ate destination slot/link (for example, Sensor Link)
on the destination object.
3. To configure the Digital Inputs.
a. Click the Digital Inputs tab.
b. Select the digital channel from Select Input.
c. Type a name in Input Name.
d. Select required input from Input Kind. The input
kind can be one of the following types:
•
•
•
•
Unconfigured
DigitalMaintained
DigitalMomentary
NOTE: Since these points are polled by the XL15C
controller, it is not required to perform a bind
operation.
Counter Slow – They are capable of counting the
number of transitions on the digital input within
the range of 1 through 65,535. The 65,535th
pulse will automatically reset the counter back to
0. At the most two digital inputs can be
configured as Counters (both counter slow/fast
put together). The pulse must last for at least
1.25 seconds frequency must not be greater than
0.4 Hz.
Configuring XL15C Setpoints
The XL15C controller has 40 setpoints. These are points
internal to the XL15C controller for which a value and
engineering unit may be set. They may be used as predefined
Analog Inputs to SS loop, Control loop, Logic loop and math
functions.
•
Counter Fast - They are capable of counting the
number of transitions on the digital input within
the range of 1 through 65,535. The 65,535th
pulse will automatically reset the counter back to
zero (0). At the most two digital inputs can be
configured as Counters (both counter slow/fast
Setpoints may be used to provide analog inputs to Start/Stop
Loops, Control Loops, Logic Loops and Math Functions.
Setpoint values are constants that may be changed from an
operator interface.
95-7769—01
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
The control portion of the loop is an Enhanced PID (EPID)
algorithm. The user configures control algorithm type (PID or
Non-linear), bias (position of set point within the proportional
band (i.e. 0% or 50%), direct/reverse acting output, which
sensor and outputs to use, throttling range, integral time,
derivative time, start up ramp time, recovery, reset and
sequencer parameters, set points, minimum on, off and
bypass times, DLC shed bump and lead/lag.
Purpose
To configure setpoint values for the XL15C.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Procedure
Purpose
1. On the Configuration page click SetPoints [Loop
Logic]. The Set Point page appears on the right pane.
2. Type a Float Value. There are 40 setpoints. Enter the
value of the setpoint in this field. The setpoint has a
default value of 0 by default. The valid ranges for a
setpoint are -99999 to +99999 with 5 digits maximum
and a resolution of 0.0001.
Define up to ten control loops that create outputs based on
algorithms.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
3. Select Engineering Units. This list contains
engineering units that may be assigned to the setpoint.
Select the desired engineering unit from the list.
Procedure
1. On the Configuration page click Control Loop. The
Control Loop page appears on the right pane.
2. Select a control loop from Select Loop.
Configuring XL15C Math Functions
You can configure a maximum of 30 math functions. Math
functions are of two types: General Purpose and Network
Special. The General Purpose math function operates on a
maximum of six floating point analog inputs. These Inputs can
be a physical or remote point value, set point, output of a flex,
logic loop, or a math function. You can in turn specify the math
functions output to be used by any flexible, logic loop, or a
math function.
3. Type a Loop Name.
4. Select Algorithm Type. This field defines the algorithm
type for the control loop. The default type is
“Unconfigured”. The user can select the type to be “Flex
PID” or “Flex Non-Linear”. Only if the algorithm type is
“Flex PID” or “Flex Non-Linear” will the other controls in
the Control Loop page get enabled. Select the
corresponding radio button to select an algorithm type.
5. Select a priority from Occupancy Override Priority.
The two options for occupancy override priority are:
A minimum of two analog inputs need to be selected if you are
configuring a Network Special math function.
•
With Network wins (the default), nviManOcc has
priority. If nviManOcc is some other value than
OC_NUL, then the result is the value on
Purpose
General Purpose Math functions are used to perform
operations like minimum, average, square root etc. on up to 6
floating point analog values available within the controller.
nviManOcc. When nviManOcc is OC_NUL, then
nviBypass has priority. If nviBypass is SW_OFF/
SW_NUL then the wall module override is
evaluated. Both nviManOcc and the wall module
override use the internal bypass timers. nviBypass
depends upon the other node’s timer to control the
duration of the bypass. The Excel 15C keeps the
loop bypass_timer running while nviBypass is
SW_ON. If nviBypass goes away before the timer
expires, then the loop remains in bypass for the
balance of the timer.
With Last in Wins, the last bypass source is used to
determine the state. If multiple sources change the
state in the same second, they are evaluated in
order: nviManOcc, nviBypass, wall module override.
Each second the algorithm looks for an update to
either nviManOcc, a change of state to nviBypass,
or the wall module override being pushed. If any of
these occur, then appropriate action is taken. Else,
the bypass timer is checked for expiration and the
current state returned.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Procedure
1. On the Configuration page click Math Functions. The
Math Function page appears on the right pane.
2. Select a required math function from Select Function.
3. Type a Function Name.
•
4. Select an operator from Select Operator.
Configuring XL15C Control Loops
The XL15C controller may be configured for up to 10 Control
Loops.
In the simplest form, a Control Loop reads a sensor (i.e. the
control sensor) and calculates an output to maintain the
sensed value at a user defined set-point. There are many
variations of this. For inputs, the user can configure control,
reset, recovery, occupancy, enable/disable, and TOD bypass
sensors. For outputs, the users may configure up to 4
modulating analog outputs, up to 4 stages for each analog
output and an auxiliary digital output for controlling a fan or
pump.
6. Select/Type information for the following.
a. Input & Setpoints
•
Inputs: Used to configure the inputs required for
the Control Loop.
•
Setpoints: Control Loop can host separate
setpoints apart from main 40 setpoints. These
are used to drive the occupancy state of the
control loop.
93
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
•
Setpoint Override: A configured setpoint
it to three separate analog outputs. Each of the
sequenced analog outputs ranges from 0 to
100%. The uses are controlling heating,
economizer and cooling, or converting the
primary EPID analog output into more stages.
The Sequencer 1 (Heat) Start field represents
start (x) percent of Sequencer
overrides the existing setpoint if the
corresponding Digital Input is TRUE. The Digital
Input1 maps to Setpoint1, Digital Input2 maps to
Setpoint2, vice versa.
b. Loop Configuration
•
Reset: Control loops allow the setpoint (only in
occupied mode) to reset either in the direction of
increased energy savings or in the direction of
the increased comfort. The reset of a control loop
is dependent on the analog reset sensor input.
The Zero Reset Sensor Value is the minimum
value above which the reset action occurs. The
engineering unit is the reset sensor engineering
unit. The Max Reset Sensor Value is the
maximum value below which the reset action
occurs. The Max Reset Amount is the value
subtracted from the setpoint when the setpoint is
reset as per the reset sensor input.
Recovery: This is used to calculate the ramp
rate at which it must reach the setpoint.
Control Params: This is used to configure the
EPID loop.
Auxiliary: The Aux D.O.is always intermittent for
unoccupied mode. The options available are
Continuous and Intermittent. The On Time is the
minimum ON time for the auxiliary digital output.
It ranges from 0 to 254 minutes with a resolution
of 1 minute. The Off Time is the minimum OFF
time for the auxiliary digital output. It ranges from
0 to 254 minutes with a resolution of 1 minute.
SetPoint Alarms:
The Sequencer1 (Heat) End field represents
end (y) percent of Sequencer 1.
The Sequencer2 (Econ) Start field represents
start (x) percent of Sequencer 2.
The Sequencer2 (Econ) End field represents
end (y) percent of Sequencer 2.
The Sequencer3 (Cool) Start field represents
start (x) percent of Sequencer 3.
The Sequencer3 (Cool) End field represents
end (y) percent of Sequencer 3.
For example,
•
•
•
Sequencer 1 (Heat) Start: x = 0% y = 100%.
Sequencer 1 (Heat) End: x = 33% y = 0%.
Sequencer 2 (Econ) Start: x = 33% y = 0%.
Sequencer 2 (Econ) End: x = 66% y = 100%.
Sequencer 3(Cool) Start: x = 66% y = 0%.
Sequencer 3 (Cool) End: x = 100% y = 100%.
Staging
The Stage1-4 are used to control equipment with
ON and OFF states. Up to 4 digital outputs can
be assigned to each of the 4 analog outputs (16
total). Typically, the user would either assign 4
digital outputs to the primary analog output or up
to 12 digital outputs to the three sequenced
analog outputs. It can be configured as local or
remote digital outputs. The pseudo point can also
be selected.
•
•
The Alarm Pre Delay represents the time
required for the main sensor input value to be
beyond the range set by the Alarm Delta Above
setpoint or Alarm Delta Below setpoint (before
the SET_POINT_LOOP_ALARM is set). The
range is 0 to 65460 seconds with a resolution of
1 second
The Lead Lag selection is used to equally share
the run time of the equipment among the stages.
The XL15C keeps track of run time by counting
the ON time every minute.
The Alarm Post Delay represents the time
required for the main sensor input value to be
within the range set by the Alarm Delta Above
setpoint or Alarm Delta Below setpoint (before
the SET_POINT_LOOP_ALARM return to
Normal is set). The range is 0 to 65460 seconds
with a resolution of 1 second.
The Minimum On Time is the minimum time for
each staged digital output to be ON at a
resolution of 1 minute. It ranges from 0 to 254
minutes.
The Minimum Off Time is the minimum time for
each staged digital output to be OFF at a
resolution of 1 minute. It ranges from 0 to 254
minutes.
The Alarm Delta Above Setpoint value
establishes the Alarm high limit for the main
sensor input. If the main sensor input value
increases above the effective setpoint value plus
the Alarm Delta Above Setpoint Value and
remains above for Alarm pre-delay time period
then a SET_POINT_LOOP_ALARM is set.
The Alarm Delta Below Setpoint value
establishes the Alarm low limit for the main
sensor analog input. If the main sensor input
value decreases below the effective setpoint
value minus the Alarm Delta Below Setpoint
value and remains below for Alarm pre-delay
time period then a SET_POINT_LOOP_ALARM
is set.
The Integral stage On Time is the interstage ON
time for the staged digital outputs at a resolution
of 1 minute. It is the time a lower numbered stage
must be ON before the next stage can turn ON. It
ranges from 0 to 254 minutes.
The Integral stage Off Time is the interstage OFF
time for the staged digital outputs at a resolution
of 1 minute. It is the time when a higher
numbered stage must be OFF before the next
stage can turn ON. It ranges from 0 to 254
minutes.
Configuring XL15C Logic Loops
The XL15C controller has 32 Logic Loops. Each configured
Logic Loop generates outputs by applying logic functions on
different analog and digital inputs selected. These logic loop
outputs are commonly used as inputs to control loops, start/
stop loops, and math functions.
c. Sequencer & Stager
Sequencer: The sequencer configuration values
•
x1, x2, y1, and y2 determine the conversion from
the primary control loop (EPID) to the three
sequencer analog outputs. The sequencer takes
the primary (EPID) analog output value and splits
95-7769—01
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
•
•
On Delay Time: The delay in time for switching
from one state to another before the output value
switches to ON.
Off Delay Time: The delay in time for switching
from one state to another before the output value
switches to OFF.
Purpose
To configure logic loops.
Procedure
1. On the Configuration page click the Logic Loops tab.
The Logic Loops page appears on the right pane.
2. Select a logic loop from Select Loop.
•
DCAO: Digital Compare Analog Output - Sets the
output value to equal analog input_1 if digital input is
true and analog input_2 if the digital input is false.
DCAO must be configured if the Logic Loop analog
output is to be used. Click the DCAO button to open
the DCAO Configuration dialog box.
•
•
•
3. Type a Loop Name. There are 32 Logic Loops. Default
name for the Logic Loops are Logc_Loop_1,
Logc_Loop_2, etc. The Logic Loop names can be
changed to make each Loop easier to identify. Select
the name to be changed in the Logic Loop name combo
and type the new name. A Logic Loop name can have a
maximum of 18 characters.
Digital Input: Select a Link Type and Link Name
for digital inputs.
Analog Input 1 and 2: Select a Link Type and
Link Name for analog inputs.
On Delay Time: The delay in time for switching
from one state to another before the output value
switches to ON.
Off Delay Time: The delay in time for switching
from one state to another before the output value
switches to OFF.
4. Select/Type the following options.
•
ACDO: Analog Compare Digital Output - Compares
(<, >, or =) the values of 2 analog inputs and sets
the output to true or false. 3 ACDO buttons
(ACDO1,ACDO2,and ACDO3) are available in each
Logic Loop. Click an ACDO button to open the
ACDO Configuration dialog box.
•
•
•
Analog Input 1 and 2: Select a Link Type and Link
Name for analog inputs.
Configuring XL15C Start Stop Loops
Analog Compare: This is used to compare the two
configured inputs. The logic usually is greater than,
less than, or equal to.
Engineering Units: The measurement types are
listed here. When you select an Engineering Units
option, the corresponding Engineering unit appear
in the Sensor fields.
Compare Deadband: The amount of difference
between the input values where the output state
does not switch.
There are eight start/stop loops The start/stop control loops
direct control of loads based on time-of-day schedules. The
most common applications for start/stop control loops include
exhaust fans, pumps, lighting, or any other loads requiring
time-of-day control.
•
•
Purpose
To specify up to eight start/stop loops.
•
Output = ON when the condition is true (when
the condition between Input 1 and Input 2 is true)
Output = OFF when the input 1 compared to
input 2 minus the deadband is false.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
•
•
•
•
On Delay Time: The delay in time for switching from
one state to another before the output value
switches to ON.
Off Delay Time: The delay in time for switching
from one state to another before the output value
switches to OFF.
AND: Logical AND function - If and only if all
configured digital input conditions (3 maximum) are
true, the output will be on. Three AND buttons
(AND1, AND2, and AND3) are available in each
Logic Loop. Click an AND button to open the And
Configuration dialog box.
Procedure
1. On the Configuration page click Start Stop Loops.
The Start Stop Loop page appears on the right pane.
2. Select the required loop from Select Loop. There are
eight start/stop loops available. Select one to begin
configuring (SS_LOOP_1 through SS_LOOP_8).
3. Type the Loop Name. Loops are named SS_LOOP_1,
SS_LOOP_2, and so on. To change the name, type
over it and then click Change Name. Name the start/
stop loop according to the device being controlled. The
name can have a maximum of 18 characters.
•
Digital Input 1, 2, and 3: Select a Link Type and
Link Name for digital inputs.
4. Select the Link Type and Link Name for Bypass. The
bypass sensor (TOD) allows the user to place the Start/
Stop loop into occupied mode for a timed duration,
which depends on the Bypass Time value. The bypass
input changes the state to occupied. The bypass input
must remain true for the loop to remain in the bypass
state for the timed duration.
5. Select the Link Type and Link Name for Disable Loop.
This input is to control the Start/Stop loop. The disable
input disables the start/stop loop if the DI assigned to it
is ON and enables the loop if this DI assigned to it is
OFF. The Output is OFF when the loop is disabled.
6. Select the required Occupancy Override Period.
•
On Delay Time: The delay in time for switching
from one state to another before the output value
switches to ON.
•
Off Delay Time: The delay in time for switching
from one state to another before the output value
switches to OFF.
•
OR: Logical OR function - If any one of the
configured digital input conditions (6 maximum) are
true, the output will be ON. OR must be configured if
the Logic Loop digital output is to be used. Click the
OR button to open the OR Configuration dialog
box.
•
Network_Wins: Equipment on/off times will follow
network schedule.
•
Digital Input (1 through 6): Select a Link Type
and Link Name for digital inputs.
•
Last_One_Wins follows the last override request.
95
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
7. Select the following time options:
a. Choose the output to be defined. There are two pos-
sible analog outputs. Click the down arrow to view
the list of outputs. Select each one, one at a time,
and specify its attributes.
b. Select the analog output from Select Output.
c. Type a Output Name.
d. Select the required output from the Output Kind
field. The Output Kind must be one of the following
types for analog output:
•
•
•
Min On Time: Default minimum on time for
equipment is 5 minutes. Enter new value, if
necessary, according to manufacturer’s
recommendations. Specified range is 0 to 254
minutes.
Min Off Time: Default minimum off time for
equipment is 5 minutes. Enter new value, if
necessary, according to manufacturer’s
recommendations. Specified range is 0 to 254
minutes.
Bypass time: Default bypass time is 180 minutes.
Enter number of minutes the equipment will be in
occupancy mode when a bypass is triggered.
Specified range is 0 to 1080 minutes.
•
•
•
Unconfigured
Analog
Digital
e. Select the Engineering Units.
f. Select the Link Type and Link Name.
g. Type the output values for 0% & 100% output from
the control loop.
3. To configure Digital Outputs:
Configuring XL15C Analog and Digital Outputs
a. Select the digital output from Select Output. There
are eight Digital Outputs in XL15A. Default digital
output names are DIGITAL_ OUTPUT 1,
DIGITAL_OUTPUT2, and so on. The name can be
changed to make each output easier to identify. A
digital output name can have a maximum of 18
characters. No duplicate digital output names are
allowed within the page and across pages.
b. Type an Output Name.
Analog Outputs
The XL15C controller has 6 Analog Outputs.
Analog Outputs are used to control variably driven controller
devices, such as damper actuators, valve actuators, variable
speed fans, step controllers and other transducers. The
analog outputs are 4-20 mA current outputs (max. load 600
ohms) with a 7+ bit resolution.
c. Select the required output from the Output Kind
field. State of digital output. The output state could
be one of the following types for a digital output:
Each Analog output may be configured as Analog or Digital.
Analog outputs configured as Analog can drive an analog load
and one configured as Digital can drive a digital load.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unconfiured·
Digital·
PWM·
Float_Close1·
Float_Close2·
Float_Open1·
Float_Open2
Digital Outputs
The XL15C has 8 Digital Outputs.
Digital Outputs are often used to control lighting, fans, and
HVAC equipment.
NOTE: At the most four digital outputs can be configured as
two float pairs. If a digital output is configured as
Float_Open then another digital output must be
configured as Float_Close.
Each Digital output may be configured as Digital, PWM or
Float. Digital outputs configured as Digital can drive an digital
load and one configured as PWM or Float can drive an analog
load.
d. Select the Engineering Units.
e. Select the Link Type and Link Name.
f. Select the Output State.
Purpose
Configure an analog and digital output to match the output
device and the control algorithm.
The Output State option has two choices: Ener-
gized On and Energized Off. Default selection is
Energized On. Point type is enabled when output
kind is Digital.
Mode
g. Type the Motor Speed.
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
h. Select the Position Start-Up Synchronization.
i. Type the output values for 0% & 100% output from
the control loop.
Limits
4. To configure Remote AO, select the Link Type and
Link Name for the remote analog output.
5. To configure Remote DO, select the Link Type and
Link Name for the remote digital output.
6. To configure Network Outputs, select Link Type and
Link Name for various Nvo modes. These include
NvoApplMode, NvoOccupancy, NvoEconEnale,
NvoCoolUTML, and NvoHeatUtml.
The analog outputs can be configured as digital outputs,
however, the digital load must not exceed the 500 ohm
maximum.
Procedure
1. On the Configuration page click the Outputs tab. The
Outputs page appears.
2. To configure Analog Outputs:
95-7769—01
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
•
•
•
KeyPad/Display
Setpoints
Equipment Control
Configuring the T7350 Thermostat
Controller (T7350)
The T7350 is a full-featured Commercial programmable
thermostat. The primary opportunity for a Commercial
thermostat is in buildings with less than 55,000 square feet.
These buildings include restaurants, shopping malls, office
buildings and banks. Commercial thermostats are used on
single zone rooftop units, split systems, heat pumps or hot/
chilled systems.
Configuring the General Page
Use Table 70 and the General page to configure the
thermostat model, equipment type, outputs, inputs, day light
savings details.
Mode
The electronic thermostat consists of two pieces, the cover
assembly and a subbase. The subbase(s) include the
equipment control connections. The subbase is mounted on
the wall and the thermostat cover assembly is mounted on the
sub base. Different subbases will be used for different
applications including; up to Three Heat/Three Cool or Two
Heat/Four Cool, modulating outputs, and dehumidification
high limit control. Each subbase is compatible with the
common cover assembly.
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Procedure
1. Click the General button on the left pane to open the
General Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Keypad/Display
Configuration page.
Navigating to T7350 pages
Go to the Devices tab. Expand the list of devices on the left
pane (listed under WebVision). Select a device to view its
properties.
T7350 General Configuration fields
See Table 70.
T7350 Configuration Options
The options for configuring a T7350 Controller are as follows:
•
General
Table 70. T7350 General Configuration Fields
Name
Definition
Thermostat
Model
The T7350 Communicating Subbase(T7350CS) comes in two models, T7350H1009 and T7350H1017.
T7350H1009: This subbase is the Three Heat/Three Cool model. It allows for conventional or heat pump
operation. A total of 8 relays are available with the thermostat cover assembly and subbase. The auxiliary relay
may be configured for an economizer, TOD, or dehumidification. The subbase may be configured for 3 Heat/ 3
Cool or 2 Heat/ 4 Cool by using the third stage of heat for an additional stage of cooling.
T7350H1017: This subbase is the modulating subbase. A total of 4 relays are available with the thermostat cover
assembly and subbase. The auxiliary relay may be configured for an economizer, TOD, dehumidification or an
additional stage of heating and cooling.
See the Outputs section of this table on page 99 for description on these relays.
Equipment
Type
This field specifies the operation in which this subbase is used. When the thermostat model is selected as
T7350H1009, the equipment type can be selected as Standard or Heat Pump. The T7350H1009 subbase allows
for conventional or heat pump operation.
When the model is selected as T7350H1017, the equipment type is changed to Standard and this option is
disabled for selection. When the T7350H1017 model type is selected, the Heat Action and Cool Action options
under Outputs are enabled for selection. The modulating subbase does not allow for heat pumps.
Inputs
This section allows you to configure the inputs to the thermostat.
97
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 70. T7350 General Configuration Fields (Continued)
Definition
Name
Room
Temp
This option allows the user to configure the source of room temperature input to the thermostat. The T7350
thermostat is equipped with its own internal room temperature sensor. The sensor operating range is 30 to 110 °F.
The T7350 thermostat is compatible with the following Honeywell Wall Modules:
T7770A1006
T7770B1046
T7770C1044
T7770D1000
T7771
Options available are
Local: Configure as local if the internal temperature sensor on the thermostat is to be used to sense the room
temperature.
T7770A/D: The models T7770A1006 and T7770D1000 have only temperature sensors, and have no setpoint
knob. Select this option when one of these family of wall modules are connected.
T770B/C: The wall modules T770B1046 and T770D1000 have temperature sensors with setpoint knobs,
override button and a LED.
T7771: The T7771 wall module will have a temperature sensor, override button but instead of a setpoint knob,
it will have an up/down buttons and 7 LEDs to indicate (-3 to +3 °F) the user has selected.
Network: Select this option if the space temperature is obtained over the network from other controllers. You
have to create appropriate bindings for the input.
NOTE: Open, short or out-of-range on the internal or remote room temperature sensor input (s) to the
thermostat will cause the outputs to be turned off. The fault detection is done only on the sensor being
used. That is, if the internal (local) sensor is being used, faults on the remote sensor are ignored.
Room
Humidity
Use this option to configure the source of room humidity input to the thermostat. Options available are:
None: Select this option when dehumidification is not required. When this option is selected, if the Aux DO
output is configured as Simple Dehumid or Dehumid Hotgas BP, it is defaulted to Time Of Day option and the
Simple Dehumid, Dehumid Hotgas BP options are not available for selection. The Dehumidification High Limit
and Dehumidification Options in the Setpoints page are disabled.
Local: The thermostat has an internal room relative humidity sensor, which has the range of 5% to 105%RH.
For humidity less that 5% and above 105%, the sensor will show invalid and there will be a sensor fail alarm.
Remote: A remote humidity sensor can be hard-wired to the thermostat. Select this option when the humidity
input is required from a remote sensor. The thermostat is compatible to H7631A1000 (0 to 10V) or equivalent
sensors.
Network: Select this option when the humidity input is required over the network from other controllers. You
have to create appropriate bindings for the input.
Discharge
Air Temp
Use this field to configure the source for discharge air temperature input. The following options are available:
None: Select this if discharge temperature sensor is not connected. When this option is selected, the Enable
Heating DAT HiLimit and Enable Cooling DAT Low Limit in Equip Control page are disabled.
Remote: Select this option if a discharge air temperature sensor is hard-wired to the thermostat. The
thermostat is compatible with the C7770A1006, C7031B1033, C7031C1031, and C7031J1050 (averaging)
20K NTC temperature sensor elements (20 K ohms at 77 °F).
Outdoor
Air Temp
Use this field to configure the source for outdoor air temperature input. The following options are available:
None: Select this if outdoor air temperature sensor is not connected. When this option is selected, the Enable
Heating OAT Lockout and Enable Cooling OAT Lockout options in the Equip Control page, cool and heat OAT
at Min Ramp and OAT at Max Ramp fields in Setpoints page are disabled.
Remote: Select this option if an outdoor air temperature sensor is hard-wired to the thermostat. The
thermostat is compatible with the following Honeywell outdoor air sensors: C7170A1002 and C7089A1002
PT3000 PTC temperature sensor element (3484 ohms at 77 °F)
Network: Select this option when the outdoor air temperature input is required over the network from other
controllers. You have to create appropriate bindings for the input.
Occupancy
Sensor
Use this field to configure the source for occupancy input. The following options are available:
None: Select this if occupancy sensor is not connected.
Remote: Select this option if an occupancy sensor is hard-wired to the thermostat.
Network: Select this option when the occupancy input is required over the network from other controllers. You
have to create appropriate bindings for the input.
95-7769—01
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 70. T7350 General Configuration Fields (Continued)
Name
Daylight
Savings
Definition
Use this option to configure the settings for daylight savings. The following describes each field:
Enable Daylight Savings: This option is enabled by default. Disable this option if the daylight savings feature
is not required to be followed by the thermostat. Deselecting this option will disable the Start Month, Stop
Month, Start Day and Stop Day fields.
Start Month: This field is available for configuration only if the Enable Daylight Savings option field is
selected. Its default value is April. Change this option according to the daylight savings settings in the country
where the thermostat is installed.
Start Day: This field is available for configuration only if the Enable Daylight Savings option field is selected.
Its default value is First Sunday. Change this option according to the daylight savings settings in the country
where the thermostat is installed.
End Month: This field is available for configuration only if the Enable Daylight Savings option is selected. Its
default value is October. Change this option according to the daylight savings settings in the country where the
thermostat is installed.
Start Day: This field is available for configuration only if the Enable Daylight Savings option is selected. Its
default value is Last Sunday. Change this option according to the daylight savings settings in the country
where the thermostat is installed.
Configuration When you click this button, the button label is replaced by a 16 character alphanumeric number/code with every
ID
2 digits separated by a period. This code represents the configuration information that define the equipment that
is connected to the thermostat. This code can be entered through the thermostat keypad using the installer
configuration:
Press the Run and Copy buttons simultaneously and navigate to the code. You are presented with a number
identified by C1. Enter the first 2 digits of the configuration ID that the wizard has generated. Continue entering
2 digits each for C2 through C8. Save this code using the Run button.
The configuration in the thermostat is changed to that in the wizard. The thermostat installer set up allows the
user to enter the configuration through the keypad. When the Configuration ID button is pressed the wizard
derives the configuration string that user can enter into the thermostat through keypad. This way, the
configuration in thermostat is same as it is the wizard with respect to inputs, outputs, setpoints, loop tuning
parameters, energy management parameters, bypass time.
Outputs
Use this section to configure outputs.
Heat/Cool
Stages
Use these fields to configure the number of heat stages and cool stages for the application that the subbase is
being used for.
Equipment
Type
Default
Value
Outputs
Heat Stages
Model
Number of Stages Available for Configuration
T7350H1009 Standard
Three Stage
•
•
•
•
None
One Stage
Two Stage
Three Stage (Not available if configured for
4 stages of cooling)
T7350H1017 Standard
Heat Enable
•
•
•
Heat Enable
One Stage
Two Stage (Used as auxiliary relay or
second stage of heat or cool relay. Not
available if used as second stage of cooling)
Aux Heat Stages
Cool Stages
T7350H1009 Heat Pump One Stage
•
•
•
None (No auxiliary heating)
One Stage (of auxiliary heat)
Two Stage (of auxiliary heat)
T7350H1009 Standard
T7350H1017 Standard
Three Stage
Cool Enable
•
•
•
•
None
One Stage
Two Stage
Three Stage
•
•
•
Heat Enable
One Stage
Two Stage (Used as auxiliary relay or
second stage of heat or cool relay. Not
available if used as second stage of
heating)
Compressor Stages T7350H1009 Heat Pump Two Stage
•
•
•
None
One Stage
Two Stage
99
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 70. T7350 General Configuration Fields (Continued)
Definition
Name
Heat/Cool
Stages
(continued)
When the model is selected as T7350H1009 and the equipment type as Standard, the tool allows to configure for
up to three stages of heating and three stages of cooling. The fourth stage of cooling is available for selection as
long as the 0/1/2 heat stages are selected. When the fourth stage of cooling is selected, the third stage of heating
is no longer available.
When the model is selected as T7350H1009 and the equipment type is selected as Heat Pump, you will have
option to configure for 0/1/2 auxiliary heating stages and 0/1/2 compressor stages. One relay is used for heat
pump reversing valve.
When the model is selected as T7350H1017, you can configure for 0/1/2 heat or cool stages. The modulating
outputs are always active. They are always being driven 0-100%. When the number of stages is 0, the relay
outputs are used to enable the heating or cooling outputs. Staged action may be used in addition to the
modulating outputs. The number of stages is set to 1 or 2. It is not possible to have both 2 stages of heating and
cooling.
Examples:
1. Selecting heating stages and cooling stages as 1 configures for modulating heat and modulating cool
action.
2. To have Mod heat, heating pump enable relay and 1 stage of heating, configure Heat Stages as Heat
Enable, Heat Action (depends on the actuator connected) and connect the relay W1 such that it turns the
heating pump ON or OFF.
Aux DO
Use this option to configure the auxiliary outputs. The auxiliary DO can be configured for economizer, Time Of
Day or for dehumidification. The dehumidification options available are Simple dehumid or Dehumid Hotgas BP.
In the case of T7350H1017 model type, the auxiliary DO can be configured for second stage of heating or
cooling. In that case, it cannot be configured for the above mentioned purposes and hence the option is disabled
in the screen.
NOTE: The dehumid options (Simple dehumid or Dehumid Hotgas BP) are available for configuration only if a
humidity sensor is configured.
Heat Pump
Rev Value
This option is available for T7350H1009 model when the Equipment Type is selected as Heat Pump.
The options available are:
Active Cooling
Active Heating
Select Active Cooling when the O/B valve is energized on cooling or Active Heating if the O/B valve is energized
on heating. If the standard application is configured, this option is not available.
Heat
Action
This option is available for model is configured as T7350H1017 only.
This is disabled when the model is selected as T7350H1009. This is applicable for modulating heat output, that is
when the Heat Stages option is configured as Heat Enable.
Select Direct 4-20mA if the actuator connected for heating action is driven from 0-100% and Reverse 20-4mA if is
driven from 100-0%.
Cool
Action
This option is available for model is configured as T7350H1017 only.
This is disabled when the model is selected as T7350H1009. This is applicable for modulating cool output, that is,
when the Cool Stages option is configured as Cool Enable.
Select Direct 4-20mA if the actuator connected for cooling action is driven from 0-100% and Reverse 20-4mA if is
driven from 100-0%
Configuring the Keypad/Display page
Procedure
Use the KeyPad/Display Configuration page to configure
the keypad lockout level, display temperature unit in the
thermostat, time display format, system switch configuration
and fan switch configuration.
1. Click the Keypad button on the left pane to open the
Keypad/Display Configuration page.
page 101).
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Setpoints Configuration
page or Back to display the General Configuration
page.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
95-7769—01
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Keypad/Display Configuration fields
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
Table 71. Keypad/Display Configuration Fields.
Name
Definition
Procedure
Keypad Lockout Use this option to configure the keypad
lockout enable/disable through special
keypad sequence on the thermostat.
Enable All: Selecting this option will allow
the user to access any keys on the
thermostat. No lockout will be imposed.
Enable Setpoints & Override: This option
will lockout all keys except Temporary
Occupied, Temporary Not Occupied,
increase and decrease and information
key.
1. Click the Setpoints button on the left pane to open the
Setpoints Configuration page.
2. Enter information into available fields.
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Equipment Control
Configuration page or Back to display the Keypad/
Display Configuration page.
T7350 Heating and Cooling Setpoints
each setpoint.
Info Key Only: This option will lockout all
keys information key
Display Units
Use this option to configure the display
units in the thermostat for temperature
fields.
Table 72. Heating and Cooling Setpoints.
Degrees F: Select this option to set the
display unit for temperature fields as
degrees Fahrenheit.
Degrees C: Select this option to set the
display unit for temperature fields as
degrees Centigrade.
Min. and
Default Max.
Setpoint
Cool
Unoccupied (29 °C) (7-37 °C) • Display resolution:
Value Ranges
Description
85 °F 45-99 °F Unoccupied cooling setpoint
Stpt
1 °F/°C.
Clock Display
System Switch
Use this to configure the display mode of
time in the thermostat.
12 Hour (AM/PM): Selecting this option will
display the thermostat time in 12 hour
format.
24 Hour: Selecting this option will display
the thermostat time in 24 hour format
•
Unoccupied Cool >=
Occupied Cool >=
Occupied Heat +2 °F
(1 °C)
Unoccupied Cool >=
Standby Cool >= Standby
Heat +2 °F (1 °C)
•
Use this option to configure the system
operation of the thermostat.
OFF: When this option is selected, heat
Cool
Standby
Stpt
78 °F 45-99 °F Standby cooling setpoint
(26 °C) (7-37 °C) • Display resolution:
1 °F/°C.
and cool states are disabled.
•
Unoccupied Cool >=
Standby Cool >= Standby
Heat +2 °F (1 °C)
AUTO: The thermostat is configured for
Automatic Changeover. When this option
is selected, heating and cooling stages are
enabled to maintain heating and cooling
setpoints.
Cool: When this option is selected, cooling
stage operates on call for cooling. Heating
stages are disabled.
Heat: When this option is selected, heating
stage operates on call for heating. Cooling
stages are disabled.
Emergency Heat: This option is available
only when the equipment type is selected
as Heat Pump. Auxiliary heat serves as
stage one. Compressor stages are locked
off.
Cool
Occupied
Stpt
75 °F 45-99 °F Occupied cooling setpoint
(24 °C) (7-37 °C) • Display resolution:
1 °F/°C.
•
Unoccupied Cool >=
Occupied Cool >=
Occupied Heat +2 °F
(1 °C)
Max Occupied Cool >=
Occupied Cool >=
Occupied Heat +2 °F
(1 °C)
•
Heat
Occupied
Stpt
70 °F 40-90 °F Occupied heating setpoint
(21 °C) (4-32 °C) • Display resolution:
1 °F/°C.
•
Unoccupied Heat <=
Occupied Heat <=
Occupied Cool -2 °F
(1 °C)
Min Occupied Heat <=
Occupied Heat <=
Occupied Cool -2 °F
(1 °C)
Configuring the Setpoints page
Use the Setpoints Configuration page to configure the
heating and cooling setpoints, energy management features,
dehumidification features, recovery setpoints and bypass
timer.
•
101
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 72. Heating and Cooling Setpoints. (Continued)
HIGH LIMIT
Use this to specify the high limit for the dehumidification to
start.
Min. and
Default Max.
Setpoint
Heat
Standby
Value Ranges
Description
Any combination of the following 3 strategies is allowed:
67 °F 40-90 °F Standby heating setpoint
(19 °C) (4-32 °C) • Display resolution:
1 °F/°C.
•
•
•
Dehumidification using Minimum On Time
This option is available to configure only when the humidity
input is configured on the General page. This is the
minimum time the auxiliary relay configured for dehumidifi-
cation is ON. When this option is selected, user will be
provided with an option to configure the minimum on time
ranging from 5 to 15 minutes.
Stpt
•
Unoccupied Heat <=
Standby Heat <= Standby
Cool -2 °F (1 °C)
Heat
55 °F 40-90 °F Unoccupied heating setpoint
Unoccupied (13 °C) (4-32 °C) • Display resolution:
Stpt
1 °F/°C.
Dehumidification using Reheat. (not supported on
subbase 4)
This option is available to configure only when the humidity
input is configured on the General page. When this is
selected, the thermostat switches on the first heating stage
when the dehumidification is required. This option is avail-
able for only T7350H1009 model type.
•
Unoccupied Heat <=
Occupied Heat <=
Occupied Cool -2 °F
(1 °C)
Unoccupied Heat <=
Standby Heat <= Standby
Cool -2 °F (1 °C)
•
Dehumidification using Reset Temp Setpt
Min
Heat
Occupied
Stpt
55 °F 40-90 °F Lowest the programmed
(13 °C) (4-32 °C) occupied heating setpoint
can be allowed.
This option is available to configure only when the humidity
input is configured on the General page. When this is
selected, user is allowed to specify a temperature value.
When this option is selected, the thermostat reduces the
effective cooling temperature setpoint by the amount spec-
ified by the user.
•
Display resolution:
1 °F/°C.
Min Occupied Heat <=
Occupied Heat <=
Occupied Cool -2 °F
(1 °C)
•
The dehumidify setpoint must be smaller than the difference
between the cooling and heating occupied setpoints and the
difference between the cooling and the heating standby
setpoints. When one of these setpoints change, the wizard
automatically adjusts the dehumid reset setpoint such that the
above condition is satisfied.
Max
Cool
Occupied
Stpt
85 °F 45-99 °F Highest the programmed
(29 °C) (7-37 °C) occupied cooling setpoint
can be allowed.
•
Max Occupied Cool >=
Occupied Cool >=
Occupied Heat +2 °F
(1 °C)
When Reset Temp Setpt and Reheat option are selected, the
wizard displays a warning message, but proceeds with this
configuration.
T7350 Energy Management
RECOVERY
The thermostat allows the adaptive intelligent recovery ramp
to the next setpoint during schedule mode changes.
DEMAND LIMIT CONTROL BUMP
Configure the DLC bump according to the heating and cooling
requirement of the building from one of the options given
below. When a shed request is received, the thermostat
bumps the control set point up for cooling and down for
heating by the amount this field is configured in a thermostat.
The shed state remains until a DLC restore command is
received or network communication is lost. When the unit
transitions from shed to restore, the set point is ramped back
to the original set point over a period of 60 minutes. The
control only sheds when the thermostat is in the occupied
mode.
Use the Setpoints screen to configure the recovery
parameters. Set point recovery will apply to set point changes
associated with the following schedule mode changes:
•
•
Unoccupied to Standby
Unoccupied to Occupied
Setpoint changes from occupied mode or standby mode to
unoccupied mode, occupied mode to standby mode and
standby to occupied will use a step change in setpoint. The
heating or cooling recovery ramp will begin before the next
mode transition time. During the recovery ramps, the heating
and cooling set points will be ramped from the existing mode
setpoint to the next mode setpoint.
POWER FAILURE SEQUENTIAL START
Configure the value for power sequential start by choosing
one of the options 0 to 150 seconds. This allows the
thermostat to delay start of the fan heating and cooling stages
after power is restored to thermostat. After a power outage, it
is desirable to start multiple units sequentially instead of all at
once to avoid peak in power consumption.
There are two standard options available for choosing the
heating and cooling ramp rates: Single Recovery and Variable
Recovery Ramp Rate.
For heating or cooling recovery, minimum and maximum
recovery ramp rates are provided. Making both of these the
same is called Single Recovery. Making these rates different
is called Variable Recovery.
DEHUMIDIFICATION
Use this field to configure a dehumidification strategy. If the
system is in heat mode, dehumidification is not allowed.
95-7769—01
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
MINIMUM RAMP RATE
NOTE: This data is applicable when the unoccupied
setpoints change to occupied or standby modes.
Minimum Cool and heat recovery ramp rates are selectable
from 0 to 20 DDF/hr. (0 to 11 DDC/hr.). A ramp rate of 0
means no recovery ramp (the setpoint steps from one setpoint
to the other).
When the setpoint changes from occupied or standby mode to
unoccupied mode or when the minimum or maximum ramp
rates are 0, there will be step change in the setpoint.
The recovery ramp rate will vary as a function of outdoor
temperature.
BYPASS
The temporary override time is the maximum time the
controller stays in the occupied mode, when its unoccupied
mode was overridden and put in bypass mode. This value is
selectable from 1 to 8 hours.
MAX RAMP RATE
Maximum Cool and heat recovery ramp rates are selectable
from 0 to 20 DDF/hr. (0 to 11 DDC/hr.). A ramp rate of 0
means no recovery ramp (the setpoint steps from one setpoint
to the other). This field is enabled only if the outdoor air
temperature input is configured on the General Page.
When no outdoor air temperature sensor is available, the
minimum recovery ramp rate is used. The recovery ramps
have the following configuration parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Minimum heating recovery ramp rate.
Maximum heating recovery ramp rate.
Minimum heating outdoor air temperature.
Maximum heating outdoor air temperature.
Minimum cooling recovery ramp rate.
Maximum cooling recovery ramp rate.
Minimum cooling outdoor air temperature.
Maximum cooling outdoor air temperature.
OAT MIN RAMP
The minimum and maximum outdoor corresponds to the
minimum and maximum recovery rate. Configure the Outdoor
air temperature setpoint for cool and heat recovery at which
the minimum rate is equal to the value specified in the cool
and heat ‘Min Ramp Rate’ fields. The value is configurable
from –20 to 100 °F (-29 to 38 °C). This option is available to
configure only if the outdoor air temperature input on the
General page is configured.
T7350 Equipment Control
OAT MAX RAMP
The minimum and maximum outdoor corresponds to the
minimum and maximum recovery rate. Configure the Outdoor
air temperature setpoint for cool and heat recovery at which
the maximum rate is equal to the value specified in the cool
and heat ‘Max Ramp Rate’ fields. The value is configurable
from –20 to 100 °F (-29 to 38 °C). This option is available to
configure only if the outdoor air temperature input on the
General page is configured.
Configuring Equipment Control Page
Use the Equip Control Configuration page to configure the
heating and cooling selections and loop tuning parameters.
Mode
Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off-line or
On-line.
RECOVERY LEAD TIME INFORMATION
Procedure
The setpoint ramp will be at the target setpoint 10 minutes
prior to the occupied/standby event time. This allows the
HVAC equipment an extra 10 minutes to get the space
temperature to the target setpoint during recovery. (The
T7300 series 1000 did a similar method). Based on the heat
and cool setpoints configured and the minimum and maximum
ramp rates configured, the wizard automatically calculates the
lead time information for both cool and heat recovery ramps
and displays it in this section.
1. Click the Equip Control button on the left pane to open
the Equip Control Configuration page.
page 104).
3. Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to
the last saved settings.
4. Click Next to display the Scheduling page or Back to
display the Setpoints page.
103
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
T7350 Equipment Control fields
Table 73. T7350 Equipment Control Fields.
Definition
Name
Heating
Fan On with Heat
Selections This field specifies the selection of fan operation
OFF with Heat
The equipment (i.e. plenum switch) controls the fan operation in heat mode. The thermostat controls the fan
operation in cool mode.
ON with Heat
The thermostat controls the fan operation in both heat and cool modes.
Extended Fan Operation
Use this option to configure the time for extended fan operation after heating turns off. The choices are No Extend
Op (0) or Extend 90 sec (90 sec.).
Heating Cycling Rate
Use this option to configure the heating cycling option for standard or fast response systems. Available choices are:
Slow 3 cph (standard response), Med 6 cph (medium), Fast 9 cph (fast), and Fast!! 20 cph (super fast).
Enable Heating OAT Lockout
This option is enabled only if the outdoor air temperature input is configured in the General page. This enables the
heating lockout based on the outdoor air temperature.
Heating OAT Lockout
This option is available only if the outdoor air temperature input is configured in the General page and Enable
Heating OAT Lockout is selected. If outdoor air temperature is greater than Heat Lockout Setpoint then the heating is
locked out.
Enable Heating DAT Hi Limit
This option is enabled only if the discharge air temperature input is configured in the General page. This will enable
the usage of the discharge air high limit.
Heating DAT Hi Limit
This option is available only if the discharge air temperature input is configured in the General page and Enable
Heating DAT Hi Limit is selected.
Cooling
Extended Fan Operation
Selections Use this option to configure the time for extended fan operation after cooling turns off. The choices are No Extend Op
(0) or Extend 40 sec (40 sec.).
Cooling Cycling Rate
This option allows the user to configure the cooling cycling option for standard or fast response systems. Available
choices are: Std 3 cph (standard response), Fast 4 cph (fast).
Enable Cooling OAT Lockout
This option is enabled only if the outdoor air temperature input is configured in the General page. This will enable the
cooling lockout based on the outdoor air temperature.
Cooling OAT Lockout
This option is available only if the outdoor air temperature input is configured in the General page and Enable
Cooling OAT Lockout is selected. If outdoor air temperature is less than the Cooling OAT Lockout setpoint then
cooling is locked out.
Enable Cooling DAT Low Limit
This option is enabled only if the discharge air temperature input is configured in the General page. This enables the
usage of discharge air low limit.
Cooling DAT Low Limit
This option is available only if the discharge air temperature input is configured in the General page and Enable
Cooling DAT Low Limit is selected.
95-7769—01
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 73. T7350 Equipment Control Fields. (Continued)
Definition
Name
Loop
Tuning
This section allows the user to configure the loop tuning parameters.
Throttling Range
Use this screen to configure the heat and cool throttling ranges. The wizard automatically modifies the heat and cool
throttling ranges when the number of stages configured is changed.
For a conventional RTU:
•
•
Cool Stages = configured cool stages
Heat Stages = configured heat stages
For a heat pump RTU:
•
•
Cool Stages = configured compressor stages (cool stages)
Heat Stages = configured compressor stages (cool stages) + Configured Aux heat stages
If you change the number of stages to zero, the throttling range remains unchanged.
The heat and cool throttling range values are selectable from 1 to 30 °F (1 to17 °C). If you enter an invalid value, the
wizard automatically modifies it to nearest valid value.
NOTE: Throttling range remains always at 5 for T7350H1017.
See below for throttling default values for the number of stages:
Heat/Cool Stages
1
3
2
4
3
7
4
8
Default Throttling Range (degrees)
Integral Time
Use this to configure the heat and cool integral time values. The wizard automatically modifies the heat and cool
throttling ranges when the number of stages configured is changed. Refer the following table for the default values of
integral time values for different stages.
If you change the number of stages to zero, the integral time remains unchanged.
A value of 0 means that the integral time is disabled.
Valid range is 100 to 5000 seconds. 0 also is a valid value. Values from 1 to 99 are invalid values. If you enter an
invalid value, the wizard automatically modifies it to nearest valid value.
NOTE: Integral time remains always at 1250 for T7350H1017.
See below for integral time default values for the number of stages:
Heat/Cool Stages
1
2
3
4
Default Integral Time (seconds)
3100 2500 1650 1250
Derivative Time
Use this to configure the heat and cool derivative time for PID loop tuning. The value is selectable from 10 to 3000
seconds. 0 also is a valid value. A value of 0 means derivative time is disabled. If you enter an invalid value, the
wizard automatically modifies it to nearest valid value.
Anticipator Authority
Configure the anticipator authority value. You can enter a value between 2 and 15. The default value is 4.
Select the Apply to Heat only field if it is to be applied for heating only.
105
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
APPENDIX B – DEVICE POINT TABLES
This appendix provides a table for the points detail and a table
for the application of points of the following controllers and
devices:
•
•
Constant Volume Air Handling Unit Controller
(CVAHU) ..............................................................page 114
Fan Coil Unit Controller (FCU) ........................... page 122
Vacon NX Frequency Converter (NXVFD) ......... page 138
Excel 10 VAV II Controller (VAV II) ...................... page 145
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
W7763C/D/E Chilled Ceiling
Controller (CHC)
page 107 provides the CHC application of points.
Table 74. CHC Point Details.
Network Variable
nciSetPnts
Point Name
Field Name
occupiedCool
Point Type
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
EnumWritable
SNVTSwitch
Occupied Cool
Standby Cool
nciSetPnts
nciSetPnts
nciSetPnts
nciSetPnts
nciSetPnts
nviTodEvent
nviTodEvent
nviTodEvent
nviDlcShed
nvoStatus
standbyCool
unoccupiedCool
occupiedHeat
standbyHeat
unoccupiedHeat
currentState
nextState
Unoccupied Cool
Occupied Heat
Standby Heat
Unoccupied Heat
Current State
Next State
Time To Next State
DLC Shed
timeToNextState
DlcShed
Out Of Limits
outOfLimits
Open Circuit
nvoStatus
openCircuit
Out Of Service
Mechanical Fault
Feedback Failure
Over Range
nvoStatus
outOfService
mechanicalFault
feedbackFailure
overRange
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
Under Range
nvoStatus
underRange
electricalFault
unableToMeasure
commFailure
failSelfTest
Electrical Fault
Unable To Measure
Command Failure
Self Test Failed
Application Mode
Fan Speed
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
nviApplicMode
nviFanSpeedCmd
nviRequest
nviManOccCmd
nviSetPoint
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
hvacMode
Manual Mode
objectRequest
occupancy
tempP
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Manual Occupancy
Temporary Setpoint
Effective Setpoint
Alarm Type
activeSetPt
alarmType
95-7769—01
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 74. CHC Point Details. (Continued)
Network Variable Field Name
nvoChcStatus
Point Name
Condensation State
Point Type
condensationState
coolOutput
EnumPoint
Cool Output
nvoUnitStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoChcStatus
nvoTerminalLoad
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
Cool Temperature
DLC Shed
coolTemp
dlcShed
Economizer Output
Effective Occupancy
Effective Sensor Occupancy
Effective Window Open
External Active
econOutput
effectOcc
effSenOcc
effWindowOpen
externalActive
fanFeedback
fanOutput
Fan Feedback
Fan Output
Fan Stages Active
HW Override
fanStagesActive
hwOverride
hwWindowOpen
humidity
HW Window Open
Humidity
Manual Occupancy
Unit Status Mode
CHC Status Mode
Output Position 1
Output Position 2
Primary Heat Output
RO LED
netManOcc
mode
mode
outputPosition1
outputPosition0
heatOutputPrimary
rOLed
Reheat Active
reheatActive
restBypassTime
schedOcc
Reset Bypass Time
Scheduled Occupancy
Secondary Heat Output
Sensor Occupancy
Space Temperature
Terminal Load
heatOutputSecondary
hwSenOcc
spaceTemp
levPercent
Table 75. CHC Application of Points.
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Occupied Cool (Setpoint)
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Standby Cool (Setpoint)
Unoccupied Cool (Setpoint)
Occupied Heat (Setpoint)
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
107
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 75. CHC Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Standby Heat (Setpoint)
Unoccupied Heat (Setpoint)
Current State
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Next State
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Time To Next State
DLC Shed
X
X
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
dlcShedDisable
dlcShedEnable
Out Of Limits
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
Open Circuit
Out Of Service
Mechanical Fault
Feedback Failure
Over Range
Under Range
Electrical Fault
Unable To Measure
Command Failure
Self Test Failed
Application Mode
X
X
X
X
Default
Auto
Heat
Morning Warmup
Cool
Night Purge
Pre-cool
Off
Test
Emergency Heat
Fan Only
Free Cool
Ice
Maximum Heat
Economy
Dehumidify
Calibrate
Emergency Cool
Emergency Steam
Max Cool
HVAC Load
No Load
95-7769—01
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 75. CHC Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Fan Speed
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
X
X
X
X
Off
Zero
Low
Medium
High
Auto
Manual Mode
X
X
X
X
Default
Normal
Disabled
Update Status
Self Test
Update Alarm
Report Mask
Override
Enable
Remove Override
Clear Status
Clear Alarm
Alarm Notify Enabled
Alarm Notify Disabled
Manual Control
Remote Control
Program
Clear Reset
Reset
Manual Occupancy
X
X
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Temporary Setpoint
Effective Setpoint
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=-273.2
Max=327.7
109
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 75. CHC Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Alarm Type
X
X
X
Node Off
Frost
Invalid Setpoint
Temperature Sensor Restored
Setpoint Knob Restored
Fan Speed Switch Restored
Fan Normal
SpaceTemp Com Restored
HVAC Mode Com Restored
Setpoint Offset Com Restored
Sched Occ Com Restored
DLC Communication Restored
Relative Humidity Com Restored
Outdoor Temp Com Restored
Occ Sensor Com Restored
Window Com Restored
Manual Heat Com Restored
Manual Cool Com Restored
Cool Temp Com Restored
Water Too Cold
Condensation Normal
rtnReserve022
rtnReserve023
rtnReserve024
Alarm Notify Disabled
No Alarm
Node Off
Frost
Invalid Setpoint
Temperature Sensor
Alarm Type
(continued)
X
X
X
Failed
Setpoint Knob Failed
Fan Speed Switch Failed
Fan Failure
SpaceTemp Com Failed
HVAC Mode Com Failed
Setpoint Offset Com Failed
Sched Occ Com Failed
DLC Communication Failed
Relative Humidity Com Failed
Outdoor Temp Com Failed
Occ Sensor Com Failed
Window Com Failed
Manual Heat Com Failed
Manual Cool Com
Failed
Cool Temp Com Failed
Water Too Cold
Condensation Alarm
almReserve022
almReserve023
almReserve024
Condensation State
Cool Output
X
X
X
X
X
X
No Condensation
Condensation
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Cool Temperature
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=-273.2
Max=327.7
95-7769—01
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 75. CHC Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
DLC Shed
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Restored or Shed
X
X
X
X
X
X
Economizer Output
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Effective Occupancy
X
X
X
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Effective Sensor Occupancy
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Effective Window Open
External Active
Fan Feedback
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Closed or Open
Inactive or Active
Failure or Running
Fan Output
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Fan Stages Active
HW Override
X
X
X
X
X
X
Fan Off
Fan Speed 1
Fan Speed 2
Fan Speed 3
Fan Auto
Fan Default
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
HW Window Open
Humidity
X
X
X
X
X
X
Closed or Open
Units=%RH
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Manual Occupancy
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
111
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 75. CHC Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Unit Status Mode
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
X
X
X
Default
Auto
Heat
Morning Warmup
Cool
Night Purge
Pre-cool
Off
Test
Emergency Heat
Fan Only
Free Cool
Ice
Maximum Heat
Economy
Dehumidify
Calibrate
Emergency Cool
Emergency Steam
Max Cool
HVAC Load
No Load
CHC Status Mode
X
X
X
Disabled
Cool
Heat
Pressurize
Depressurize
Manual Mode
Factory Test Mode
Floating Out of Sync
Fan Switch Off
Startup Wait
Output Position 1
Output Position 2
Primary Heat Output
RO LED
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Reheat Active
X
X
X
X
X
X
Default
Off
Low
Medium
High
On
Reset Bypass Time
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
95-7769—01
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 75. CHC Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Scheduled Occupancy
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Secondary Heat Output
Sensor Occupancy
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Space Temperature
Terminal Load
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=-273.2
Max=327.7
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
113
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Constant Volume Air Handling Unit
Controller (CVAHU)
page 115 provides the CVAHU application of points.
Table 76. CVAHU Point Details
Network Variable
nciTempSetPts
Display Name
Field Name
occupiedCool
Point Type
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumPoint
Occupied Cool
Standby Cool
nciTempSetPts
nciTempSetPts
nciTempSetPts
nciTempSetPts
nciTempSetPts
nviTodEvent
nviTodEvent
nviTodEvent
nviDlcShed
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nviApplMode
nviManualMode
nviManOcc
standbyCool
unoccupiedCool
occupiedHeat
standbyHeat
unoccupiedHeat
currentState
nextState
Unoccupied Cool
Occupied Heat
Standby Heat
Unoccupied Heat
Current State
Next State
Time To Next State
DLC Shed
timeToNextState
dlcShed
Air Flow Loss
LossAirFlow
FreezeStat
Coil Freeze State
Dirty Filter
EnumPoint
DirtyFilter
EnumPoint
Frost Protect Alarm
Indoor Air Quality Override
Input Nv Fail
FrostProtectAlarm
IAQOverride
InputNvFail
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
Invalid Setpoint
InvalidSetPoint
LowLimEconClose
NodeDisabled
SensorFailure
hvacMode
EnumPoint
Low Limit Economizer Close
Node Disabled
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
Sensor Failure
EnumPoint
Application Mode
Manual Mode
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumPoint
manMode
Manual Occupancy State
Temporary Setpoint
Fan Mode
occupancy
nviSetPoint
nciConfig
tempP
FanMode
Auxiliary Economizer Out
Bypass Timer
nvoData1
AuxEconOut
BypassTimer
CalcODEnthalpy
CalcRAEnthalpy
CoilFreezeStat
coolOutput
nvoData2
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Calculated Outdoor Air Enthalpy
Calculated Return Air Enthalpy
Coil Freeze State
Cool Percent
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoUnitStatus
nvoData2
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Cool Position
CoolPos
Cool Stages On
DLC Shed
nvoData1
CoolStagesOn
DlcShed
nvoData1
Data1 Field No
nvoData1
FieldNo
EnumPoint
Data2 Field No
nvoData2
FieldNo
EnumPoint
Dirty Filter
nvoData1
DirtyFilter
EnumPoint
Discharge Air Temperature
Discharge Setpoint
Economizer Enable
Economizer Float Synch
nvoData2
DischargeTemp
DischargeSetPt
EconEnable
EconFloatSynch
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData1
EnumPoint
95-7769—01
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 76. CVAHU Point Details (Continued)
Network Variable Field Name
nvoData2
Display Name
Economizer Position
Point Type
EconPos
NumericPoint
Effective Occupancy
Effective Setpoint
Fan Status
nvoData1
nvoEffectSetPt
nvoData1
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoUnitStatus
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData1
EffectOcc
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
tempP
FanOn
Filter Air Pressure
Free1 Out
FilterPressure
Free1Out
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Free2 Out
Free2Out
EnumPoint
Heat Percent
heatOutputPrimary
HeatPos
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Heat Position
Heat Stages On
HeatStagesOn
IaqOverRide
OverRide
Indoor Air Quality Override
Manual Override
Mode
EnumPoint
mode
EnumPoint
Monitor Switch
MonSwitch
Monitor1
EnumPoint
Monitor1
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Network Manual Occupancy
Occupancy Sensor
Occupancy Status Out
Occupancy Time Clock
Outdoor Enthalpy
Outdoor Humidity
Outdoor Temperature
Proof of Air Flow
Return Air Enthalpy
Return Air Humidity
Return Air Temperature
Scheduled Occupancy
ShutDown
NetManOcc
SenOcc
EnumPoint
OccStatusOut
OccTimeClock
OutdoorEnthalpy
OutdoorHumidity
OutdoorTemp
ProofAirFlow
ReturnEnthalpy
ReturnHumidity
ReturnTemp
SchedOcc
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
ShutDown
EnumPoint
Smoke Monitor
SmokeMonitor
SpaceCo2
EnumPoint
Space Co2
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Space Temperature
Temperature Control Point
Water Source Heat Pump Enable
Window Open
SpaceTemp
TempControlPt
WSHPEnable
WindowOpen
EnumPoint
Table 77. CVAHU Application of Points.
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Occupied Cool (Setpoint
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Standby Cool (Setpoint)
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
115
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 77. CVAHU Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Unoccupied Cool (Setpoint)
Occupied Heat (Setpoint)
Standby Heat (Setpoint)
Unoccupied Heat (Setpoint)
Current State
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
X
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Next State
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Time To Next State
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
DLC Shed
X
X
dlNoDlcShed
dlMinDlcShed
Air Flow Loss
False
True
Coil Freeze State
Dirty Filter
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
Frost Protect Alarm
Indoor Air Quality Override
Input Nv Fail
Invalid Setpoint
Low Limit Economizer Close
Node Disabled
Sensor Failure
95-7769—01
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 77. CVAHU Application of Points. (Continued)
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Point Name
Application Mode
Valid Values
X
X
X
X
Default
Auto
Heat
Morning Warmup
Cool
Night Purge
Pre-cool
Off
Test
Emergency Heat
Fan Only
Free Cool
Ice
Maximum Heat
Economy
Dehumidify
Calibrate
Emergency Cool
Emergency Steam
Max Cool
HVAC Load
No Load
Manual Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Enable
Disable
Manual
Suppress Alarms
Unsuppress Alarms
Set Discharge Air Config.
Clear Discharge Air Config.
Manual Occupancy State
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Temporary Setpoint
Fan Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Fan Auto
Fan Continuous
Auxiliary Economizer Out
Bypass Timer
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Calculated Outdoor Air Enthalpy
Calculated Return Air Enthalpy
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=BTU/lb
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Units=BTU/lb
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Coil Freeze State
Cool Percent
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
117
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 77. CVAHU Application of Points. (Continued)
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Point Name
Valid Values
Cool Position
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=0
Min=-128.0
Max=127.0
Cool Stages On
X
X
X
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=7.0
DLC Shed
X
X
X
X
X
X
Restored or Shed
Data1 Field No
Update All 1
Mode
Effective Occupancy
Override
Scheduled Occupancy
Occupancy Time Clock
Network Manual Occupancy
Sensor Occupancy
Economizer Enabled
Proof of Air Flow
Calculated Outdoor Enthalpy
Calculated Return Air Enthalpy
Heat Stages On
Cool Stages On
Free 1 Out
Free 2 Out
Occupancy Status Out
Fan On
Auxiliary Economizer Out
Economizer Floating Sync
DLC Shed
IAQ Override
Smoke Monitor
Window Open
Dirty Filter
Shutdown
Monitor Switch
Wshp Enable
Coil Freeze State
Update No. 1
Data2 Field No
X
X
X
Update All 2
Bypass Timer
Temperature Control Point
Space Temperature
Discharge Air Temperature
Discharge Air Setpoint
Return Air Temperature
Return Air Humidity
Return Air Enthalpy
Outdoor Air Temp
Outdoor Humidity
Outdoor Enthalpy
Filter Pressure
Space Co2
Monitor Volts
Cool Position
Heat Position
Economizer Position
Update No. 2
Dirty Filter
X
X
X
False or True
95-7769—01
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 77. CVAHU Application of Points. (Continued)
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Point Name
Valid Values
Discharge Air Temperature
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Discharge Setpoint
Economizer Enable
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Default
Off
Low
Medium
High
On
Economizer Float Synch
Economizer Position
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Units=%
Precision=0
Min=-128.0
Max=127.0
Effective Occupancy
Effective Setpoint
X
X
X
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=-273.2
Max=327.7
Fan Status
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Filter Air Pressure
Units=in/wc
Precision=1
Min=-32.0
Max=32.0
Free1 Out
Free2 Out
Heat Percent
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Off or On
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Heat Position
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=0
Min=-128.0
Max=127.0
Heat Stages On
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=7.0
Indoor Air Quality Override
Manual Override
X
X
X
X
X
X
False
True
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
119
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 77. CVAHU Application of Points. (Continued)
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Point Name
Valid Values
Startup Wait
Mode
X
X
X
Heat
Cool
Off
Disabled
Emergency Heat
Smoke Emergency
Freeze Protect
Manual
Factory Test
Fan Only
Monitor Switch
Monitor1
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Units=V
Precision=1
Min=-32.0
Max=32.0
Network Manual Occupancy
Occupancy Sensor
X
X
X
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Occupancy Status Out
Occupancy Time Clock
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Default
Off
Low
Medium
High
On
Outdoor Enthalpy
Outdoor Humidity
Outdoor Temperature
Proof of Air Flow
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=mA
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=127.5
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Default
Off
Low
Medium
High
On
Return Air Enthalpy
Return Air Humidity
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=mA
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=127.5
95-7769—01
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 77. CVAHU Application of Points. (Continued)
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Point Name
Valid Values
Return Air Temperature
X
X
X
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Scheduled Occupancy
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
ShutDown
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
False or True
Smoke Monitor
Space Co2
Units=ppm
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Space Temperature
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Temperature Control Point
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Water Source Heat Pump Enable X
Window Open
X
X
X
X
False or True
X
Closed or Open
121
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Fan Coil Unit Controller (FCU)
page 123 provides the FCU application of points.
Table 78. FCU Points Details
Network Variable
nciSetPnts
Point Name
Field
occupiedCool
Point Type
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
EnumPoint
Occupied Cool
Standby Cool
nciSetPnts
standbyCool
unoccupiedCool
occupiedHeat
standbyHeat
unoccupiedHeat
currentState
nextState
Unoccupied Cool
Occupied Heat
nciSetPnts
nciSetPnts
Standby Heat
nciSetPnts
Unoccupied Heat
Current State
nciSetPnts
nviTodEvent
nviTodEvent
nviTodEvent
nviDlcShed
nvoStatus
Next State
Time To Next State
DLC Shed
timeToNextState
DlcShed
Out Of Limits
outOfLimits
openCircuit
outOfService
mechanicalFault
feedbackFailure
overRange
underRange
electricalFault
unableToMeasure
commFailure
failSelfTest
selfTestInProgress
lockedOut
Open Circuit
nvoStatus
Out Of Service
nvoStatus
Mechanical Fault
Feedback Failure
Over Range
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
Under Range
nvoStatus
Electrical Fault
nvoStatus
Unable To Measure
Communication Failure
Fail Self Test
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
Self Test In Progress
Locked Out
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
Manual Control
Programming Failed
Application Mode
Temporary Setpoint
Fan Speed Value
Fan Speed State
Manual Occupancy
Effective Occupancy
HW Override
nvoStatus
manualControl
programmingFail
hvacMode
nvoStatus
nviApplicMode
nviSetPoint
nviFanSpeedCmd
nviFanSpeedCmd
nviManOccCmd
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
tempP
value
state
occupancy
effectOcc
hwOverride
schedOcc
EnumPoint
Scheduled Occupancy
Effective Sensor Occupancy
Manual Occupancy
Sensor Occupancy
RO LED
EnumPoint
effSenOcc
EnumPoint
netManOcc
hwSenOcc
rOLed
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
FCU Status Mode
Alarm Type
mode
EnumPoint
alarmType
EnumPoint
DLC Shed
dlcShed
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
Effective Window Open
HW Window Open
effWindowOpen
hwWindowOpen
95-7769—01
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 78. FCU Points Details (Continued)
Network Variable Field
nvoFcuStatus
Point Name
Fan Feedback
Point Type
fanFeedback
externalActive
fanStagesActive
outputPosition0
outputPosition1
reheatActive
activeSetPt
NumericPoint
External Active
Fan Stages Active
Output Position 0
Output Position 1
Reheat Active
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoFcuStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoTerminalLoad
nviManualMode
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Effective Setpoint
Space Temperature
Reset Bypass Time
Unit Status Mode
Primary Heat Output
Secondary Heat Output
Cool Output
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
spaceTemp
restBypassTime
mode
heatOutputPrimary
heatOutputSecondary
coolOutput
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Economizer Output
Fan Output
econOutput
fanOutput
In Alarm
inAlarm
Terminal Load
levPercent
Manual Mode
ManualMode
Table 79. FCU Application of Points
Point name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Occupied Cool (Setpoint)
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Standby Cool (Setpoint)
Unoccupied Cool (Setpoint)
Occupied Heat (Setpoint)
Standby Heat (Setpoint)
Unoccupied Heat (Setpoint)
Current State
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
123
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 79. FCU Application of Points (Continued)
Point name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Next State
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Time To Next State
X
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
DLC Shed
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Shed or Restore
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
Out Of Limits
Open Circuit
Out Of Service
Mechanical Fault
Feedback Failure
Over Range
Under Range
Electrical Fault
Unable To Measure
Communication Failure
Fail Self Test
Self Test In Progress
Locked Out
Manual Control
Programming Failed
Application Mode
X
X
X
X
Default
Auto
Heat
Morning Warmup
Cool
Night Purge
Pre-cool
Off
Test
Emergency Heat
Fan Only
Free Cool
Ice
Maximum Heat
Economy
Dehumidify
Calibrate
Emergency Cool
Emergency Steam
Max Cool
HVAC Load
No Load
Fan Speed State
X
X
X
X
Off
Zero
Low
Medium
High
Auto
95-7769—01
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 79. FCU Application of Points (Continued)
Point name
Manual Mode
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
X
X
X
X
Default
Normal
Disabled
Update Status
Self Test
Update Alarm
Report Mask
Override
Enable
Remove Override
Clear Status
Clear Alarm
Alarm Notify Enabled
Alarm Notify Disabled
Manual Control
Remote Control
Program
Clear Reset
Reset
Manual Occupancy
X
X
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Temporary Setpoint
Effective Setpoint
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=-273.2
Max=327.7
125
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 79. FCU Application of Points (Continued)
Point name
Alarm Type
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
X
X
X
Node Off
Frost
Invalid Setpoint
Temperature Sensor Restored
Setpoint Knob Restored
Fan Speed Switch Restored
Fan Normal
SpaceTemp Com Restored
HVAC Mode Com Restored
Setpoint Offset Com Restored
Sched Occ Com Restored
DLC Communication Restored
rtnComfailTempreset
Outdoor Temp Com Restored
Occ Sensor Com Restored
Window Com Restored
Manual Heat Com Restored
Manual Cool Com Restored
rtnHwSwMismatch
rtnReserve020
rtnReserve021
rtnReserve022
rtnReserve023
rtnReserve024
Alarm Notify Disabled
No Alarm
Node Off
Frost
Invalid Setpoint
Temperature Sensor Failed
Setpoint Knob Failed
Fan Speed Switch Failed
Fan Failure
SpaceTemp Com Failed
HVAC Mode Com Failed
Setpoint Offset Com Failed
Sched Occ Com Failed
DLC Communication Failed
almComfailTempreset
Outdoor Temp Com Failed
Occ Sensor Com Failed
Window Com Failed
Manual Heat Com Failed
Manual Cool Com Failed
almHwSwMismatch
almReserve020
almReserve021
almReserve022
almReserve023
almReserve024
Cool Output
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
DLC Shed
X
X
X
X
X
X
Restored or Shed
Economizer Output
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
95-7769—01
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 79. FCU Application of Points (Continued)
Point name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Effective Occupancy
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Effective Sensor Occupancy
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Effective Window Open
External Active
Fan Feedback
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Closed or Open
Inactive or Active
Failure or Running
Fan Output
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Fan Stages Active
HW Override
X
X
X
X
X
X
Fan Off
Fan Speed 1
Fan Speed 2
Fan Speed 3
Fan Auto
Fan Default
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
HW Window Open
In Alarm
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Closed or Open
False or True
Manual Occupancy
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Unit Status Mode
X
X
X
Default
Auto
Heat
Morning Warmup
Cool
Night Purge
Pre-cool
Off
Test
Emergency Heat
Fan Only
Free Cool
Ice
Maximum Heat
Economy
Dehumidify
Calibrate
Emergency Cool
Emergency Steam
Max Cool
HVAC Load
No Load
127
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 79. FCU Application of Points (Continued)
Point name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
FCU Status Mode
X
X
X
Disabled
Cool
Heat
Pressurize
Depressurize
Manual Mode
Factory Test Mode
Floating Out of Sync
Fan Switch Off
Startup Wait
Output Position 0
Output Position 1
Primary Heat Output
RO LED
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Reheat Active
X
X
X
Default
Off
Low
Medium
High
On
Reset Bypass Time
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Scheduled Occupancy
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Secondary Heat Output
Sensor Occupancy
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Space Temperature
Terminal Load
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=-273.2
Max=327.7
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
95-7769—01
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Hydronic Controller (HYD)
page 130 provides the HYD application of points.
Table 80. HYD Point Details.
Network Variable
nciSetPnts
Point Name
Field Name
occupiedCool
Point Type
Occupied Cool
Standby Cool
NumericWritable
nciSetPnts
standbyCool
unoccupiedCool
occupiedHeat
standbyHeat
unoccupiedHeat
currentState
nextState
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumPoint
Unoccupied Cool
Occupied Heat
Standby Heat
nciSetPnts
nciSetPnts
nciSetPnts
Unoccupied Heat
Current State
nciSetPnts
nviTodEvent
nviTodEvent
nviTodEvent
nviDlcShed
nvoStatus
Next State
Time To Next State
DLC Shed
timeToNextState
DlcShed
Out Of Limits
outOfLimits
openCircuit
outOfService
mechanicalFault
feedbackFailure
overRange
underRange
electricalFault
unableToMeasure
commFailure
failSelfTest
Open Circuit
nvoStatus
Out Of Service
Mechanical Fault
Feedback Failure
Over Range
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
Under Range
nvoStatus
Electrical Fault
Unable To Measure
Communication Failure
Fail Self Test
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
nvoStatus
Self Test In Progress
Locked Out
nvoStatus
selfTestInProgress
lockedOut
nvoStatus
Manual Control
Fan Speed
nvoStatus
manualControl
value
nviFanSpeedCmd
nviFanSpeedCmd
nviManOccCmd
nviSetPoint
nviApplicMode
nvoUnitStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoUnitStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
Fan Speed
state
Manual Occupancy
Temporary Setpoint
Application Mode
Unit Status Mode
Primary Heat Output
Secondary Heat Output
Cool Output
occupancy
tempP
hvacMode
mode
heatOutputPrimary
heatOutputSecondary
coolOutput
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Economizer Output
Fan Output
econOutput
fanOutput
In Alarm
inAlarm
Effective Occupancy
HW Override
effectOcc
hwOverride
schedOcc
EnumPoint
Scheduled Occupancy
Effective Sensor Occupancy
Manual Occupancy
Sensor Occupancy
EnumPoint
effSenOcc
EnumPoint
netManOcc
hwSenOcc
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
129
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 80. HYD Point Details. (Continued)
Network Variable Field Name
nvoHydStatus
Point Name
Point Type
EnumPoint
RO LED
rOLed
HYD Status Mode
Alarm Type
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoHydStatus
nvoTerminalLoad
nviManualMode
mode
EnumPoint
alarmType
EnumPoint
DLC Shed
dlcShed
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Effective Window Open
HW Window Open
Fan Feedback
effWindowOpen
hwWindowOpen
fanFeedback
externalActive
fanStagesActive
outputPosition0
outputPosition1
reheatActive
activeSetPt
spaceTemp
restBypassTime
levPercent
External Active
Fan Stages Active
Output Position 0
Output Position 1
Reheat Active
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Effective Setpoint
Space Temperature
Reset Bypass Time
Terminal Load
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Manual Mode
ManualMode
Table 81. HYD Application of Points.
Point name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Occupied Cool (SetPoint)
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Standby Cool (SetPoint)
Unoccupied Cool (SetPoint)
Occupied Heat (SetPoint)
Standby Heat (SetPoint)
Unoccupied Heat (SetPoint)
Current State
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
95-7769—01
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 81. HYD Application of Points. (Continued)
Point name
Next State
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Time To Next State
X
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
DLC Shed
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Shed or Restore
True or False
True or False
True or False
True or False
True or False
True or False
True or False
True or False
True or False
True or False
True or False
True or False
True or False
True or False
Out Of Limits
Open Circuit
Out Of Service
Mechanical Fault
Feedback Failure
Over Range
Under Range
Electrical Fault
Unable To Measure
Communication Failure
Fail Self Test
Self Test In Progress
Locked Out
Manual Control
Application Mode
X
X
X
X
Default
Auto
Heat
Morning Warmup
Cool
Night Purge
Pre-cool
Off
Test
Emergency Heat
Fan Only
Free Cool
Ice
Maximum Heat
Economy
Dehumidify
Calibrate
Emergency Cool
Emergency Steam
Max Cool
HVAC Load
No Load
Fan Speed
X
X
X
X
Off
Zero
Low
Medium
High
Auto
131
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 81. HYD Application of Points. (Continued)
Point name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Manual Mode
X
X
X
X
Default
Normal
Disabled
Update Status
Self Test
Update Alarm
Report Mask
Override
Enable
Remove Override
Clear Status
Clear Alarm
Alarm Notify Enabled
Alarm Notify Disabled
Manual Control
Remote Control
Program
Clear Reset
Reset
Manual Occupancy
X
X
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Temporary Setpoint
Effective Setpoint
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=-273.2
Max=327.7
95-7769—01
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 81. HYD Application of Points. (Continued)
Point name
Alarm Type
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
X
X
X
Node Off
Frost
Invalid Setpoint
Temperature Sensor Restored
Setpoint Knob Restored
Fan Speed Switch Restored
Fan Normal
SpaceTemp Com Restored
HVAC Mode Com Restored
Setpoint Offset Com Restored
Sched Occ Com Restored
DLC Communication Restored
rtnComfailTempreset
Outdoor Temp Com Restored
Occ Sensor Com Restored
Window Com Restored
Manual Heat Com Restored
Manual Cool Com Restored
rtnHwSwMismatch
rtnReserve020
rtnReserve021
rtnReserve022
rtnReserve023
rtnReserve024
Alarm Notify
Disabled
No Alarm
Node Off
Frost
Invalid Setpoint
Temperature Sensor Failed
Setpoint Knob Failed
Fan Speed Switch Failed
Fan Failure
SpaceTemp Com Failed
HVAC Mode Com Failed
Setpoint Offset Com
Alarm Type (continued)
X
X
X
Failed
Sched Occ Com Failed
DLC Communication Failed
almComfailTempreset
Outdoor Temp Com Failed
Occ Sensor Com Failed
Window Com Failed
Manual Heat Com Failed
Manual Cool Com Failed
almHwSwMismatch
almReserve020
almReserve021
almReserve022
almReserve023
almReserve024
Cool Output
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
DLC Shed
X
X
X
X
X
X
Restored or Shed
Economizer Output
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
133
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 81. HYD Application of Points. (Continued)
Point name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Effective Occupancy
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Effective Sensor Occupancy
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Effective Window Open
External Active
Fan Feedback
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Closed or Open
True or False
Failure or Running
Fan Output
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Fan Stages Active
HW Override
X
X
X
X
X
X
Fan Off
Fan Speed 1
Fan Speed 2
Fan Speed 3
Fan Auto
Fan Default
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
HW Window Open
In Alarm
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Closed or Open
False or True
Manual Occupancy
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Unit Status Mode
X
X
X
Default
Auto
Heat
Morning Warmup
Cool
Night Purge
Pre-cool
Off
Test
Emergency Heat
Fan Only
Free Cool
Ice
Maximum Heat
Economy
Dehumidify
Calibrate
Emergency Cool
Emergency Steam
Max Cool
HVAC Load
No Load
95-7769—01
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 81. HYD Application of Points. (Continued)
Point name
HYD Status Mode
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
X
X
X
Disabled
Cool
Heat
Pressurize
Depressurize
Manual Mode
Factory Test Mode
Floating Out of Sync
Fan Switch Off
Startup Wait
Output Position 0
Output Position 1
Primary Heat Output
RO LED
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Reheat Active
X
X
X
Default
Off
Low
Medium
High
On
Reset Bypass Time
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Scheduled Occupancy
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Secondary Heat Output
Sensor Occupancy
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Space Temperature
Terminal Load
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=-273.2
Max=327.7
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
135
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Excel 10 Remote Input/Output
Device (RIO)
page 136 provides the RIO application of points.
Table 82. RIO Point Details.
Network Variable
nvoAlarmStatus
Point name
Communication Failed
Field
CommFail
Point Type
EnumPoint
Node Disabled
Sensor Failed
Manual Mode
Analog In 1
Analog In 2
Analog In 3
Analog In 4
Analog In 5
Analog In 6
Digital In 1
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nviManualMode
nvorioIO
NodeDisable
SensorFail
manMode
ai1
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumWritable
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
nvorioIO
ai2
nvorioIO
ai3
nvorioIO
ai4
nvorioIO
ai5
nvorioIO
ai6
nvorioIO
di1
Digital In 2
nvorioIO
di2
Digital In 3
nvorioIO
di3
Digital In 4
nvorioIO
di4
Digital Out 1
Digital Out 2
Digital Out 3
Digital Out 4
Digital Out 5
Digital Out 6
Digital Out 7
Digital Out 8
Mode
nvorioIO
d01
nvorioIO
d02
nvorioIO
d03
nvorioIO
d04
nvorioIO
d05
nvorioIO
d06
nvorioIO
d07
nvorioIO
d08
nvorioIO
mode
Table 83. RIO Application of Points.
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable
Point Name
Internal Use
Valid Values
Communication Failed
Node Disabled
Sensor Failed
X
X
X
False or True
False or True
False or True
Manual Mode
X
X
X
X
Enable
Disable
Manual
Suppress Alarms
Unsuppress Alarms
Analog In 1
Analog In 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
95-7769—01
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 83. RIO Application of Points. (Continued)
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Point Name
Analog In 3
Valid Values
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Analog In 4
Analog In 5
Analog In 6
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=-32768.0
Max=32767.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=-32768.0
Max=32767.0
Digital In 1
Digital In 2
Digital In 3
Digital In 4
Digital Out 1
Digital Out 2
Digital Out 3
Digital Out 4
Digital Out 5
Digital Out 6
Digital Out 7
Digital Out 8
Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Startup Wait
Heat
Cool
Off
Disabled
Emergency Heat
Smoke Emergency
Freeze Protect
Manual
Factory Test
Fan Only
137
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Unit Ventilator (UV)
page 139 provides the UV application of points.
Table 84. UV Point Details.
Network Variable
nciSetpoints
Point Name
Field Name
occupiedCool
Point Type
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumPoint
Occupied Cool
Standby Cool
nciSetpoints
nciSetpoints
nciSetpoints
nciSetpoints
nciSetpoints
nviOccSchedule
nviOccSchedule
nviOccSchedule
nviDlcShed
standbyCool
unoccupiedCool
occupiedHeat
standbyHeat
unoccupiedHeat
currentState
nextState
Unoccupied Cool
Occupied Heat
Standby Heat
Unoccupied Heat
Current State
Next State
Time To Next State
DLC Shed
timeToNextState
dlcShed
Air Flow Loss
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nviApplicMode
nviManualMode
nviOccManCmd
nviSetpoint
LossAirFlow
CommFail
Communication Failed
Dirty Filter
EnumPoint
DirtyFilter
EnumPoint
Drip Pan Full
DripPanFull
FreezeStat
EnumPoint
Freeze State
EnumPoint
Frost Protect
FrostProtect
IaqOverRide
InvalidSetPt
LowLimEconClose
NodeDisable
OAQuality
EnumPoint
Indoor Air Quality Override
Invalid Setpoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
Low Limit Economizer Close
Node Disabled
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
Outside Air Quality
Sensor Failed
EnumPoint
SensorFail
EnumPoint
Application Mode
Manual Mode
hvacMode
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
EnumPoint
manMode
Manual Occupancy
Temporary Setpoint
Auxiliary Economizer Out
Bypass Timer
occupancy
tempP
nvoData1
AuxEconOut
BypassTimer
CalcODEnthalpyS7
CalcRAEnthalpyS7
CoilFreezeStat
CoolStagesOn
CoolPos
nvoData1
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Calculated Outdoor Enthalpy
Calculated Return Air Enthalpy
Coil Freeze State
Cool Stages On
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Cooling Percentage
DLC Shed
nvoData1
nvoData1
DlcShed
Dirty Filter
nvoData1
DirtyFilter
EnumPoint
Discharge Air Setpoint
Discharge Air Temperature
Drip Pan Full
nvoData2
DischargeSetPt
DischargeTemp
DripPanFull
EconEnable
EconFloatSynch
EconPos
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
nvoData2
nvoData1
Economizer Enabled
Economizer Float Synch
Economizer Position
Effective Occupancy
nvoData1
EnumPoint
nvoData1
EnumPoint
nvoData1
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
nvoData1
EffectOcc
95-7769—01
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 84. UV Point Details. (Continued)
Network Variable Field Name
nvoData1
Point Name
Point Type
NumericPoint
Fan Speed
FanSpeed
Fan Switch
nvoData1
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData1
FanSwitch
EnumPoint
Filter Pressure
Free State 1
Heat Source
Heat Stages On
FilterPressure
Free1Stat
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
HeatSource
HeatStagesOn
HeatPos
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Heating Percentage
Indoor Air Quality Override
Manual Occupancy
Mixed Air Temperature
Mode
IaqOverRide
NetManOcc
MixedTemp
mode
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Monitor 1
Monitor1
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Monitor Switch
MonSwitch
Occupancy Statue Out
Occupancy Time Clock
Outdoor Air Enthalpy
Outdoor Humidity
Outdoor Temperature
Outside Air Quality
Override
OccStatusOut
OccTimeClock
OutdoorEnthalpy
OutdoorHumidity
OutdoorTemp
OutsideQuality
OverRide
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Proof Of Air Flow
Return Air Enthalpy
Return Air Humidity
Return Air Temperature
Scheduled Occupancy
Sensor Occupancy
Shutdown
ProofAirFlow
ReturnEnthalpy
ReturnHumidity
ReturnTemp
SchedOcc
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
SenOcc
EnumPoint
ShutDown
EnumPoint
Smoke Monitor
SmokeMonitor
SpaceCo2
EnumPoint
Space CO2
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Space Temperature
Temperature Setpoint
Window Open
SpaceTemp
TempControlPt
WindowOpen
Table 85. UV Application of Points.
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Occupied Cool (Setpoint)
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Standby Cool (Setpoint)
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Unoccupied Cool (Setpoint)
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
139
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 85. UV Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Units=ºC
Occupied Heat (Setpoint)
Standby Heat (Setpoint)
Unoccupied Heat (Setpoint)
Current State
X
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
ocOccupied
ocUnoccupied
ocBypass
ocStandby
ocNul
Next State
X
ocOccupied
ocUnoccupied
ocBypass
ocStandby
ocNul
Time To Next State
DLC Shed
X
X
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
dlNoDlcShed
dlMinDlcShed
Air Flow Loss
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
false or true
false or true
false or true
false or true
false or true
false or true
false or true
false or true
false or true
false or true
false or true
false or true
Communication Failed
Dirty Filter
Drip Pan Full
Freeze State
Frost Protect
Indoor Air Quality Override
Invalid Setpoint
Low Limit Economizer Close
Node Disabled
Outside Air Quality
Sensor Failed
95-7769—01
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 85. UV Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Application Mode
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
X
X
X
X
Default
Auto
Heat
Morning Warmup
Cool
Night Purge
Pre-cool
Off
Test
Emergency Heat
Fan Only
Free Cool
Ice
Maximum Heat
Economy
Dehumidify
Calibrate
Emergency Cool
Emergency Steam
Max Cool
HVAC Load
No Load
Fan Speed Command
X
X
X
X
Off
Zero
Low
Medium
High
Auto
Manual Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Enable
Disable
Manual
Suppress Alarms
Unsuppress Alarms
Manual Occupancy
Temporary Setpoint
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Auxiliary Economizer Out
Bypass Timer
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Calculated Outdoor Enthalpy
Calculated Return Air Enthalpy
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=BTU/lb
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Units=BTU/lb
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Coil Freeze State
Cool Percent
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
141
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 85. UV Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Units=%
Cool Position
X
X
X
Precision=0
Min=-128.0
Max=127.0
Cool Stages On
X
X
X
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=3.0
DLC Shed
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Restored or Shed
False or True
Dirty Filter
Discharge Air Setpoint
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Discharge Air Temperature
X
X
X
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Drip Pan Full
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
Economizer Enabled
Default
Off
Low
Medium
High
On
Economizer Float Synch
Economizer Position
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Units=%
Precision=0
Min=-128.0
Max=127.0
Effective Occupancy
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Fan Speed
Fan Switch
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=7.0
Default
Off
Low
Medium
High
On
Filter Pressure
X
X
X
Units=in/wc
Precision=1
Min=-32.0
Max=32.0
Free State 1
Heat Percent
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
95-7769—01
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 85. UV Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Heat Position
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=0
Min=-128.0
Max=127.0
Heat Source
X
X
X
Default
Off
Low
Medium
High
On
Heat Stages On
X
X
X
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=3.0
Indoor Air Quality Override
Manual Occupancy
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Mixed Air Temperature
Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Startup Wait
Heat
Cool
Off
Disabled
Smoke Emergency
Freeze Protect
Manual
Factory Test
Fan Only
Monitor 1
X
X
X
Units=V
Precision=1
Min=-32.0
Max=32.0
Monitor Switch
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Off or On
Occupancy Statue Out
Occupancy Time Clock
Default
Off
Low
Medium
High
On
Outdoor Air Enthalpy
Outdoor Humidity
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=mA
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=127.5
Outdoor Temperature
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
143
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 85. UV Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Units=ppm
Outside Air Quality
X
X
X
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Override
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Proof Of Air Flow
X
X
X
Default
Off
Low
Medium
High
On
Return Air Enthalpy
Return Air Humidity
Return Air Temperature
Scheduled Occupancy
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=mA
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=127.5
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Sensor Occupancy
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Shutdown
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
False or True
Smoke Monitor
Space CO2
Units=ppm
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Space Temperature
Effective Setpoint
Window Open
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Closed or Open
95-7769—01
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Excel 10 VAV II Controller (VAV II)
page 146 provides the VAV II application of points.
Table 86. VAV II Point Details.
Network Variable
nciSetPts
Point Name
Occupied Cool
Field
Point Type
occupiedCool
standbyCool
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumPoint
Standby Cool
Unoccupied Cool
Occupied Heat
Standby Heat
Unoccupied Heat
Current State
nciSetPts
nciSetPts
nciSetPts
nciSetPts
nciSetPts
nviTodEvent
nviTodEvent
nviTodEvent
nviDlcShed
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nviApplicMode
nviManualMode
nviManOcc
nviSetPoint
nvoData
unoccupiedCool
occupiedHeat
standbyHeat
unoccupiedHeat
currentState
nextState
Next State
Time To Next State
DLC Shed
timeToNextState
dlcShed
Communication Failed
Frost Protect
CommFail
FrostProtect
InvalidConfig
InvalidSetpoint
NodeDisabled
SensorFail
EnumPoint
Invalid Config
Invalid Setpoint
Node Disabled
Sensor Failed
Smoke Emergency
Application Mode
Manual Mode
Manual Occupancy
Temporary Setpoint
Auxiliary On
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
SmokeEmergency
hvacMode
EnumPoint
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
EnumPoint
manMode
occupancy
tempP
AuxOn
Box Flow
nvoData
uiBoxFlowS0
uiBoxFlowControlPtS0
uiBoxHeatFlowS0
BypassTimer
DlcShed
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Box Flow Control Setpoint
Box Heat Flow
Bypass Timer
DLC Shed
nvoData
nvoData
nvoData
nvoData
Damper Position
Digital In 1
nvoData
ubDamperPosS1
DigitalIn1
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
nvoIO
Digital In 2
nvoIO
DigitalIn2
EnumPoint
Digital In 3
nvoIO
DigitalIn3
EnumPoint
Digital Out 1
nvoIO
DigitalOut1
EnumPoint
Digital Out 2
nvoIO
DigitalOut2
EnumPoint
Digital Out 3
nvoIO
DigitalOut3
EnumPoint
Digital Out 4
nvoIO
DigitalOut4
EnumPoint
Digital Out 5
nvoIO
DigitalOut5
EnumPoint
Digital Out 6
nvoIO
DigitalOut6
EnumPoint
Digital Out 7
nvoIO
DigitalOut7
EnumPoint
Digital Out 8
nvoIO
DigitalOut8
EnumPoint
Discharge Temperature
Effective Occupancy
Fan Speed
nvoData
siDischargeTempS7
EffectOcc
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
nvoData
nvoData
ubFanSpdS1
NumericPoint
145
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 86. VAV II Point Details. (Continued)
Network Variable Field
nvoData
Point Name
Point Type
EnumPoint
Fan Status
FanOn
Field No
nvoData
nvoIO
FieldNo
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
Flow Sensor
siFlowSensorS3
siFlowUncorrectedS3
siFlowVoltsS12
Free1On
Flow Uncorrected
Flow Volts
nvoIO
nvoIO
Free 1 On
nvoData
nvoData
nvoData
nvoIO
Fresh Air Ratio
Heat Cool Switch
Heat Cool Switch
Heat Stages
siFreshAirRatio
HeatCoolSwitch
HeatCoolSwitch
HeatStages
nvoData
nvoIO
IO Test In
IOTestIn
IO Test Switch
Low Flow Alarm
Manual Occupancy
Mode
nvoIO
IOTestSwitch
LowFlowAlarm
NetManOcc
nvoData
nvoData
nvoData
nvoIO
Mode
Model
Model
Monitor Switch
Monitor Switch
Occupancy Sensor
Override
nvoData
nvoIO
MonSwitch
MonSwitch
nvoIO
OccupancySensor
OverRide
nvoData
nvoIO
Override IO
OverRide
Peripheral Heat On
Peripheral Heat Position
Reheat Percentage
Scheduled Occupancy
Sensor Occupancy
Space Temperature
Space Temperature IO
Supply Temperature
Temperature Sensor 0
Temperature Sensor 1
Temperature Setpoint
Window Open
nvoData
nvoData
nvoData
nvoData
nvoData
nvoData
nvoIO
PeriphHeatOn
ubPeriphHeatPosS1
ubReheatPosS1
SchedOcc
SenOcc
siSpaceTempS7
siSpaceTempS7
siSupplyTempS7
siTempSensorS7N0
siTempSensorS7N1
siTempControlPtS7
WindowOpen
WindowOpen
nvoData
nvoIO
nvoIO
nvoData
nvoData
nvoIO
Window Open IO
Table 87. VAV II Application of Points
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Occupied Cool (Setpoint)
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Standby Cool (Setpoint)
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
95-7769—01
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 87. VAV II Application of Points (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Units=ºC
Unoccupied Cool (Setpoint)
X
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Occupied Heat (Setpoint)
Standby Heat (Setpoint)
Unoccupied Heat (Setpoint)
Current State
X
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Next State
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Time To Next State
DLC Shed
X
X
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
dlNoDlcShed
dlMinDlcShed
Communication Failed
Frost Protect
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
Invalid Config
Invalid Setpoint
Node Disabled
Sensor Failed
Smoke Emergency
147
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 87. VAV II Application of Points (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Application Mode
X
X
X
X
Default
Auto
Heat
Morning Warmup
Cool
Night Purge
Pre-cool
Off
Test
Emergency Heat
Fan Only
Free Cool
Ice
Maximum Heat
Economy
Dehumidify
Calibrate
Emergency Cool
Emergency Steam
Max Cool
HVAC Load
No Load
Manual Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Enable
Disable
Manual
Suppress Alarms
Unsuppress Alarms
Manual Occupancy
Temporary Setpoint
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=10.0
Max=35.0
Auxiliary On
Box Flow
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Units=L/s
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Box Flow Control Setpoint
Box Heat Flow
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=L/s
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=L/s
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Bypass Timer
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
DLC Shed
X
X
X
X
X
X
Restored or Shed
Damper Position
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=100.0
Digital In 1
X
X
X
False or True
95-7769—01
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 87. VAV II Application of Points (Continued)
Point Name
Digital In 2
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
False or True
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Digital In 3
False or True
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Digital Out 1
Digital Out 2
Digital Out 3
Digital Out 4
Digital Out 5
Digital Out 6
Digital Out 7
Digital Out 8
Discharge Temperature
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Effective Occupancy
Fan Speed
X
X
X
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=100.0
Fan Status
Field No
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Update All Fields
Mode
Effective Occupancy
Override
Scheduled Occupancy
Network Manual Occupancy
Sensor Occupancy
Bypass Timer
Temperature Control Point
Space Temperature
Discharge Temperature
Supply Temperature
Fresh Air Ratio
Box Flow Cont
Flow Sensor
Flow Uncorrected
Flow Volts
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ft/min
Precision=1
Min=-4096.0
Max=4095.9
Units=ft/min
Precision=1
Min=-4096.0
Max=4095.9
Units=V
Precision=1
Min=-8.0
Max=8.0
Free 1 On
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Fresh Air Ratio
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Heat Cool Switch
X
X
X
Off or On
149
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 87. VAV II Application of Points (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Off or On
Heat Cool Switch
Heat Stages
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=3.0
IO Test In
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
Off or On
IO Test Switch
Low Flow Alarm
Manual Occupancy
False or True
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Mode
X
X
X
Startup Wait
Heat
Cool
Reheat
Morning Warm-up
Night Purge
Pressurize
Depressurize
Track Flow
Manual Position
Manual Flow
Freeze Protect
Factory Test
IO Test
Floating Out of Sync
Disabled
Manual
Model
X
X
X
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=3.0
Monitor Switch
Monitor Switch
Occupancy Sensor
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Off or On
Unoccupied
Occupied
Override
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Override IO
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
Off or On
Peripheral Heat On
Peripheral Heat Position
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=100.0
Reheat Position
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=100.0
95-7769—01
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 87. VAV II Application of Points (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Scheduled Occupancy
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Sensor Occupancy
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Space Temperature
Space Temperature IO
Supply Temperature
Temperature Sensor 0
Temperature Sensor 1
Effective Setpoint
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-256.0
Max=256.0
Window Open
X
X
X
X
X
X
Closed or Open
Closed or Open
Window Open IO
151
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Vacon NX Frequency Converter
(NXVFD)
Table 88 provides the NXVFD points detail and Table 89 on
page 153 provides the NXVFD application of points.
Table 88. NXVFD Point Details.
Network Variable
nciApplVer
Point Name
Field Name
applicationType
versionNo
time
Point Type
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
String Writable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericPoint
BooleanPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
BooleanPoint
NumericPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
Application Type
Application Version
Application Ver Time
Device Name
nciApplVer
nciApplVer
nciDeviceName
nviProcessIn3
nviProcessIn2
nviProcessIn1
nviProcessIn3
nviClrCntr
DeviceName
levPercent
levPercent
levPercent
levPercent
value
Adjust Input
Free Analog Input
Torque Reference
Adjust Input / Actual Value 2
Clear Counter
Drive Speed Setpoint
Free Analog / Input Actual Value 1
Reset Fault
nviDrvSpeedStpt
nviProcessIn2
nviRstFault
value
levPercent
value
Torque Reference / Reference for PID
AC Fault Code
nviProcessIn1
nvoProcessOut8
nvoDrvStatus
nvoProcessOut7
nvoDrvCurnt
levPercent
levPercent
bit3
Fault Active
DC Link Voltage
Drive Current
levPercent
amp
Drive Energy
nvoDrvEnrgy
nvoDrvPwr
elecKwh
powerKilo
bit0
Drive Power
Ready
nvoDrvStatus
nvoDrvStatus
nvoDrvSpeed
nvoActFault
Running
bit1
Drive Speed
levPercent
count
Active Fault Code
Motor Current
nvoProcessOut3
nvoProcessOut5
nvoProcessOut2
nvoProcessOut4
nvoProcessOut6
nvoProcessOut1
nvoDrvStatus
nvoDrvRunHours
nvoDrvStatus
nvoDrvStatus
levPercent
levPercent
levPercent
levPercent
levPercent
levPercent
bit5
Motor Power
Motor Speed
Motor Torque
Motor Voltage
Output Frequency
Reference Eq Actual
Drive Run Hours
Counter Clockwise
Warning Active
timeHour
bit2
bit4
95-7769—01
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 89. NXVFD Application of Points.
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Adjust Input / Actual Value 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min.=-163.8
Max=163.8
Clear Counter
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=100.0
Drive Speed Setpoint
Free Analog / Input Actual Value 1
Reset Fault
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=100.0
Units=%
Precision=1
Min.=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=100.0
Torque Reference / Reference for PID
AC Fault Code
Units=%
Precision=1
Min.=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=%
Precision=1
Min.=-163.8
Max=163.8
Fault Active
X
X
X
X
X
X
True or False
DC Link Voltage
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Drive Current
Drive Energy
Drive Power
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=A
Precision=1
Min=-3276.8
Max=3276.7
Units=kW/hr
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=kW
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=6553.5
Ready
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
True or False
True or False
Running
Drive Speed
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Active Fault Code
X
X
X
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
153
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 89. NXVFD Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Motor Current
Motor Power
Motor Speed
Motor Torque
Motor Voltage
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Output Frequency
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Reference Eq Actual
Drive Run Hours
X
X
X
X
X
X
True or False
Units=hr
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Counter Clockwise
Warning Active
X
X
X
X
X
X
True or False
True or False
95-7769—01
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
XL15C Plant Controller (XL15C)
page 158 provides the XL15C application of points.
Table 90. XL15C Point Details.
Network Variable
nvoAlarmStatus/data
Point Name
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp8 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp7 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp6 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp5 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp4 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp3 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp2 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp1 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ R A M Checksum Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ File Alm
Field
StPtLp8Alm
Point Type
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
nvoAlarmStatus/data
nvoAlarmStatus/data
nvoAlarmStatus/data
nvoAlarmStatus/data
nvoAlarmStatus/data
nvoAlarmStatus/data
nvoAlarmStatus/data
nvoAlarmStatus/data
nvoAlarmStatus/data
nvoAlarmStatus/data
nvoAlarmStatus/data
nvoAlarmStatus/data
nvoAlarmStatus/data
nvoAlarmStatus/data
nvoAlarmStatus/data
nvoAICnt/data
StPtLp7Alm
StPtLp6Alm
StPtLp5Alm
StPtLp4Alm
StPtLp3Alm
StPtLp2Alm
StPtLp1Alm
RAMChecksumAlm
FileAlm
Nvo Alarm Status _ Input Rem Poll Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ Flash Chksum Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ Sensor Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ Input N V Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp10 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp9 Alm
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan1 Sensor
InputRemPollAlm
FlashChksumAlm
SensorAlm
InputNVAlm
StPtLp10Alm
StPtLp9Alm
aiChan1Sensor
aiChan2Sensor
aiChan3Sensor
aiChan4Sensor
aiChan5Sensor
aiChan6Sensor
aiChan7Sensor
aiChan8Sensor
aiCalibrationChan1
aiCalibrationChan2
aiChan1Sensor
aiChan2Sensor
aiChan3Sensor
aiChan4Sensor
aiChan5Sensor
aiChan6Sensor
aiChan7Sensor
aiChan8Sensor
aiCalibrationChan1
aiCalibrationChan2
onOff1
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan2 Sensor
nvoAICnt/data
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan3 Sensor
nvoAICnt/data
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan4 Sensor
nvoAICnt/data
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan5 Sensor
nvoAICnt/data
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan6 Sensor
nvoAICnt/data
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan7 Sensor
nvoAICnt/data
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan8 Sensor
nvoAICnt/data
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Calibration Chan1
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Calibration Chan2
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan1 Sensor
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan2 Sensor
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan3 Sensor
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan4 Sensor
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan5 Sensor
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan6 Sensor
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan7 Sensor
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan8 Sensor
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Calibration Chan1
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Calibration Chan2
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off1
nvoAICnt/data
nvoAICnt/data
nvoAIFilteredCnt/data
nvoAIFilteredCnt/data
nvoAIFilteredCnt/data
nvoAIFilteredCnt/data
nvoAIFilteredCnt/data
nvoAIFilteredCnt/data
nvoAIFilteredCnt/data
nvoAIFilteredCnt/data
nvoAIFilteredCnt/data
nvoAIFilteredCnt/data
nvoDISensor/data
nvoDISensor/data
nvoDISensor/data
nvoDISensor/data
nvoDISensor/data
nvoDISensor/data
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off2
onOff2
EnumPoint
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off3
onOff3
EnumPoint
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off4
onOff4
EnumPoint
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off5
onOff5
EnumPoint
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off6
onOff6
EnumPoint
155
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 90. XL15C Point Details. (Continued)
Point Name
Network Variable
nvoDISensor/data
Field
Point Type
EnumPoint
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off7
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off8
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count0
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count1
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count2
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count3
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count4
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count5
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count6
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count7
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count8
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count9
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count10
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count11
Nvo Od Temp _temp P
Nvo Od Hum _lev Percent
Nvo Counter1 _count
Nvo Counter2 _count
Nvo Cascade Out _power Kilo
Nvo Sensor Occ1 _occupancy
Nvo D A Temp _temp P
applType
onOff7
onOff8
nvoDISensor/data
EnumPoint
nvoCalCnt/data
CalCount0
CalCount1
CalCount2
CalCount3
CalCount4
CalCount5
CalCount6
CalCount7
CalCount8
CalCount9
CalCount10
CalCount11
tempP
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
nvoCalCnt/data
nvoCalCnt/data
nvoCalCnt/data
nvoCalCnt/data
nvoCalCnt/data
nvoCalCnt/data
nvoCalCnt/data
nvoCalCnt/data
nvoCalCnt/data
nvoCalCnt/data
nvoCalCnt/data
nvoOdTemp
nvoOdHum
levPercent
count
nvoCounter1
nvoCounter2
count
nvoCascadeOut
powerKilo
occupancy
tempP
nvoSensorOcc1
nvoDATemp
NumericPoint
Numeric Writable
Numeric Writable
Numeric Writable
nciApplVer/data
applType
applVerNumber
applTime1Jan70
hwName
applVerNumber
nciApplVer/data
applTime1Jan70
nciApplVer/data
hwName
nciDeviceName/data
Current State
temp/ControlLoop_1/nviTodEventIn
temp/ControlLoop_1/nviTodEventIn
temp/ControlLoop_1/nviTodEventIn
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nviTodEventIn
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nviTodEventIn
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nviTodEventIn
temp/ControlLoop_1/nviDlcShedIn/data
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nviDlcShedIn/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nciFlexSetPts/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nciFlexSetPts/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nciFlexSetPts/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nviBypass
temp/ControlLoop_1/nviBypass
temp/ControlLoop_1/nviManOcc
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nviBypass
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nviBypass
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nviManOcc
temp/AnalogInput_1/nvoAISensor/data
temp/Remote_1_AO1/nvoRemoteCmd
temp/Remote_1_DO1/nvoDigCmdFree
temp/Remote_1_DO1/nvoDigCmdFree
currentState
nextState
timeToNextState
currentState
nextState
timeToNextState
destDlcShed
destDlcShed
occupied
standby
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericPoint
Next State
Time To Next State
Current State
Next State
Time To Next State
D L C Shed
D L C Shed
Nci Flex Set Pts _occupied
Nci Flex Set Pts _standby
Nci Flex Set Pts _unoccupied
Nvi Bypass _value
unoccupied
value
Nvi Bypass _state
state
Nvi Man Occ _occupancy
Nvi Bypass _value
occupancy
value
Nvi Bypass _state
state
Nvi Man Occ _occupancy
Nvo A I Sensor _ai Val
Nvo Remote Cmd _lev Percent
Nvo Dig Cmd Free _value
Nvo Dig Cmd Free _state
occupancy
aiVal
levPercent
value
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
state
EnumPoint
95-7769—01
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 90. XL15C Point Details. (Continued)
Point Name
Nvo Appl Mode _hvac Mode
Network Variable
temp/NetworkOut/nvoApplMode
Field
hvacMode
Point Type
EnumPoint
Nvo Econ Enable _value
temp/NetworkOut/nvoEconEnable
value
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Nvo Econ Enable _state
temp/NetworkOut/nvoEconEnable
state
Nvo Occupancy _occupancy
Nvo Cool U T M L _value
temp/NetworkOut/nvoOccupancy
occupancy
value
EnumPoint
temp/NetworkOut/nvoCoolUTML
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Nvo Cool U T M L _state
temp/NetworkOut/nvoCoolUTML
state
Nvo Heat U T M L _value
temp/NetworkOut/nvoHeatUTML
value
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Nvo Heat U T M L _state
temp/NetworkOut/nvoHeatUTML
state
Nvo Bypass _value
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoBypass
value
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Nvo Bypass _state
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoBypass
state
Nvo F T Status _effective Set Point
Nvo F T Status _cntrl Sensor
Nvo F T Status _reset Amount
Nvo F T Status _bypass Remaining
Nvo F T Status _manual Mode
Nvo F T Status _effect Occupancy
Nvo F T Status _sched Occupancy
Nvo F T Status _sensor Occupancy
Nvo F T Status _sys Mode
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data/loopState
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data/loopState
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data/loopState
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data/loopState
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data/loopState
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data/loopState
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/ControlLoop_1/nvoFTStatus/data
temp/LogicLoop_1/nvoLLStatus/data
effectiveSetPoint
cntrlSensor
resetAmount
bypassRemaining
manualMode
effectOccupancy
schedOccupancy
sensorOccupancy
sysMode
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
Nvo F T Status _dlc Status
dlcStatus
BooleanPoint
Nvo F T Status _primary Cmd Percent
Nvo F T Status _seq1 Cmd Percent
Nvo F T Status _seq2 Cmd Percent
Nvo F T Status _seq3 Cmd Percent
Nvo F T Status _prim Activ Stages
Nvo F T Status _seq1 Active Stages
Nvo F T Status _seq2 Active Stages
Nvo F T Status _seq3 Active Stages
Nvo F T Status _prim Stage1 On
Nvo F T Status _prim Stage2 On
Nvo F T Status _prim Stage3 On
Nvo F T Status _prim Stage4 On
Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage1 On
Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage2 On
Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage3 On
Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage4 On
Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage1 On
Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage2 On
Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage3 On
Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage4 On
Nvo F T Status _seq3 Stage1 On
Nvo F T Status _seq3 Stage2 On
Nvo F T Status _seq3 Stage3 On
Nvo F T Status _seq3 Stage4 On
Nvo F T Status _aux Status
primaryCmdPercent NumericPoint
seq1CmdPercent
seq2CmdPercent
seq3CmdPercent
primActivStages
seq1ActiveStages
seq2ActiveStages
seq3ActiveStages
primStage1On
primStage2On
primStage3On
primStage4On
seq1Stage1On
seq1Stage2On
seq1Stage3On
seq1Stage4On
seq2Stage1On
seq2Stage2On
seq2Stage3On
seq2Stage4On
seq3Stage1On
seq3Stage2On
seq3Stage3On
seq3Stage4On
auxStatus
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
BooleanPoint
EnumPoint
Nvo L L Status _man Mode Status
manModeStatus
EnumPoint
157
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 90. XL15C Point Details. (Continued)
Point Name
Network Variable
temp/LogicLoop_1/nvoLLStatus/data
Field
orGateStatus
dcAoStatus
value
Point Type
EnumPoint
Nvo L L Status _or Gate Status
Nvo L L Status _dc Ao Status
Nvo Bypass _value
temp/LogicLoop_1/nvoLLStatus/data
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
BooleanPoint
EnumPoint
BooleanPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoBypass
Nvo Bypass _state
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoBypass
state
Nvo St Stp Status _bypass Remaining
Nvo St Stp Status _manual Mode
Nvo St Stp Status _effect Occupancy
Nvo St Stp Status _sched Occupancy
Nvo St Stp Status _sensor Occupancy
Nvo St Stp Status _sys Mode
Nvo St Stp Status _dlc Status
Nvo St Stp Status _out Status
Nvo Bypass Arb _override Priority
Nvo Bypass Arb _wall Mod Override
Nvo Bypass Arb _bypass Timer
Nvo Bypass Arb _occ Timer
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoStStpStatus/data
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoStStpStatus/data/loopState
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoStStpStatus/data/loopState
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoStStpStatus/data/loopState
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoStStpStatus/data/loopState
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoStStpStatus/data/loopState
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoStStpStatus/data/loopState
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoStStpStatus/data
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoBypassArb/data
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoBypassArb/data
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoBypassArb/data
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoBypassArb/data
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoBypassArb/data
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoBypassArb/data
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoBypassArb/data
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoBypassArb/data
temp/StartStopLoop_1/nvoBypassArb/data
bypassRemaining
manualMode
effectOccupancy
schedOccupancy
sensorOccupancy
sysMode
dlcStatus
outStatus
overridePriority
wallModOverride
bypassTimer
occTimer
Nvo Bypass Arb _schedule X
Nvo Bypass Arb _occ Sensor
Nvo Bypass Arb _man Override
Nvo Bypass Arb _eff Occ State
Nvo Bypass Arb _bypass State
scheduleX
occSensor
manOverride
effOccState
bypassState
Table 91. XL15C Application of Points.
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Current State
X
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Next State
X
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Time To Next State
Current State
X
X
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Next State
X
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
95-7769—01
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 91. XL15C Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Time To Next State
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
X
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
D L C Shed
D L C Shed
X
X
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=255.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=255.0
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp8 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp7 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp6 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp5 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp4 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp3 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp2 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp1 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ R A M Checksum Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ File Alm
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
Nvo Alarm Status _ Input Rem Poll Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ Flash Chksum Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ Sensor Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ Input N V Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp10 Alm
Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp9 Alm
Nci Flex Set Pts _occupied
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=null
Precision=1
Min=-inf
Max=+inf
Nci Flex Set Pts _standby
Nci Flex Set Pts _unoccupied
Nvi Bypass _value
Units=null
Precision=1
Min=-inf
Max=+inf
Units=null
Precision=1
Min=-inf
Max=+inf
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=100.0
Nvi Bypass _state
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off
On
Default
Nvi Man Occ _occupancy
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
159
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 91. XL15C Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Units=%
Nvi Bypass _value
X
X
X
X
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=100.0
Nvi Bypass _state
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off
On
Default
Nvi Man Occ _occupancy
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Nvo A I Sensor _ai Val
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=null
Precision=1
Min=-inf
Max=+inf
Nvo Remote Cmd _lev Percent
Nvo Dig Cmd Free _value
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=100.0
Nvo Dig Cmd Free _state
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off
On
Default
Nvo Appl Mode _hvac Mode
Default
Auto
Heat
Morning Warmup
Cool
Night Purge
Pre-cool
Off
Test
Emergency Heat
Fan Only
Free Cool
Ice
Maximum Heat
Economy
Dehumidify
Calibrate
Emergency Cool
Emergency Steam
Max Cool
HVAC Load
No Load
Nvo Econ Enable _value
Nvo Econ Enable _state
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=100.0
Off
On
Default
95-7769—01
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 91. XL15C Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Nvo Occupancy _occupancy
X
X
X
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Nvo Cool U T M L _value
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=100.0
Nvo Cool U T M L _state
Nvo Heat U T M L _value
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off
On
Default
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=100.0
Nvo Heat U T M L _state
Nvo Bypass _value
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off
On
Default
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=100.0
Nvo Bypass _state
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off
On
Default
Nvo F T Status _effective Set Point
Units=null
Precision=1
Min=-inf
Max=+inf
Nvo F T Status _cntrl Sensor
Nvo F T Status _reset Amount
Nvo F T Status _bypass Remaining
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=null
Precision=1
Min=-inf
Max=+inf
Units=null
Precision=1
Min=-inf
Max=+inf
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Nvo F T Status _manual Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
Enable
Disable
Manual
Nvo F T Status _effect Occupancy
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Nvo F T Status _sched Occupancy
X
X
X
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
161
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 91. XL15C Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Occupied
Nvo F T Status _sensor Occupancy
X
X
X
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Nvo F T Status _sys Mode
X
X
X
Auto
Heat
Morning Warmup
Cool
Night Purge
Pre-cool
Off
Test
Emergency Heat
Fan Only
Free Cool
Ice
Maximum Heat
Economy
Dehumidify
Calibrate
Emergency Cool
Emergency Steam
Default
Nvo F T Status _dlc Status
X
X
X
X
X
X
TRUE
Nvo F T Status _primary Cmd Percent
Units=%
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=255.0
Nvo F T Status _seq1 Cmd Percent
Nvo F T Status _seq2 Cmd Percent
Nvo F T Status _seq3 Cmd Percent
Nvo F T Status _prim Activ Stages
Nvo F T Status _seq1 Active Stages
Nvo F T Status _seq2 Active Stages
Nvo F T Status _seq3 Active Stages
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=255.0
Units=%
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=255.0
Units=%
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=255.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=255.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=255.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=255.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=255.0
Nvo F T Status _prim Stage1 On
Nvo F T Status _prim Stage2 On
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
False or True
95-7769—01
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 91. XL15C Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Nvo F T Status _prim Stage3 On
Nvo F T Status _prim Stage4 On
Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage1 On
Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage2 On
Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage3 On
Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage4 On
Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage1 On
Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage2 On
Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage3 On
Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage4 On
Nvo F T Status _seq3 Stage1 On
Nvo F T Status _seq3 Stage2 On
Nvo F T Status _seq3 Stage3 On
Nvo F T Status _seq3 Stage4 On
Nvo F T Status _aux Status
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
Off or On
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Nvo L L Status _man Mode Status
Enable
Disable
Manual
Nvo L L Status _or Gate Status
Nvo L L Status _dc Ao Status
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Units=null
Precision=1
Min=-inf
Max=+inf
Nvo Bypass _value
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=100.0
Nvo Bypass _state
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off
On
Default
Nvo St Stp Status _bypass Remaining
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Nvo St Stp Status _manual Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
Enable
Disable
Manual
Nvo St Stp Status _effect Occupancy
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Nvo St Stp Status _sched Occupancy
Nvo St Stp Status _sensor Occupancy
X
X
X
X
X
X
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
163
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 91. XL15C Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Auto
Nvo St Stp Status _sys Mode
X
X
X
Heat
Morning Warmup
Cool
Night Purge
Pre-cool
Off
Test
Emergency Heat
Fan Only
Free Cool
Ice
Maximum Heat
Economy
Dehumidify
Calibrate
Emergency Cool
Emergency Steam
Default
Nvo St Stp Status _dlc Status
Nvo St Stp Status _out Status
Nvo Bypass Arb _override Priority
Nvo Bypass Arb _wall Mod Override
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
Off or On
False or True
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Nvo Bypass Arb _bypass Timer
Nvo Bypass Arb _occ Timer
Nvo Bypass Arb _schedule X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=255.0
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Nvo Bypass Arb _occ Sensor
Nvo Bypass Arb _man Override
Nvo Bypass Arb _eff Occ State
Nvo Bypass Arb _bypass State
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=-128.0
Max=127.0
95-7769—01
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 91. XL15C Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan1 Sensor
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan2 Sensor
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan3 Sensor
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan4 Sensor
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan5 Sensor
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan6 Sensor
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan7 Sensor
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan8 Sensor
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Calibration Chan1
Nvo A I Cnt _ai Calibration Chan2
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan1 Sensor
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan2 Sensor
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan3 Sensor
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan4 Sensor
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
165
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 91. XL15C Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Units=null
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan5 Sensor
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan6 Sensor
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan7 Sensor
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan8 Sensor
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Calibration Chan1
Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Calibration Chan2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off1
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off2
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off3
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off4
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off5
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off6
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off7
Nvo D I Sensor _on Off8
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count1
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count2
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count3
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count4
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
95-7769—01
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 91. XL15C Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count6
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count7
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count8
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count9
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count10
Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count11
Nvo Od Temp _temp P
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=-273.2
Max=327.7
Nvo Od Hum _lev Percent
Nvo Counter1 _count
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Nvo Counter2 _count
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Nvo Cascade Out _power Kilo
Nvo Sensor Occ1 _occupancy
Units=kW
Precision=1
Min=0.0
Max=6553.5
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Nvo Sensor Occ2 _occupancy
Nvo D A Temp _temp P
X
X
X
X
X
X
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Default
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=-273.2
Max=327.7
167
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
T7350 Thermostat (T7350)
Table 92 provides the T7350 points detail and Table 93 on
page 169 provides the T7350 application of points.
Table 92. T7350 Point Details.
Network Variable
nciSetpoints
Point Name
Field
Point Type
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
EnumWritable
EnumPoint
Occupied Cool
Standby Cool
occupiedCool
standbyCool
nciSetpoints
nciSetpoints
nciSetpoints
nciSetpoints
nciSetpoints
nviOccSchedule
nviOccSchedule
nviOccSchedule
nviDlcShed
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nvoAlarmStatus
nviApplicMode
nviRequest
nviOccManCmd
nviSetpoint
nvoData2
Unoccupied Cool
Occupied Heat
unoccupiedCool
occupiedHeat
standbyHeat
unoccupiedHeat
currentState
nextState
Standby Heat
Unoccupied Heat
Current State
Next State
Time To Next State
DLC Shed
timeToNextState
DlcShed
Cover Communication Failed
Invalid IO Configuration
Invalid SubBase Type
Network Communication Failed
Sensor Failed
coverCommFail
invalidIOConfig
invalidSubBaseType
networkCommFail
sensorFail
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
EnumPoint
Application Mode
Manual Mode
hvacMode
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
EnumWritable
NumericWritable
EnumPoint
objectRequest
occupancy
Manual Occupancy
Temporary Setpoint
Auxiliary Heat 1
Auxiliary Heat 2
Auxiliary Relay
tempP
noAuxHeat1
noAuxHeat2
relayAux
nvoData2
EnumPoint
nvoData2
EnumPoint
Auxiliary Relay
nvoData2
auxRelay
EnumPoint
Bypass Time
nvoData1
bypassTime
relayCool1
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Cool Relay 1
nvoData2
Cool Relay 2
nvoData2
relayCool2
EnumPoint
Cool Relay 3
nvoData2
relayCool3
EnumPoint
Cool Stages On
DLC Shed
nvoData1
coolStgsOn
dlcShed
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
nvoData2
Days Left Keypad Holiday
Dehumidifier Active
Discharge Air Limit
Discharge Air Temperature
Economizer Output
Effective Mode
nvoData1
daysLeftKeypadHoliday
dehumidActive
DALimit
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
nvoData2
nvoData2
EnumPoint
nvoData1
dischTemp
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
nvoUnitStatus
nvoData1
econOutput
effMode
Effective Occupancy
Effective Setpoint
Fan
nvoData1
effOccCurrentState
effSetPt
EnumPoint
nvoData1
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
nvoData1
fan
Fan Relay
nvoData2
relayFan
EnumPoint
Heat Relay 1
nvoData2
relayHeat1
EnumPoint
Heat Relay 3
nvoData2
relayHeat3
EnumPoint
Heat Stages On
nvoData1
heatStgsOn
NumericPoint
95-7769—01
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 92. T7350 Point Details. (Continued)
Network Variable Field
nvoData2
Point Name
Point Type
Holiday
holiday
EnumPoint
Next State
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData1
nvoData2
nvoData1
nvoData2
nvoData2
nviTimeSet
nviTimeSet
nviTimeSet
nviTimeSet
nviTimeSet
nviTimeSet
schedNextState
occSensor
oDTemp
EnumPoint
Occupancy Sensor
Outdoor Temperature
Percent Cool Command
Percent Heat Command
Relay Heat 2
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
percentCmdCool
percentCmdHeat
relayHeat2
remoteStPtOffset
scheduledState
spaceHumidity
spaceTemp
stagesActive
subBaseType
sysMode
Remote Setpoint Offset
Scheduled State
Space Humidity
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
EnumPoint
Space Temperature
Stages Active
SubBase Type
System Mode
EnumPoint
Temporary Setpoint
Terminal Load
temporarySetPt
terminalLoad
scheduledTuncos
totalError
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
NumericPoint
Numeric Writable
Numeric Writable
Numeric Writable
Numeric Writable
Numeric Writable
Numeric Writable
Time To Next State
Total Error
year
month
day
hour
minute
second
Table 93. T7350 Application of Points.
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Occupied Cool (Setpoint)
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=7.2
Max=37.2
Standby Cool (Setpoint)
Unoccupied Cool (Setpoint)
Occupied Heat (Setpoint)
Standby Heat (Setpoint)
X
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=7.2
Max=37.2
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=7.2
Max=37.2
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=4.4
Max=32.2
Units=ºC
Precision=2
Min=4.4
Max=32.2
169
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 93. T7350 Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Units=ºC
Unoccupied Heat (Setpoint)
X
Precision=2
Min=4.4
Max=32.2
Current State
X
X
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Occ Null
Next State
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Occ Null
Time To Next State
DLC Shed
X
X
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
dlNul
dlNoDlcShed
dlMinDlcShed
Cover Communication Failed
Invalid IO Configuration
Invalid SubBase Type
Network Communication Failed
Sensor Failed
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
False or True
Application Mode
X
X
X
X
Default
Auto
Heat
Morning Warmup
Cool
Night Purge
Pre-cool
Off
Test
Emergency Heat
Fan Only
Free Cool
Ice
Maximum Heat
Economy
Dehumidify
Calibrate
Emergency Cool
Emergency Steam
Max Cool
HVAC Load
No Load
Fan Mode
X
X
X
X
Auto or Continuous
95-7769—01
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 93. T7350 Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Manual Mode
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Default
Normal
X
X
X
X
Disabled
Update Status
Self Test
Update Alarm
Report Mask
Override
Enable
Remove Override
Clear Status
Clear Alarm
Alarm Notify Enabled
Alarm Notify Disabled
Manual Control
Remote Control
Program
Clear Reset
Reset
Manual Occupancy
Temporary Setpoint
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=7.2
Max=37.2
Auxiliary Heat 1
Auxiliary Heat 2
Auxiliary Relay
Auxiliary Relay
Bypass Time
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Cool Relay 1
Cool Relay 2
Cool Relay 3
Cool Stages On
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=255.0
DLC Shed
X
X
X
X
X
X
Restored or Shed
Days Left Keypad Holiday
Units=day
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=255.0
Dehumidifier Active
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
False or True
Discharge Air Limit
Discharge Air Temperature
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=-273.2
Max=327.7
171
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 93. T7350 Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Units=%
Economizer Output
X
X
X
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Effective Mode
X
X
X
Default
Off
Cool
Heat
Emergency Heat
Reheat
Manual
Factory Test
Effective Occupancy
X
X
X
Default
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Effective Setpoint
Fan
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=-273.2
Max=327.7
Default
False
True
Fan Relay
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Off or On
Off or On
Heat Relay 1
Heat Relay 3
Heat Stages On
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=255.0
Holiday
X
X
X
X
X
X
False or True
Next State
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
Standby
Occ Null
Occupancy Sensor
X
X
X
X
X
X
Unoccupied
Occupied
Outdoor Temperature
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=-273.2
Max=327.7
Percent Cool Command
Percent Heat Command
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Relay Heat 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
Off or On
Remote Setpoint Offset
Units=ºF
Precision=0
Min=-128.0
Max=127.0
95-7769—01
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 93. T7350 Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Scheduled State
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Occupied
Unoccupied
Bypass
X
X
X
Standby
Occ Null
Space Humidity
Space Temperature
Stages Active
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Units=ºC
Precision=1
Min=-273.2
Max=327.7
Units=null
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=7.0
SubBase Type
sbNul
sbSubasenone
sbSubase1
sbSubase2
sbSubase3
sbSubase4
sbSubase5
sbSubase6
sbSubase7
sbSubase8
sbSubase9
sbSubase10
sbSubase11
sbSubase12
sbSubase13
sbSubase14
sbSubase15
sbSubase16
System Mode
X
X
X
Default
Auto
Heat
Morning Warmup
Cool
Night Purge
Pre-cool
Off
Test
Emergency Heat
Fan Only
Free Cool
Ice
Maximum Heat
Economy
Dehumidify
Calibrate
Emergency Cool
Emergency Steam
Max Cool
HVAC Load
No Load
Temporary Setpoint
X
X
X
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-8.0
Max=7.9
173
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
Table 93. T7350 Application of Points. (Continued)
Point Name
Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use
Valid Values
Units=%
Precision=1
Min=-163.8
Max=163.8
Terminal Load
Time To Next State
Total Error
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Units=min
Precision=0
Min=0.0
Max=65535.0
Units=ºF
Precision=1
Min=-512.0
Max=512.0
95-7769—01
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
TOPIC INDEX
FCU Zone Control .................................................. 62
FCU Miscellaneous ................................................ 62
FCU PID................................................................. 63
FCU Wiring Diagram .............................................. 63
Configuring Hydronic Controllers (HYD) ..................... 64
HYD Outputs .......................................................... 65
HYD Inputs ............................................................. 67
HYD Equipment Control Outputs............................ 69
HYD Switching Levels............................................ 70
HYD Zone Control.................................................. 70
HYD Miscellaneous Parameters............................. 71
HYD PID................................................................. 71
HYD Wiring............................................................. 72
Configuring the Excel 10 Remote Input/Output Device
(RIO) ........................................................................... 73
RIO Inputs .............................................................. 73
RIO Outputs............................................................ 73
RIO Deltas..............................................................74
Configuring the Unit Ventilator (UV)............................ 74
UV Outputs............................................................. 75
UV Inputs................................................................ 75
UV Equipment Control Options .............................. 76
UV Economizer Settings ........................................ 77
UV Heating/Cooling (H/C) Stages .......................... 78
UV Zone Options.................................................... 79
UV Miscellaneous Settings..................................... 79
UV PID settings...................................................... 80
UV Outputs Wiring Assignment.............................. 81
UV Controller Wiring Diagram ................................ 82
Configuring the Excel 10 VAV II Controller.................. 82
Excel 10 VAV II – Inputs ......................................... 86
Excel 10 VAV II – Control Parameters.................... 87
Excel 10 VAV II – PID Settings............................... 87
Excel 10 VAV II – Flow Pickup................................ 87
Excel 10 VAV II – Miscellaneous Settings .............. 88
Excel 10 VAV II – Custom Wiring Settings ............. 88
Excel 10 VAV II – Wiring Diagram .......................... 89
Configuring the Vacon NX Frequency Converter
Configuring Chilled Ceiling Controllers (CHC)............ 34
CHC Outputs.......................................................... 35
CHC Inputs ............................................................ 37
CHC Equipment Control ........................................ 40
CHC Switching Levels ........................................... 41
CHC Zone Control ................................................. 41
CHC Miscellaneous ............................................... 41
CHC PID ................................................................ 42
CHC Wiring Diagram ............................................. 43
Configuring the Constant Volume Air Handling Unit
Controllers (CVAHU)................................................... 43
CVAHU Outputs ..................................................... 44
CVAHU Inputs........................................................ 46
CVAHU Equipment Control.................................... 48
CVAHU Economizer............................................... 49
CVAHU HC Stages................................................. 49
CVAHU Zone Options............................................ 50
CVAHU Miscellaneous........................................... 51
CVAHU PID............................................................ 52
CVAHU Custom Wiring .......................................... 53
CVAHU Wiring Diagram......................................... 53
Configuring Fan Coil Unit Controllers (FCU) .............. 54
FCU Outputs.......................................................... 55
FCU Inputs............................................................. 57
FCU Equipment Control......................................... 60
FCU Fan ................................................................ 61
FCU Switching Levels............................................ 62
(NXVFD)...................................................................... 89
Configuring the XL15C Plant Controller (XL15C)........ 91
Configuring the T7350 Thermostat Controller (T7350) 97
W7763C/D/E Chilled Ceiling Controller (CHC) ...........106
Constant Volume Air Handling Unit Controller
(CVAHU)...................................................................... 114
Fan Coil Unit Controller (FCU)....................................122
Hydronic Controller (HYD) ..........................................129
Excel 10 Remote Input/Output Device (RIO) ..............136
Unit Ventilator (UV) .....................................................138
Excel 10 VAV II Controller (VAV II) ..............................145
Vacon NX Frequency Converter (NXVFD)..................152
XL15C Plant Controller (XL15C) .................................155
T7350 Thermostat (T7350) .........................................168
175
95-7769—01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WEBVISION™
®
®
®
®
LON , LONWORKS , LonMark , and Echelon are registered trademarks of Echelon Corporation.
®
®
®
Microsoft , Windows , and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
®
Niagara Framework and the Niagara framework logo are registered trademarks of Tridium, Inc.
WebVision™ and WebStat™ are trademarks of Honeywell International Inc.
Automation and Control Solutions
Honeywell International Inc.
1985 Douglas Drive North
Golden Valley, MN 55422
Honeywell Limited-Honeywell Limitée
35 Dynamic Drive
® U.S. Registered Trademark
© 2010 Honeywell International Inc.
95-7769—01 M.S. 05-10
Printed in U.S.A.
Toronto, Ontario M1V 4Z9
www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|